;|:|p:-|;j|{!|;|-t!';''i|l:il|::;ii!f|^ 


ull|p  i.  1.  'Ml  Ctbrarg 


?Jnrth  (Earolttia  €>tat? 

SB471 
K47 


b662^3^i(o^  0 


WJCH.  LTH. 


SB471  ARCH.  cm. 

Kern 

Practice 
gardening 


/     I  K47      Kern 

'     '  Practical  landscape 


^<2.rcncKA<avsV     ^esecv;^- 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2009  witii  funding  from 

NCSU  Libraries 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/practicallandscaOOkern 


ARTIFICIAL   HOCKWORK. 

■  Construct-ai  by  G.  M.  Kern,  and  exhibited  at  the  Fall  Exhibition  of 
The  Cincinnati  Horticultural  Society— ISoi. 


PRACTICAL 


LANDSCAPE  GARDENING, 


WITH  REFERENCE  TO  THB 


IMPROVEMENT  OF  RURAL  RESIDENCES, 


THE  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OP  THE  ART; 

■WITH   FULL  DIRECTIONS   FOR 

PLAXTIXG  SHADE  TREES,  SHRUBBERY  AND  FLOWERS, 
AND  LAYING  OUT   GROUNDS. 

BY 
G.    M.     KERN. 

(  SECOND    EDITIOX.  ) 

C  I N  CI  N  N  ATI: 
MOOEE,    WILSTACH,    KEYS   &   CO., 

NO.    2r,    WEST    FOURTH    STREET. 

18  5  5.    . 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1S55,  by 

MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  &  CO., 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Ohio. 


stereotyped  and  Prioted  by 
MOORE,  TTILSTACH,  KEYS  &  OVEKE^^), 


TO 
ANDREW   H.  ERNST,  ESQ., 

DISTIXGCISHED   FOR   HIS  LOTE   OF   HOKTICCLTURAL  PURSUITS, 

S^l^is    ^  alum  t 

IS     RESPECTFULLY     INSCRIBED 

BY    THE 

AUTKOK. 


^'. 


■^: 


PRE  FAC  E 


^ » » •  ► 


A  DEMAND  tas  for  some  time  existed,  in  this  coun- 
try, for  a  work  in  which  should  be  embodied,  in  as  few 
and  plain  words  as  possible,  such  explanations  of  the 
Principles  of  the  Art  of  Landscape  Gardening,  as  well 
as  of  the  Practical  Operations  connected  ivith  it,  as  would 
make  the  subject  intelligible  to  that  very  large  class 
in  our  country  who  are  proprietors  of  a  portion,  great 
or   small,   oi   its   soil. 

To  supply  this  demand,  in  part  —  to  lay  before  the 
country  gentleman  certain  simple  and  well-tried  funda- 
mental rules,  which  may  guide  him  in  conducting  the 
various  improvements  and  embellishments  he  may  desire 
to  make — to  disseminate  a  knowledge  of  the  Art  of 
Gardening  among  a  large  class  of  our  Agriculturists, 
whom  existing  works  have  failed  to  reach  —  to  assist  in 
creating  a  more  general  appreciation  of  the  art  —  to  give 

(V) 


VI  PREFACE. 

such  light  to  all  as  will  enable  them,  even  if  settled 
down  in  the  wilderness,  by  a  few  simple,  but  tasteful 
embellishments,  to  add  beauty  to  their  residences,  or  as 
will  aid  them,  at  all  events,  in  preserving,  instead  of 
destroying  the  natural  beauties  of  the  country  —  these 
have  been  the  aims  of  the  Author,  in  placing  before 
the  public  the  present  volume. 

The  Principles  of  the  art  of  Landscape  Gardening,  as 
practiced  at  the  present  day,  have  been  laid  down  satis- 
factorily, and  at  some  length,  by  those  men  who  have 
been  most  eminent  in  its  practice  since  the  days  of  the 
great  originators  of  the  present  style,  Brown  and  Kent  — 
such  as  Eepton,  Loudon,  Whately  and  others,  in  Eng- 
land, Sckell,  in  Germany,  and  Gabriel  Thouin,  in  France. 
From  their  writings,  as  well  as  the  monuments  of  their 
artistic  skill,  which  remain  in  the  Gardens  of  Europe, 
the  Gardeners  of  the  present  day  must  study  their  art. 
They  pointed  out  to  their  successors  the  sources  whence 
they  derived  their  ideas.  They  teach  us  not  only  in 
what  respect  to  be  guided  by  Nature,  but  what  means 
we  must  use,  successfully  to  imitate  her.  Their  instruc- 
tions are,  however,  from  their  great  diffuseness,  of  but 
little  use  to  any  but  the  professional  gardener.  It  has, 
therefore,  been  the  aim  of  the  writer  to  present,  in  this 
Treatise,   the   choicest   ideas  of    the   leading   authors,    so 


PREFACE.  vn 

simplified  and  condensed  as  to  form,  if  possible,  a 
work  that,  being  intelligible  to  all,  will  be,  to  a 
certain  extent,  a  guide  to  the  most  inexperienced,  in 
the  formation   of    a   correct  taste. 

The  requisites  of  taste  are  well  described  by  Dr. 
Beattie,  under  five  distinct  heads,  as  follows:  "1.  A 
lively  and  correct  imagination :  2.  The  power  of  dis- 
tinct apprehension :  3.  The  capacity  of  being  easily, 
strongly,  and  agreeably  afiected  with  sublimity,  beauty, 
harmony,  correct  imitation,  etc. :  4.  Sympathy,  or  sen- 
sibility of  heart ;  and,  5.  Judgment,  or  good  sense ; 
which  is  the  principal  thing,  and  may,  not  very 
improperly,  be  said  to  comprehend  all  the  rest." 
Mankind  not  being  universally  endowed  with  these 
qualifications,  it  is  evidently  impossible  for  every  man 
to  be  the  possessor  of  correct  and  refined  taste,  which 
is  of  the  first  necessity  for  a  Gardener.  But  it  is 
both  possible  and  expedient  to  place  within  the  reach 
of  all,  such  information  as  will  give  them  some  defi- 
nite ideas  of  the  concomitants  which  go  to  make  up 
a  graceful  Scene,  or  beautiful  Landscape.  An  attempt 
to   do   this   is  made   in   the   following  pages. 

The  late  lamented  A.  J.  DowxixQ,  was  the  first 
to  bring  the  Art  of  Landscape  Gardening,  as  practiced 
in    Europe,    favorably    to    the    notice    of    the   American 


Vm  PKEFACE. 

Public.  By  his  labors,  in  various  sections  of  the 
Union,  and  more  especially  by  his  excellent  book  on 
Landscape  Gardening,  which  is  to  be  found  on  almost 
every  parlor-table  the  country  round,  he  did  very 
much  toward  disseminating,  and  popularizing  a  taste 
for  Eural  Embellishments.  His  untimely  death  was 
a  severe  loss  to  the  Art,  and  to  the  Country.  Since 
Mr.  Downing's  death,  owing  to  the  continued  prosperity 
of  the  Country,  the  Art  has  made  many  and  great 
advances,  and  nowhere  more  so  than  in  the  Great 
Mississippi  Valley.  Although  no  one  has  been  found 
to  fill  the  place  left  vacant  by  the  lamented  Downing, 
the  Art  has  many  worthy  representatives,  both  East 
and  West.  Among  these  we  will  mention  but  one, 
Adolphus  Stratjch,  Esq  ,  of  Cincinnati,  to  whose  en- 
lightened and  refined  taste  the  West  is  indebted  for 
some  beautiful  specimens  of  the  Art  to  which  he  has 
devoted    himself. 

It  has  been  thought  proper  to  divide  this  work 
into  two  parts:  the  first  devoted  to  an  exposition  of 
the  Theory  and  Practical  Operations  of  Landscape 
Gardening,  as  an  Art  of  Design  and  Taste:  the  other 
a  Treatise  Explanatory  of  its  Adaptation  to  Pleasure 
Grounds,    The   Earm,   and   Cemeteries,   etc.      In  order  to 


PREFACE.  IX 

make  it  as  complete  as  possible,  cotcise  but  explicit, 
and  methodically  arranged  Directions  for  tlie  Working 
of  a  Kitchen  Garden,  have  been  added.  Throughout 
the  Author  has  endeavored  to  confine  himself  strictly 
to  the  matter  in  hand,  making  his  explanations  and 
directions  as  concise  and  plain  as  the  nature  of  the 
subject   would  admit. 

If  he  shall  be  able  to  contribute  to  the  awaken- 
ing of  a  farther  interest  in  the  tasteful  ornamentation 
of  their  Grounds,  in  the  minds  of  the  Farmers  and 
Country  Gentlemen,  throughout  the  Union,  the  Author's 
most  ardent   wishes   will    be  gratified. 

Cincinnati,    March,    1855. 


CONTENTS. 


Dedication, 3 

Preface 5 

Contents 11 

Introduction,  History,  Etc 17 


PART  I. 

PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  ART. 

CHAPTER    I. 

Introductory  Remarks — Nature,  the  Model  of  the  Landscape 
Gardener — ^Utility — Congruity — Difference  between  Land- 
scape and  Picture  Gardening — The  Picturesque  Style — 
Individual  Taste,  how  far  admitted 37 

CHAPTER    II. 

Plantation — What  is  understood  by  Plantation — Principle 
and  Uses  of  Planting — The  Natural  Growth  on  the  Place 
to  be  regarded  as  a  leading  feature — Single  Trees — The 
Advantages  of  Grouping  in  Masses 47 

CHAPTER   III. 

Outlines — Shape  and  Character  of  Outlines  of  Groups — Mr. 
Whately's  Remarks — The  Margin  or  Ascending  Oblique 
Lines 62 

(xi  ) 


xii  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER    IV. 

Composition — Point  of  Connection — Effect  produced  by  simi- 
lar Shapes,  Leaves,  and  Tints  of  Trees — Harmony — 
Contrasts 68 

CHAPTER    V. 

Groves — Beauty  of  a  Grove — Its  Character — Single  Trees — 
Detached  Clumps — Flowering  Shrubbery,  and  Flowers  in 
the    Scenery 64 

CHAPTER    VI. 

Water  —  Plantation  near  the  Water-side  —  Lake  —  Pond  — 
Stream  or  Brook — Character  of  Water  in  the  Scenery — 
Giving  imaginary  Extent  to  the  Lake  or  Pond — Foun- 
tains— Lawn 69 

CHAPTER    VII. 

On  the  Choice  of  a  Situation  for  a  House — Repton's  Remarks 
— Convenience — Shade  and  Shelter — Shape  of  the  Ground 
— Convex — Concave — Plane — Alterations  of  the  Surface 
of  the  Ground 76 

CHAPTER    VIII. 

Roads  and  Walks — Use  and  Destination  of  a  Road — Character 
and  Course — The  Approach  —  Rockwork — Architectural 
Ornaments 84 

CHAPTER    IX. 

Freedom   of  Views — Exterior  and  Interior  Views — Way  to 

secure  them — Prospect-Tower 90 

CHAPTER    X. 

General  Remarks — Sources  of  Pleasure  in  Landscape  Garden- 
ing— Unity  and  Harmony — Scale  and  Proportion 94 


CONTENTS.  XIU 

PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS. 

CHAPTEK  XI. 

Introductory  Remarks  —  Manual  Labor  —  Capacities   of  tlie 

Gardener — First  Proceedings  on  the  Place 101 

CHAPTER    XII. 

Planting  —  General  Rules  for  setting  out  Trees  —  Single 
Trees  —  Groves  —  Solid  Masses  —  Treatment  of  Oblique 
Lines — Planting  Evergreens — Shrubbery  and  Flowers — 
Soils — Tree-holes — Treatment — Transplanting  large  Trees 
— Preparing  them  beforehand 106 

CHAPTER    XIII. 
Lawn — Sowing — Sodding — Keeping 121 

CHAPTER    XIV. 

Moving  Ground — Management   necessary  to  save  Labor  and 

Expense — Grading — raising  Eminences — Sinking  Valleys .     124 

CHAPTER    XV. 

Roads  and  Walks — Construction  of  Carriage  Roads — Con- 
struction of  Walks — Levels — Drainage 132 

CHAPTER    XVI. 
Water — ^Formation  of  Lakes  and  Ponds 140 

CHAPTER    XVII. 

Rockwork,  composed  of  Natural  Stones — Rockwork,  in  imita- 
tion of  Stalactites — Picturesque  Designs 143 

CHAPTER    XVIII. 
A  Plan— Working  Plan— Profile 149 


Xiv  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER    XIX. 

List  of  Trees  and  Shrubs  used  in  Landscape  Gardening- 
Evergreens — ^Deciduous  Trees  —  Climbing  Shrubs  —  Fine 
Flowering  Shrubs— Shrubs  requiring  Peat  or  Bog-Earth. .     152 


PAET    II. 

ORNAMENTAL    IMPROVEMENTS. 

CHAPTER    XX. 
Improvements — Comfort  and  Profit 171 

CHAPTER    XXI. 

City  Lots 176 

Figure  1  —  Plan  for  Private  Residence  —  City  Lot 180 

Figure  2  —  Double  House  in  City 182 

Figure  3  —  Residence,  -with  Garden,  occupying  Half   a 

Block 183 

Figure  i  —  Residence,  -with   Flower    Garden,   occupying 

"Whole  Block 185 

CHAPTER    XXII. 

The  Pleasure  Ground 187 

Figure  5  —  Suburban  Residence,  surrounded  by  Pleasure 

Ground  of  Two  Acres'  extent 195 

Figure  6  —  Suburban   Residence,  with   Pleasure-Ground 

and  Vegetable  Garden 197 

Figure  7  —  Country  Residence,  surrounded  by  Grove  of 

Forest  Trees 198 

Figure  8  —  House  situated  on  Terrace — Ornamented  with 

Statues,  Vases,  etc. — Large  Lawn  and  Shrubbery  in 

Front 199 


CONTENTS.  XV 

Figure  9  —  A  Ground    Plan,    showing  Three    Striking 

Scenes 203 

Figure  10  —  Suburban  Residence,  surrounded  by  Pleas- 
ure Ground — Parterre  of  Flowers  in  Front 205 

Figure  11  —  Country  Residence  with  Two  Extensive 
Lawns,  Orchard,  Kitchen-Garden  and  Poultry- 
Yard  209 

CHAPTER    XXIII. 

The  Flower  Garden, 211 

Figure  12  —  Parterre  of  Flowers  —  Center  of  Trellis- 
Work 211 

Figure  13  —  Flower    Garden   in  Geometric    style,   with 

Fountain 215 

CHAPTER    XXIV. 

Culture  of  Flowers  —  Annuals  best  adapted  for  sowing  in 
a  Hotbed — Annuals  which  are  best  sown  in  the  Gar- 
den —  Biennials  and  Perennials  —  Bulbous  Perennials — 
Tender  Bulbous  Flowers  —  Hardy  Bulbous  Flowers — 
Dahlias  —  The  Rose — Greenhouse  Plants 217 

CHAPTER    XXV. 
Fruit-Trees  — The  Orchard 241 

CHAPTER    XXVI. 

The  Farm 247 

Figure  11  —  Ground    Plan    of   an    Ornamental    Farm, 

Devoted  to  Cattle-grazing  and  Tillage 251 

CHAPTER    XXVII. 
Public  Squares  and  Parks 255 

CHAPTER    XXVIII. 

The  Cemetery 258 

Figure  15  —  Plan  for  Cemetery 260-61 


XVI  CONTENTS. 

THE  VEGETABLE  GARDEN. 

Remarks 268 

Aspect 270 

Shape  of  the  Ground 271 

The  Soil 272 

Manure 273 

Tillage 274 

Weeding  and  Cleaning 276 

Asparagus 279 

Rhubarb,  or  Pie  Plant 281 

Artichoke 282 

ANNUAL      VEGETABLES. 

Beans 283 

Peas 285 

Okra 286 

Tomato 287 

Egg  Plant  —  Peppers 288 

Melons 289 

Cucumber 290 

Squash  —  The  Pumpkin  —  Sweet  Corn 291 

Cabbage 292 

Cauliflower 293 

Broccoli 294 

Greens  —  Lettuce 295 

Endive 296 

Sorrel  —  Parsley —  Celery 297 

Radish 299 

Beet 300 

Turnip  —  Carrot 301 

Onion 302 

Potato 304 

The  Strawberry 307 

Forcing — Raising  Seed 314^317 

IN  CLOSURES. 

Fencing — Hedge-planting 320 


P  R  A  C  T  I  C  A  I 


jU 


LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 


INTEODUCTION— HISTORY,   ETC. 

A  DESIKE  to  possess  a  spot  of  ground  wliereon  to 
erect  a  liome,  or  abiding-place,  lias  been  a  ruling 
sentiment  in  the  human  breast  since  mankind  first 
emerged  from  tlie  nomadic  state,  which  tradition 
assures  us  was  the  primary  stage  of  the  existence 
of  our  race.  It  is  to  this  longing  for  a  place, 
where  might  be  realized,  in  their  fullest  sense  and 
effect,  the  feelings  of  mutual  affection  and  esteem 
which  bind  together  the  various  individuals  compos- 
ing a  family  circle  —  it  is  to  this  sentiment  that 
we  may  ascribe  the  first  rude  ideas  of  a  Garden; 
for  the  mind  which  coveted  ownership  could  scarcely, 
we  imagine,  refrain  from  the  desire   to  improve  and 

beautify  this  home. 

2  (17) 


18  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

To  protect  it  from  the  encroacliments  of  tlie  beasts 
of  tlie  wood  and  iSeld,  was  necessarily  one  of  tlie  first 
steps  in  tlie  formation  of  a  constant  abiding-place. 
To  supply  the  cravings  of  bunger  by  tbe  raising  of 
a  few  of  tbe  commonest  fruits  and  vegetables,  was 
probably  tbe  next.  So  far,  we  may  suppose  tbe 
rudest  nations,  wbose  habitations  were  fixed  or  sta- 
tionary, to  have  progressed.  The  next  step  in  ad- 
vance, and  the  first  in  the  art  of  Gardening  —  the 
cultivation  of  Flowers,  Fruits,  and  Shrubs  —  more  to 
please  the  eye  by  the  beauty  of  their  forms  and  the 
tastefulness  of  their  dispositions,  than  to  satisfy  the 
necessities  of  man — this  step  did  not,  and  could  not 
follow,  until  the  progress  of  civilization  had  created 
a  certain  taste,  and  consequent  desire  for  such  orna- 
mentation—  and  when  also  the  increase,  and  more 
unequal  distribution  of  wealth,  placed  it  in  the  power 
of  those  in  high  positions  to  add  to  their  state  or 
consequence  by  such  displays. 

Our  first  accounts  of  Gardens  on  a  large  scale, 
date  from  the  period  of  the  establishment  of  re- 
gal powers  in  the  earth.  That  much  progress  was 
made  in  the  art,  even  in  very  remote  times, 
seems  an  undisputed    fact;    and    it   is   by  many  au- 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC.  19 

thorities  supposed  that  tlie  Hanging  Gardens  of 
Nmeveh  and  Babylon,  have  not  heen  excelled  by 
any  displays  of  more  modern  times.  In  Rome,  and 
Greece,  too,  in  their  palmiest  days,  much  attention 
was  paid  to  Ornamental  Gardening,  and  from  the 
description  left  us  by  Pliny,  and  other  historians, 
there  is  no  doubt  that  the  sums  lavished  upon 
their  Gardens  by  the  Eomans,  during  the  Empire, 
were  not  expended  without  due  regard  to  taste. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  that,  as  the  first  ideas 
of  Gardens  were  in  connection  with  the  comforts 
and  pleasures  of  home,  so  all  nations  who  have 
at  any  time  practiced  gardening,  have  adhered  to 
this  idea,  by  endeavoring  to  combine  utility  with 
beauty,  and  by  modifying  the  principles  of  the  art, 
in  all  cases,  to  the  climate  and  country  in  which 
they  lived  ;  thus,  under  the  burning  skies  of 
Asia,  we  find  stately  groves  of  magnificent  shade- 
trees,  beneath  whose  shelter  their  indolent  posses- 
sors sought  relief  from  the  extreme  heat;  while  in 
the  more  genial  climes  of  Greece  and  Italy,  Gar- 
dens were  enriched  with  costly  statuary,  abounded 
in  pleasure  houses  and  other  architectural  displays, 
and    were    surrounded    and    planted    with    low    trees 


20  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC. 

and  shrubbery,  to  shade  without  excluding  the  light 
or  sun;  and  among  our  rude  ancestors,  the  Gauls 
and  Britons,  gardening  was  applied  jn-incipally  to 
vast  inclosures,  preserves  for  the  game,  which  they 
delighted    in    hunting. 

In  the  same  manner  the  Gardens  of  more  mod- 
ern nations  show  evidences  of  similar  adaptations 
of  taste  to  the  incidents  of  climate  and  country. 
In  Asia,  the  Gardens  of  to-day  are  but  fac-similes 
of  those  existing  thousands  of  years  ago,  in  Italy, 
when  the  conquering  hordes  of  Asia  effectually 
destroyed  the  art  of  gardening,  with  the  other  foot- 
prints of  civilization,  not  leaving  a  trace  standing, 
by  which  to  recognize  its  former  grandeur.  The 
style  of  art  in  the  seventeenth  century  differed  but 
little,  in  its  leading  features,  from  tliat  during  the 
Eoman  empire.  Cardinal  D'Est,  to  whom  the  revi- 
val of  the  art  in  Italy  is  principally  due,  con- 
structed his  celebrated  Gardens  upon  the  site  of 
those  of  the  Emperor  Adrian  (the  splendor  of  which 
history  has  made  known  to  us),  and  many  of  the 
vases,  statues,  etc.,  of  the  Koman  Garden  were 
here  brought  to  light,  and  re-applied  to  tlieir  former 
uses.      "  Balustraded    terraces    of   masonry ;    magnifi- 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC.  21 

cent  flights  of  steps ;  arcades  and  architectural  grot- 
toes; lofty  clipped  hedges,  with  niches  and  recesses, 
enriched  with  sculpture,  were  the  components  of  the 
Italian  style  of  gardening. 

The  Italian  style  was  the  first  introduced,  upon 
the  revival  of  the  art  in  Europe,  and  soon  ohtained 
in  every  part  of  the  continent,  as  well  as  in  Eng- 
land. The  French  altered  it  materially  to  suit  their 
cooler  climate,  and  more  level  country.  Less  fond 
of  elahorate  architectural  displays,  they  eschewed  the 
terraces  and  arcades  of  Italy,  supplying  their  places 
with  long  avenues  of  trees,  and  grass,  and  flower- 
plots  of  intricate  geometrical  forms.  Le  Notre, 
gardener  to  king  Louis  XIV,  was  the  master  spirit 
of  this  style,  and  his  models  and  plans  were  copied 
all  over  Europe,  and  are,  to  this  day,  the  truest 
representations  of  the  French  Style. 

When  Holland  became  the  great  emporium  of 
the  commerce  of  the  world,  the  art  of  Landscape 
Gardening  assumed  there  also  an  important  stand, 
and  there  was  formed  another  modification  of  the 
Italian,  called  the  "Dutch  Style."  It  consisted  of 
sloped  terraces  of  grass,  regular  shapes  of  land  and 


22  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

water,  formed  by  art,  and  adorned  with  trees  in 
pots,  or  planted  alternately,  and  closely  clipped,  to 
preserve  the  utmost  regularity  of  shape.  His  style 
abounded  in  the  quaint  and  grotesque,  which  made 
it  a  favorite  in  many  parts  of  Europe.  It  was 
introduced  into  England  by  King  William  III,  and 
prevailed  there  for  about  half  a  century.  The 
Dutch,  beside  originating  a  peculiar  style  in  gar- 
dening, have  the  greater  merit  of  introducing  to 
Europe  the  first  specimens  of  many  strange  species 
of  trees,  shrubs,  and  flowers,  principally  from  their 
East  Indian  possessions.  Some  of  these  have  become 
the  rarest  and  most  beautiful  ornaments  of  our  Gar- 
dens and  greenhouses.  They  also  acquired  a  great 
name  for  superiority  in  the  cultivation  of  bulbs, 
and  in  this  department  they  are  yet  unsurpassed. 
In  England,  various  styles  of  gardening  have 
been  the  fashion  at  different  times;  the  Italian  was 
the  first  to  be  imitated  there.  This  was  succeeded 
by  the  Freuch  aud  Dutch  styles.  To  all  these  suc- 
ceeded what  is  now  called  the  "Natural  Style," 
which  has,  in  turn,  been  favorably  received  and 
imitated   by    every    nation    of  Europe,  and    is    now 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC.  23 

fully  recognized  there,  and  in  this  country,  as  unit- 
ing in  itself  all  the  qualities  demanded  hy  the  most 
correct   and   refined  taste. 

Brown  and  Kent,  the  great  leaders  and  origin- 
ators of  this  style,  taught  that  nature  must  he  the 
only  model  of  the  gardener.  They  ohserved  that  in 
the  English  Gardens,  Nature,  distorted  at  great  lahor 
and  expense,  had  lost  her  power  of  pleasing  with 
the  loss  of  her  novelty  —  that  the  most  elaborate 
productions  of  art  resulted  in  naught  hut  tlie  most 
tiresome  sameness  of  forms  and  figures.  Disgusted 
with  the  universal  stifincss  and  monotony,  they 
boldly  struck  out  a  new  path  in  the  art.  They 
were  not  long  in  finding  admirers  and  patrons,  and 
o-reat  chau2;es  wore  made  in  the  Gardens  and 
grounds  of  the  nobility,  under  the  direction  of 
Brown.  The  straight  lines  and  stiff  terraces  of  the 
ancient  style,  were  succeeded  by  fl.owing  lines,  ex- 
tensive, smooth  lawns,  and  verdant  slopes ;  the  formal 
avenues  and  geometrical  clumps,  in  which  trees  had 
been  arranged,  were  superseded  by  pleasing  curves, 
and  an  irregularity  of  grouping,  which  relieved  the 
eye  and  beautified  the  scene. 

During    Mr.    Brown's    life,    these    improvements, 


24  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

carried  on  under  liis  own  direction,  were  character- 
ized by  moderation,  and  a  discriminating,  good  taste, 
wliicli  spared  many  of  the  heauties  of  the  old  style. 
His  successors,  who  were  mainly  his  working  men 
and  gardeners  —  possessed  of  his  ideas  without  his 
taste  in  their  application  —  his  zeal  without  his  dis- 
crimination, like  many  other  reformers,  mistook  de- 
struction for  improvement,  and  proceeded  with  a 
blind  fury,  to  cut  down  the  noblest  avenues  of  forest 
trees  —  the  growth  of  centuries  —  merely  because 
they  had  been  arranged  in  "straight  lines,"  which 
they  were  taught  to  abhor.  They  fell  into  the  mis- 
taken notion,  that  greatness  of  extent  would  j)roduce 
greatness  of  character  —  that  vastness  was,  in  effect, 
beauty;  their  works  therefore  soon  showed  naught 
but  an  immeasurable  extent  of  naked  lawns,  tedious 
lengths  of  belts  and  drives  —  a  useless  breadth  and 
tiresome  meandering  of  roads,  and  in  short,  an  arti- 
ficial irregularity,  which  showed  as  well  poverty  of 
conception  as  baldness  in  execution  and  effect.  Ob- 
stinately bent  upon  carrying  out  their  one  idea, 
they  sought  to  produce  the  requisite  impression  of 
vastness,  on  grounds  of  limited  extent,  by  leading 
the   approaches    to  the   house  a  tedious   round  over 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC.  25 

the  whole  estate.  Such  follies  and  extremes  could 
not  but  attract  the  ridicule  of  all  men  of  correct 
taste.  Various  Landscape  Painters  of  note,  in  Eng- 
land, came  to  the  aid  of  the  gardeners.  These 
desired  to  see  landscapes  arranged  with  a  view 
simply  to  their  effect  in  a  picture,  casting  aside 
the  connection  which  should  exist  between  beauty 
and  utility.  They  ignored  the  fact  that  a  land- 
scape in  Nature,  and  a  landscape  in  a  picture  are 
very  different  things,  and  that  consequently  Land- 
scape Painting  and  Landscape  Gardening  must  ever 
remain  distinct  arts.'' 

The  painters  insisted  upon  a  style  which  is 
called  the  Picturesque  or  Chinese  Style,  in  which 
the  wildness  and  abruptness  of  the  natural  woods 
was  not  only  imitated  but  exceeded  —  losing  sight 
of  the  fact  that,  in  bringing  these  qualities  of 
wildness  and  abruptness,  in  immediate  contact  with 
the  habitations  of  civilized  man,  the  unity  of  the 
whole  was  undoubtedly  destroyed.      They  condemned 


'■'An  explanation  of  the  principal  points  of  difference  between 
the  two,  will  he  found  in  the  chapter  on  "  the  Principles  of  the 
Art." 

3 


26  INTRODUCTION HISTORY,    ETC. 

tlie  smooth  lawns,  and  meandering  walks  of  Brown, 
as  strongly  as  the  stiff  parterres  and  terraces  of 
the  Italian  and  Dutch  styles.  The  scenes  of  wild 
nature,  with  a  foreground  composed  of  hriers,  stones, 
and  perhaps  a  mouldering  log  —  this  was  their 
beau-ideal  of   a  landscape. 

As  a  sample  of  this  taste,  Eepton  speaks  of 
the  grounds  of  Mr.  Knight,  a  painter  and  author, 
and  strong  advocate  of  this  style,  who  placed  near 
his  mansion  large  fragments  of  stone,  thrown  irreg- 
ularly among  hriers  and  weeds,  to  imitate  the 
foreground  of  a  picture.  The  "Picturesque  Style" 
was  found  to  he  hut  little  adapted  to  extensive 
grounds,    or   to   he   exclusively    employed   anywhere. 

To  Humphrey  Eepton,  Esq.,  an  English  gentle- 
man of  education  and  standing,  although  not  origi- 
nally a  professional  gardener,  helongs  the  credit  of 
first  combining  all  that  was  excellent  in  former 
styles,  and  adapting  this  union  or  combination  to 
the  Gardens  and  Parks  of  England.  He  founded 
what  may  be  called  "Eepton's  Style,"  which,  says 
Loudon,  "may  be  considered  as  consisting  of  the 
union  of  an  artistic  knowledge  of  the  suDJect,  with 
good    taste   and  good  sense."      Eepton    says  of  him- 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC.  27 

self,  tliat  lie  "labored  to  establish  the  fact  that 
true  taste,  in  Landscape  Gardening,  as  in  other 
polite  arts,  is  not  an  accidental  effect  operating  on 
the  outward  senses,  but  an  appeal  to  the  under- 
standing, which  is  able  to  compare,  to  separate, 
and  to  combine  the  various  sources  of  pleasure 
derived  from  external  objects,  and  to  trace  them  to 
some  pre-existing  causes  in  the  structure  of  the 
human  mind."  To  Mr.  Eepton's  genius  and  labors 
may  be,  with  justice,  ascribed  much  of  the  preva- 
lence of  good  taste  in  the  art,  as  practiced  at  the 
present  day.  His  works  are  consulted  and  studied 
as  authorities,  by  all  professional  gardeners,  and 
the  principles  laid  down  by  him  remain  undisputed. 
He  gave  the  name  of  Landscape  Gardening  to  this 
branch  of  the  art.  The  labors  of  Kepton  extended 
from  the  year  1783  to  his  death,  in  1818.  His 
last  work  on    gardening   was    published    in    IblG. 

The  "Natural  Style"  early  found  its  way  from 
England,  to  the  various  countries  of  Europe,  where 
it  was  adopted,  with  various  modifications  and  im- 
provements. Louis  Von  Sckell,  a  German,  wlio 
studied  in  England  the  masterpieces  of  Brown, 
Kent,    and    Chambers,    introduced     the     stvle     into 


28  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

Germany.  He  labored  not  only  to  copy,  but  to 
improve,  and  many  of  bis  works,  in  Germany  are  at 
tbis  day  considered  masterpieces.  He  paid  particu- 
lar attention  to  tbe  plantation  of  wood  and  forest 
scenery,  and  in  tbat  brancb  proved  bimself  supe- 
rior  to   all   bis   coteniporaries. 

A  growing  taste  for  Botany  and  Horticulture, 
and  tbe  introduction  of  many  foreign  plants,  bas 
given  rise,  in  England,  to  a  scbool,  or  style,  to 
wbicb  lias  been  given  tbe  name  of  Gardenesque.  Its 
characteristic  feature  is  tbe  display  of  tbe  beauty 
of  trees  and  otber  plants,  individually.  Loudon, 
says  of  it:  "According  to  tbe  'Gardenesque  School,' 
all  tbe  trees  and  sbrubs  planted,  are  arranged  in 
regard  to  tbeir  kinds  and  dimensions;  and  tbey 
are  planted  at  first,  at,  or  as  tbey  grow,  are  tbinned 
out  to,  sucb  distances  apart,  as  may  best  display  tbe 
natural  form  and  babit  of  eacb."  Tbis  style  may 
be  said  to  bave  always  existed  in  Botanic  Gardens, 
and  is  only  followed  elsewhere  from  tbe  natural 
desire  of  gardeners  and  amateurs  in  botany,  to 
display  to  the  best  advantage  tbeir  trees  and 
plants. 

Such    is    a    short    sketch    of   tbat   branch    of  the 


INTRODUCTION HISTORY,    ETC.  29 

art  of  "  Grardening,"  coming  properly  under  tlie 
heads   of  Taste  and   Design. 

Horticulture,  the  Art  of  cultivating  the  various 
plants  found  in  Gardens,  has  made  much  greater 
improvement,  within  the  last  century,  than  its  more 
theoretical  partner,  "Landscape  Gardening,"  and  in 
this  practical  age  we  may  expect  this  to  continue 
to  be  the  case.  If  we  have  made  large  advances 
in  the  methods  of  raising  and  cultivating  the  plants 
indigenous  to  our  soil,  yet  greater  have  been  made 
in  Europe,  in  the  cultivation  of  exotics,  and  green- 
house plants.  The  immense  wealth  centered  in  the 
hands  of  the  privileged  classes  of  society,  in  Eu- 
rope, has  given  an  impetus  to  this  branch  of  hor- 
ticulture, whicli  can  only  be  adequately  supported 
by  such  classes;  but  the  Horticulturist  and  Botanist 
are  indebted  to  the  widespread  commerce  of  the 
present  day,  principally,  for  the  advantages  they 
enjoy. 

It  is  known  that  during  the  Eoman  empire 
many  of  the  wealthy  Eomans  lavished  vast  sums 
upon  the  cultivation  of  exotic  plants.  But  Eome, 
with  all  her  magnificence,  was  trodden  beneath  the 
feet   of  the   barbarian    hordes   of  Asia,  and   it   was 


30  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

not  until  the  discovery  of  the  passage  to  the  Indies, 
in  the  fifteenth  century,  that  a  taste  for  the  culti- 
vation of  exotics  was  revived.  The  Dutch,  for  a 
long  time,  were  noted  for  the  splendor  of  their  col- 
lections, brought  at  that  time  from  every  land,  and 
every  clime  hy  their  ships,  which  visited  the  remot- 
est corners  of  the  earth,  in  pursuit  of  trade.  They 
are  still  noted  for  their  tulips,  hyacinths,  and  other 
flowers  and  j^lants,  which  yet  command  a  high 
price  in  the  flower  markets  of  the  world.  India 
and  America  have  added  a  vast  number  of  beau- 
tiful plants  to  the  lists  of  the  Gardener  and  Flo- 
rist, and  are  yet  yearly  contributing  no  small  share 
to  the  decoration  of  the  Gardens  of  Europe;  and 
we  may  hope  that  the  vast  unexplored  regions  of 
South  America,  where  vegetation  is  so  luxuriant, 
will  yet  add  more,  and  perhaps,  greater  beau- 
ties, to  the  collections  of  the  Botanist  and  Florist. 
In  England,  the  culture  of  greenhouse  plants  is 
at  present  carried  to  the  greatest  extent  and  per- 
fection. In  no  other  country  in  the  world,  is  the 
art  of  Gardening  carried  on  to  the  same  extent 
and  magnificence,  at  the  present  day,  as  in  Eng- 
land.      This  is  to   be  ascribed,  not   so   much    to  the 


INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC.  31 

possession  by  the  English  as  a  people  of  a  supe- 
rior taste  for  Horticulture,  but  to  the  immense 
wealth  which  is  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  priv- 
ileged orders  of  Society.  In  France  and  Ger- 
many, the  same  good  taste  prevails,  but  the  means 
for  making  a  similar  display  do  not  exist.  In 
America,  newly  settled,  and  where,  thanks  to  our 
republican  institutions,  wealth  and  real  estate  are 
more  equally  distributed,  the  art  of  "Landscape 
Gardening"  has  not  yet,  and  will  not,  perhaps,  for 
a  long  series  of  years,  reach  the  eminence  to  which 
it  has  attained  in  long-settled  Europe;  yet  a  strong 
and  growing  taste  for  rural  improvements  obtains 
throughout  the  Union,  and  in  tlie  Eastern  States  may 
already  be  found  very  many  villas  and  country 
residences,  which  will  vie  with  anything  of  the 
kind  to  be  found  in  Europe,  in  the  display  of  taste, 
although    probably  not    in    magnificence. 

This  taste  for  rural  improvement  seems,  how- 
ever, to  be,  in  a  great  measure,  confined  to  that, 
as  yet,  small  class  of  our  citizens  who  have  both 
wealth  and  leisure  to  devote  to  the  object.  It  is 
much  to  be  wished  that  a  proper  taste  and  desire 
for  rural  embellishments  miaht  be  awakened  amono- 


32  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,   ETC. 

our  people  generally,  and  more  particularly  among 
agriculturists.  A  very  great  proportion  of  the 
citizens  of  the  Union  are  the  possessors  of  a  por- 
tion of  land,  of  greater  or  smaller  dimensions,  vary- 
ing from  the  narrow  town  lot  to  the  broad  farm 
of  hundreds  or  perhaps  thousands  of  acres.  It  is 
highly  desirable  that  these  should  become  inter- 
ested in  the  cultivation  of  a  proper  taste  for  rural 
embellishment  —  and  should  at  least  be  possessed 
of  the  knowledge  that,  be  their  place  ever  so  small 
or  confined,  they  can,  by  a  proper  management  of 
the  advantages  of  situation,  etc.,  and  at  very  lit- 
tle expense,  add  materially  to  its  beauty  and  (what 
may  be  of  more  importance  to  some)  to  its  cash 
value.  Our  country  possesses  many  and  great  ad- 
vantages over  the  older  or  longer-settled  lands  of 
Europe,  to  facilitate  the  operations  of  the  Land- 
scape Gardener.  Her  forests,  the  growth  of  cen- 
turies, still  adorn  the  natural  landscape,  and  need 
only  the  light  but  skillful  touches  of  a  tasteful 
hand,  to  make  the  \ievi  surpass,  in  grandeur  and 
beauty,  all  that  the  care,  training,  and  art  of  Eu- 
rope have  been  able  to  produce.  A  just  apprecia- 
tion  of  natural   beauties  would   do   much   to   arrest 


INTKODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC.  33 

the  heartless  and  objectless  course  of  destruction 
which  now  prompts  a  great  part  of  our  agricul- 
tural community  to  cut  down,  remorselessly,  the 
noblest  trees  of  the  forest  —  and  for  what  ?  —  for 
firewood  —  or  to  make  a  clearing  before  their  houses 
(in  which,  afterward,  to  plant  some  miserable  locusts), 
or  forsooth,  to  square  off  the  corner  of  a  corn- 
patch.  Thus  many  beautiful  scenes  of  primitive 
forest  growth,  which  now  fall  before  the  ax  of  the 
woodman,  might  be  preserved  without  injury  either 
to  individual  or  agricultural  interests.  A  profes- 
sional Landscape  Gardener,  in  traveling  through 
many  parts  of  our  country,  and  particularly  the  West, 
can  not  fail  to  see  that  it  is,  as  yet,  a  much  more 
important  work  to  preserve  old,  than  to  create  new 
beauties.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  growing 
good  taste  of  our  farmers  will  lead  them  to  the 
same   opinion. 

The  American,  and  more  particularly  the  Amer- 
ican farmer,  is  as  yet  too  much  of  a  utilitarian. 
Beginning  life  with  little  or  no  capital,  his  labor 
is  too  severe  to  permit  him  to  care  for  more  than 
the  substantialities  of  life.  When  he  has  finally 
settled  down   in  comfortable  circumstances,   and    has 


34  INTRODUCTION  —  HISTORY,    ETC. 

time  and  taste  for  embellisliiug  his  grounds  a  little, 
lie  lias  still  to  contend  with  a  lack  of  assistance 
for  his  work.  Gardeners  are  not  much  more  plenty; 
and  finally  comes  in  again  the  bughear,  "  expense," 
to  frighten  him  from  his  purpose.  He  thinks  that, 
after  all,  it  is  of  but  little  use  —  that  it  will  be 
an  outlay  for  which  there  will  be  no  return  —  that 
the  old  cabin,  with  the  stables  in  front,  and  the 
orchard  behind,  is,  after  all,  very  comfortable  —  and 
so  the  whole  subject  is  dropped. 

So  little  is  yet  understood,  in  some  parts  of 
this  country,  of  the  comparative  value  of  a  beauti- 
ful piece  of  ground,  great  or  small  in  extent  —  so 
little  of  the  true  theory  and  practice  of  Landscape 
Gardening,  that  property  owners  are  often  frightened 
at  the  price  asked  by  a  competent  man,  for  his 
services  in  laying  out  a  place ;  and  oftener  yet, 
disgusted  and  discouraged  at  the  work  of  an  incom- 
petent one,  who  has  been  employed  because  willing 
to  labor  cheaper.  An  efficient  Landscape  Gardener 
should  be  a  man  of  education  and  taste,  one  whose 
experience  has  been  gained  by  an  examination  of 
the  masterpieces  of  the  art  in  Europe  and  this  coun- 
try, and  whose  general  qualifications  are   such  as  to 


INTRODUCTION HISTORY,    ETC.  35 

make  liim  a  companion  for  any  man.  It  can  not 
be  expected  that  such  men  will  work  for  the  wages 
of  a  day  laborer.  And,  when  laying  out  a  work 
of  taste,  it  is  surely  more  profitable  to  employ  such 
a  one,  than  to  have  a  work,  intended  to  adorn, 
spoiled  by  one  whose  mind  is  not  equal  to  his  task. 
The  American  taste  for  extra-mural  burying- 
grounds,  has  opened  among  us  a  wide  field  for  the 
display  of  Landscape  Gardening,  and  promises  to 
become  a  principal  means  of  introducing  and  foster- 
ing, in  this  country,  a  correct  taste  in  such  matters. 
Several  of  the  Cemeteries  attached  to  our  larger 
cities,  as  Mt.  Auburn,  near  Boston,  and  Greenwood, 
near  New  York,  have  been  laid  out  by  men  of 
prominence  in  the  art,  and  after  the  most  approved 
rules,  and  for  beauty  of  situation,  and  tastefuluess 
of  design,  vie  with  anything  of  the  kind  in  Europe. 


PART     I. 


PEINCIPLES    OF    THE    ART. 


CHAPTER    I. 

INTRODUCTORY     REMARKS. 

"  'WTiate'er  its  essence,  whate'er  its  name, 
Whate'er  its  modes,  'tis  still  iu  all,  the  same; 
'  T  is  proper  congruity  of  parts  combined. 
Must  please  the  senses  and  satisfy  the  mind." 

It  is  in  the  works  of  Nature  the  Landscape 
Gardener  finds  the  examples  he  is  to  copy.  It 
behooves  him,  therefore,  in  order  to  acquaint  him- 
self with  the  principles  upon  which  he  is  to  work, 
to  examine  attentively  the  effect  produced  upon  the 
mind  by  the  various  groupings,  tints  and  forms  of 
plants  —  the  pleasing  irregularities  of  the  earth'h 
surface  —  the  verdant  meadows  and  slopes  —  the  bab- 
bling brooks,  quiet  fields,  grand  mountain  scenery,  etc. 

Nature    has    placed    before    our    eyes    an    endless 

i  37  ) 


38  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GAEDENING. 

cliange  of  objects,  organic  and  inorganic,  differing 
one  from  the  other,  in  form,  character  and  location. 
The  most  casual  observer  will  find,  in  these  objects, 
an  increasing  variety  of  expression  —  an  ever-vary- 
ing change  —  in  their  effect  upon  his  feelings  or 
temperament. 

To  analyze  the  causes  of  the  various  changes 
in  the  arrangement  of  natural  objects  —  to  separate 
and  examine  the  different  shades  and  shapes,  forms, 
tints  and  groupings  —  is  to  study  Nature,  as  the 
Landscape  Gardener  should.  To  be  able  to  see  at 
a  glance  the  beauties  and  deformities  of  a  natural 
landscape  —  to  add  to  the  first  and  take  away  the 
last,  by  the  skillful  but  invisible  touches  of  art  — 
to  arrange  an  artificial  landscape  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  produce  the  effects  of  the  choicest  scenes  of 
Nature  —  hightening  these  again  by  the  efforts  of 
Art  —  this  is  the  business  of  the  Landscape  Gardener. 

An  absence  of  formality,  of  abrupt  changes  or 
violent  breaks  or  contrasts,  is  the  marked  feature 
of  the  natural  vegetation.  As  we  find  nowhere,  as 
a  rule,  abrupt  changes  in  the  soil,  as  from  clay  to 
sand,  from  mountainous  to  low  or  marshy,  so  neither 
do  we  see  anvwhere  anv  intermixture  of  vegetation. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  39 

of  species  difFering-  radically  from  one  another  in 
structure  or  organization.  All  nature's  changes  aro 
gradual,  her  lines  flowing  and  graceful.  Sown  by 
the  winds,  her  seeds  germinate  only  in  the  soils 
best  suited  to  their  wants.  Thus,  with  each  soil 
is  found  its  peculiar  form  of  vegetation;  as  one 
changes,  so  does  the  other.  The  preservation,  in 
an  artificial  landscape,  of  this  unity  and  congruity, 
together  with  the  combination,  to  as  great  degree 
as  possible,  of  the  useful  with  the  beautiful,  should 
be  the   principal   aims  of  the  gardener. 

Improvements  are  made  for  various  purposes. 
The  Grounds  more  immediately  surrounding  the 
habitation  of  man,  are  laid  out  with  a  view-  to  the 
convenience  and  pleasure  of  their  possessor.  As 
these  grounds  are  necessarily  of  limited  extent,  an 
imitation  in  them  of  the  grander  works  of  Nature, 
is  plainly  out  of  place,  as  being  out  of  proportion 
to  the  whole,  and  diminishing,  by  their  vastness, 
the  eftect  of  other,  otherwise,  agreeable  objects. 
Thus,  should  a  cottage  be  placed  in  the  midst  of 
a  clump  of  tall  maples,  or  hickories,  or  oaks,  a  con- 
trast would  be  created  betw^een  the  two  chief 
objects,   the  trees   and   the  house,   which    would  give 


40  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

the  latter  the  appearance  of  an  insignificant  hovel, 
while  the  former  would  show  naught  but  bare, 
unsightly  sticks.  Immediately  adjoining  the  habi- 
tations of  man,  everything  should  assume  its  char- 
acter, and  not  only  be,  but  appear  to  be,  dressed 
and  cultivated.  In  such  situations,  neat  gravel- 
walks  and  smooth  grass-plots,  and  flowering  plants 
and  shrubs,  trained  and  distributed  by  art,  are 
perfectly  in    character. 

The  Park,  of  greater  extent,  and  not  so  inti- 
mately connected  with  the  mansion,  may,  and  should 
partake  of  the  vastness  and  grandeur  of  Nature's 
own  works.  While  the  grounds  surrounding  the 
house  must  be  ornamented  with  a  view  to  conform- 
ity or  unity  of  appearance,  and  size  of  the  dwell- 
ing, the  park  gives  the  gardener  a  wider  range  for 
the  development  of  his  ideas.  "  The  chief  beauty 
of  a  park  consists  in  uniform  verdure ;  undulating 
lines  contrasting  with  each  other  in  variety  of 
forms;  trees  so  grouped  as  to  produce  light  and 
shade,  to  display  the  varied  surface  of  the  ground; 
and  an  undivided  range  of  pasture.  The  animals 
fed  in  such  a  park,  appear  free  from  confinement, 
at  libertv   to  collect   their  food   from   the   rich  herb- 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  41 

age  of  tTie  valley,  and  to  range  uncontrolled  to  the 
drier   soil  of  the   liills." 

Public  Gardens,  laid  out  only  for  pleasure,  re- 
quire again  a  different  style,  abounding  more  in 
architectural  display,  and  differing  materially  from 
both  park  and  private  ground.  Cemeteries,  again, 
are  to  be  differently  improved,  although  partaking 
much  of  the  nature  of  parks.  Thus  must  the 
gardener  study,  not  only  the  intrinsic  advantages 
and  defects  of  a  place,  but  also  its  fitness  for  the 
purposes  to  which  it  is  to  be  applied,  in  order 
that  he  may  succeed  in  giving  to  it  that  greatest 
charm,    "  the   right   thing   in   the   right   place." 

While  the  gardener's  work  of  ornamentation  is 
performed  by  a  grouping  together  of  various  beau- 
tiful and  striking  objects,  he  has  ever  to  bear  in 
mind  their  effect  when  combined.  It  is  very  evident 
that  any  number  of  objects  may,  individually,  be 
very  beautiful  or  striking,  yet  taken  collectively, 
their  effect  may  be  marred  or  destroyed  by  reason 
of  their  failure  to  harmonize  with  each  other  — 
thus  maintaining  a  forced  individuality  of  character 
"where    all   should    be    harmonious    and    congruous. 

The  gardener  must,  therefore,  possess  the  faculty  of 
4 


42  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

foreseeing  what  will  be  the  effect  of  certain  com- 
binations or  groupings  —  to  view  with  a  painter^ s  eye 
the  landscape  he  is  creating.  Yet  it  is  important 
that  he  should  not  fall  into  the  error,  somewhat 
common,  of  supposing  that  what  would  strike  the 
painter  as  a  beautiful  scene  for  a  picture,  is  also 
likely  to  be  a  fine  scene  in  nature.  The  following 
explanation,  by  Bepton,  of  the  distinction  between 
a  natural  landscape  and  one  in  a  picture,  shows  so 
well  what  should  be  the  principal  considerations  of 
the  gardener,  in  Jiis  bird's-eye  view,  that  we  quote  it: 

"  The  difference,"  says  Eepton,  "  betwixt  a  scene 
in  nature,  and  a  picture  on  canvas,  arises  from  the 
following  considerations  :  First,  The  spot  from  whence 
the  view  is  taken  is  in  a  fixed  state  to  the  painter; 
but  the  gardener  surveys  his  scenery  while  in  mo- 
tion ;  and  from  different  windows  in  the  same  front,  he 
sees  objects  in  different  situations;  therefore,  to  give 
an  accurate  portrait  of  a  gardener's  improvement, 
would  require  pictures  from  each  separate  window, 
and  even  a  different  drawing  at  the  most  trifling 
change  of  situation,  either  ip  the  approach,  the 
walks,  or  the  drives  about   each   place. 

"  Secondly,  The  quantity  of  view,  or  field  of  vision 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  43 

in  nature,  is  much  greater  than  any  picture  will 
admit. 

"  Thirdly,  The  view  from  an  eminence,  down  a 
steep  hill,  is  not  to  he  represented  in  painting, 
although  it  is  often  one  of  the  most  pleasing  cir- 
cumstances   of  natural   landscape. 

"  Fourthly,  The  light  which  the  painter  may 
bring  from  any  point  of  the  compass,  must,  in 
real  scenery,  depend  on  the  time  of  day.  It  must 
also  be  remembered,  that  the  light  of  a  picture 
can  only  be  made  strong  by  contrast  of  shade; 
while  in  nature,  every  object  may  be  strongly  illu- 
minated, without  destroying  the  composition  or  dis- 
turbing  the   keeping. 

"  Lastly,  The  foreground,  which,  by  framing  the 
view,  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the  picture,  is  often 
totally  deficient,  or  seldom  such  as  a  painter  chooses 
to  represent;  since  the  neat  gravel-walk,  or  the 
close  mown  lawn  would  ill  supply  the  place,  in 
painting,  of  a  rotten  tree,  a  bunch  of  docks,  or 
a  broken  road,  passing  under  a  steep  bank  cov- 
ered  with   briers,   nettles,    and   ragged   thorns."* 

^Sketches  and  Hints  on  Landscape  Gardening,  by  H.  Repton,  Esq., 
originally  published  in  1795. 


44  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

A  non-appreciation  of  the  objections  here  set  out, 
led  to  the  error  of  ornamenting  the  grounds  sur- 
rounding the  mansion,  in  what  is  called  the  pic- 
turesque style.  This  style,  in  its  fullest  sense,  is 
only  suited  to  certain  conformations  of  ground,  and 
should  be  used  very  sparingly.  It  is  not  consid- 
ered either  suitable  or  convenient  for  the  vicinity 
of  the  homestead." 

** "  The  Picturesque.  This  word  has,  of  late,  excited  considerable 
interest  and  controversy;  but  the  word,  like  many  others  in 
common  use,  is  more  easy  to  be  understood  than  defined ;  if 
it  means  all  subjects  capable  of  being  represented  in  a  pic- 
ture, it  will  include  the  pig-sties  of  Moreland,  as  well  as  the 
filthy  hostels  of  Teniers  and  Ostade;  ^ut  the  absurdity  of  rep- 
resenting all  that  is  visible,  without  selecting  what  is  most 
beautiful,  can  not  be  better  exemplified  than  by  the  following 
fact:  One  of  our  most  eminent  Landscape  Painters,  was  desired 
to  make  a  portrait  of  a  gentleman's  country-seat;  he  saw  the 
place  during  a  land-flood;  and  when  the  whole  valley  was  cov- 
ered by  vapor,  he  made  a  beautiful  picture  of  a  fog,  after  the 
manner  of  Vernet ;  and  thus  painted  an  atmospheric  effect,  when 
he  should  have  painted  a  landscape.  In  like  manner,  a  beau- 
tiful woman,  represented  during  a  fainting  fit,  may  display 
great  ingenuity  in  the  artist;  but  surely  this  is  sickly  pictu- 
resqueness.  The  subject  represented  by  Sal va tor  Rosa,  and  our 
English    Mortimer,   are    deemed    picturesque,  but    are    they    fit 


mTRODUCTORY     REMARKS.  45 

And  here  we  come  to  anotlier  matter  demand- 
ing the  consideration  of  the  gardener,  viz :  How  far 
may  individual  taste  be  consulted?  As  there  is  an 
infinite  variety  in  the  aspects  of  nature,  and  in 
the  natural  shape  of  the  earth's  surface,  it  has 
been  found  impossible  to  lay  down  any  fixed  rules 
by  which  to  lay  out  all,  or  any  given  number  of 
places.  But  there  are  two  considerations  wliich 
should  never  be  lost  sight  of.  These  are,  utility, 
and  unity,  or  harmony  and  fitness  of  parts.  The 
introduction  into  a  scene  or  landscape,  of  anything 
not  in  keeping  with  its  main  featui*es  (a  thing 
often  done  by  pro/fssetZ  gardeners,  who  mistake 
tawdry  for  taste),  is  an  inexcusable  piece  of  snob- 
bishness, which  finds  its  parallel  only  in  the  igno- 
rance of  mock  gentility,  which,  aping  the  manners 
of  those  above  it  in  station,  succeeds  only  in  mak- 
ing itself  ridiculous.      For  this  there  is  no  excuse. 

In  selecting  a  style  of  ornamentation,  attention 
should   be    paid  to  the  leading  features    of  the  sur- 


objects  to  copy  for  the  residence  of  man,  in  a  polished  and 
civilized  state  ?  Certainly  not." — Reptcm's  Fragments  on  Theory  and 
Practice  of  Landscape  Gardening. 


46        PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

rounding  country,  so  as  to  preserve  a  certain  har- 
mony with  its  general  appearance,  else  will  the 
hand   of  Art   he   too   plainly  visible. 

The  adoption  of  one  style  or  school  of  garden- 
ing, as  better  than  all  the  others,  and  there- 
fore to  be  employed  under  all  circumstances,  is 
much  to  be  condemned.  The  gardener  should  fami- 
liarize himself  with  the  various  Styles,  to  enable 
him  to  attain  the  same  object  by  different  means. 
In  this  way  he  would  be  able  to  adopt  the  style 
or  school  best  adapted  to  the  situation,  climate  or 
circumstances  in  which  he  is  placed,  or  to  adopt 
and  combine  such  parts  of  difterent  styles  as  may 
best  attain,  in  any  given  locality,  the  object  in  view. 
Art  and  Nature  would  thus  be  more  harmoniously 
combined,  and  improvements  effected  of  a  more  dis- 
tinct  and   interesting  character. 


CHAPTER   II. 


PLANTATION. 


By  the  term  Plantation,  we  understand  that  part 
of  Garden  scenery  composed  of  Trees,  Shrubs,  Flow- 
ers, etc,  whether  planted  by  man,  or  springing  up 
naturally,  and  made  use  of  by  the  Gardener  in  his 
work  of  improvement.  Beside  its  importance  in 
improving  and  ornamenting  grounds.  Plantation  is 
of  use  in  concealing  boundaries,  thereby  creating 
an  impression  of  vastness  of  extent;  in  hiding  from 
sight  disagreeable  views,  such  as  outhouses,  stables, 
sheds,  etc.,  and  in  giving  privacy  to  the  house  and 
surrounding  grounds.  In  the  formation  of  Plan- 
tations, the  gardener  must  keep  in  mind  the  har- 
monies and  contrasts  presented  by  the  forms  and 
tints  of  the  various  plants,  and  the  effects  of  light 
and   shadow,   hight   and   distance,  upon   the   various 

groups   and   single   specimens. 

(47) 


48  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

In  commencing  an  improvement,  the  gardener 
should  pay  much  attention  to  the  trees  and  shruhs 
already  existing  upon  the  place.  The  forest  trees 
used  for  ornamental  purposes  are  of  slow  growth, 
requiring  years,  and  sometimes  centuries  to  attain 
their  prime  and  beauty.  If  such  already  exist 
upon  the  grounds  they  can  scarcely  be  prized  too 
highly,  and  should  be  taken  duly  into  consideration 
in  the  formation  of  the  plan.  Sickly,  or  deformed, 
or  broken  trees  should  not  be  spared,  but  the  ax 
should  be  used  very  sparingly,  and  never  except  in 
the  execution  of  such  princijiles  of  the  art,  as  can 
not  be  sacrificed  without  detracting  from  the  beauty 
of  the  whole.  Our  country  has  been  so  favored 
by  the  bountiful  hand  of  Nature,  that  in  many 
places  the  gardener  will  find  abundant  materials 
ready  to  his  hand,  and  needs  but  to  form  his  plan 
in  accordance  with  the  ruling  features  of  the  grounds, 
and  to  apply  a  few  discriminating  touches  of  his 
art,  to  create  a  scene  far  surpassing,  in  grandeur, 
the   noblest   works  of  art   alone. 

The  hand  of  art  must  be  indiscernible  in  Plan- 
tation, which  should  be  in  close  imitation  of  Na- 
ture's   best   works,    and    only   recommending    itself 


PLANTATION.  49 

beyond  the  natural  Landscape,  by  the  presence  of 
trees  and  shrubs  not  indigenous  to  the  soil,  and  the 
absence  of  aught  to  displease  the  eye,  or  detract 
from  the  harmony  of  the  whole,  creating  thus  a 
superior   elegance   of  arrangement. 

The  great  art  in  Plantation  is  the  harmonious 
union  of  different  parts,  each  of  which  has  a  place 
or  purpose  in  the  general  arrangement.  The  gar- 
dener has  to  pay  regard  to  outward  forms — to  shape 
of"  trees,  to  form  of  leaves,  to  their  different  colors, 
their  hight,  the  rapidity  of  their  growth,  compara- 
tively— and  thus  judge  as  to  their  general  harmony. 

A  single  tree  presents  to  the  eye  a  mass  of 
foliage,  boughs  and  leaves,  the  various  parts  of  which 
harmonize  together  in  form  and  color.  It  is  this 
harmony  which  gives  pleasure  to  the  mind,  and 
which  we  call  its  beauty.  We  find  that  a  mass 
or  group  composed  of  a  number  of  trees  of  the 
same  species,  while  harmonizing  in  form  and  color, 
will  present  much  more  vividly  to  the  mind  of  the 
beholder  the  various  peculiarities  or  beauties  of  out- 
line or  color  of  the  species,  than  will  a  single  spe- 
cimen. Harmonizing  easily  and  pleasantly,  also,  in 
their   growth    and   shade,   the    peculiar   conformation 


so  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

of  their  leaves  and  boughs,  and  their  colors,  it  is 
evident  that  masses  of  vegetation  consisting  entirely 
of  one  family  will  give  more  pleasure  than  single 
specimens,  and  more  yet  than  a  confused  intermix- 
ture of  various  kinds.  Thus  a  striking  effect  is 
produced  by  groups  of  trees  or  shrubs  whose  bark 
is  of  a  bright  and  distinctive  color,  such  as  the 
Gold-barked  Willow  (yellow),  the  Dogwood  (red), 
the  Acer  negundo,  and  Sassafras  (green).  These 
peculiarities  would  be  lost  sight  of  were  they  scat- 
tered singly  among  other  trees.  Masses  of  Eoses, 
Lilacs,  Jasmines,  Snowballs,  Catalpas  or  Ked-buds, 
present  a  beautiful  appearance,  while  any  one  may 
see  in  our  common  garden-spots,  how  tasteless  a 
view  is  presented  by  an  indiscriminate  gathering 
together    of   flowers    and    shrubs. 

"  No  group  of  trees  can  be  natural  in  which 
the  plants  are  studiously  placed  at  equal  distances, 
however  irregular  in  their  forms.  Those  pleasing 
combinations  of  trees  which  we  admire  in  forest 
scenery,  will  often  be  found  to  consist  of  forked 
trees,  or  at  least  of  trees  placed  so  near  each 
other  that  the  branches  intermix,  and  by  a  natu- 
ral effort  of  veo;etation  the  stems  of  the  trees  them- 


PLANTATION.  51 

selves  are  forced  from  that  perpendicular  direction 
wliich  is  always  observable  in  trees  planted  at  regu- 
lar distances  from  each  other.  No  groups  will 
therefore  appear  natural  unless  two  or  more  trees 
are  planted  very  near  each  other."  To  produce 
this  effect,  two  or  more  trees  should  sometimes  be 
planted  in  the  same  hole,  their  roots  being  cut 
so  as   to  brins:   them   nearer  together. 


CHAPTER  III. 


OUTLINES. 


The  form  of  the  outlines  of  masses,  or  groups 
has  a  marked  effect  upon  the  scenery.  A  flowing, 
or  straight  line  will  give  a  flat,  unmeaning  ap- 
pearance to  a  piece  of  woods,  whereas  a  rugged, 
broken  outline,  letting  light  fall  into  the  deej) 
recesses,  and  creating  strong  lines  and  contrasts 
of  light  and  shade,  will  give  to  the  same  wood 
an  appearance  of  depth,  and  grandeur,  and  natu- 
ral freedom.  The  inlets,  or  incisions  into  the 
line  of  woods,  may  he  varied  in  depth,  or  inten- 
sity, in  order  to  make  them  appear  the  work  of 
nature.  On  reviewing  the  whole,  should  any  one 
of  these  incisions  not  have  a  sufficiently  marked 
appearance,  single  trees,  planted  before  it,  will  af- 
ford   the    requisite    relief.       The    difierent    parts    of 

plantation,   in    a    Garden,  taken  as    a  whole,  should 
(  ->2  ) 


OUTLINES.  53 

appear    in    a    freely    broken    line,    as    the    different 
parts   of  a   single   mass  —  never  in    a  straight  line. 

A  distinguished  English  writer  on  Gardening,* 
speaks  so  much  to  the  point,  on  the  subject  of 
Outlines,  that  we  are  tempted  to  give  his  obser- 
vations. 

"The  outline  of  a  wood,"  says  Mr.  Whately, 
"  may  sometimes  be  great,  and  always  be  beauti- 
ful ;  the  first  requisite,  is  irregularity.  That  a 
mixture  of  trees  and  underwood  should  form  a 
long  straight  line,  can  never  be  natural;  and  a 
succession  of  easy  sweeps,  and  gentle  rounds,  each 
a  portion  of  a  greater  or  less  circle,  composing, 
altogether,  a  line  literally  serpentine,  is,  if  possi- 
ble, worse :  it  is  but  a  number  of  regularities, 
put  together  in  a  disorderly  manner,  and  equally 
distant  from  the  beautiful,  both  of  art  and  of 
nature.  The  true  beauty  of  an  outline  consists 
more  in  breaks  than  in  sweeps;  rather  in  angles 
than   in   rounds ;   in   variety,   not   in   succession. 

"  The  outline  of  a  wood  is  a  continued  line, 
and    small    variations    do    not    save    it    from    the 

*  Whately,    "Observations    on    Modern    Gardening."  London; 
1801. 


54  PKACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

insipidity  of  sameness.  One  deep  recess  —  one  bold 
prominence  —  lias  more  effect  than  twenty  little 
irregularities.  That  one  divides  the  line  into 
parts,  but  no  breach  is  thereby  made  in  its  unity; 
a  continuation  of  wood  always  remains;  the  form 
of  it,  only,  is  altered,  and  the  extent  is  increased. 
The  eye,  which  hurries  to  the  extremity  of  what- 
ever is  uniform,  delights  to  trace  a  varied  line 
through  all  its  intricacies  —  to  pause  from  stage  to 
stage,   to   lengthen   the   progress. 

"The  parts  must  not,  however,  on  that  account, 
"be  multiplied,  until  they  are  too  minute  to  be 
interesting,  and  so  numerous  as  to  create  confu- 
sion. A  few  large  parts  should  be  strongly  dis- 
tinguished in  their  forms,  their  directions,  and 
their  situations ;  each  of  these  may  afterward  be 
decorated  with  subordinate  varieties,  and  the  mere 
growth  will  occasion  some  irregularity.  On  many 
occasions    more   will   not   be   required. 

"Every  variety  in  the  outline  of  a  wood  must 
be  a  'prominmce,  or  a  recess;  breadth,  in  either, 
is  not  so  important  as  length  to  the  one,  and 
depth  to  the  other;  if  the  former  ends  in  an 
angle,    or   the    latter   diminishes    to   a    point,   they 


OUTLINES.  65 

have  more  force  than  a  shallow  dent,  or  a  dwarf 
excrescence,  how  wide  soever:  they  are  greater 
deviations  from  the  continued  line  which  they  are 
intended  to  break,  and  their  eiSect  is  to  enlarge  the 
wood   itself. 

"An  inlet  into  a  wood  seems  to  have  heen  cut, 
if  the  opposite  points  of  the  entrance  tally,  and 
that  show  of  art  depreciates  its  merit;  but  differ- 
ence only  in  the  situation  of  those  points,  by  bring- 
ing one  more  forward  than  the  other,  prevents  the 
appearance,    though   their   forms   be    similar. 

"Other  points  which  distinguish  the  great  parts 
should,  in  general,  be  strongly  marked ;  a  short 
turn  has  more  spirit  in  it  than  a  tedious  circuity ; 
and  a  line  broken  by  angles,  has  a  precision  and 
firmness  which,  in  an  undulating  line,  are  wanting. 
The  angles  should  indeed  be  a  little  softened  — 
the  rotundity  of  the  plant  which  forms  them  is 
sometimes  sufficient  for  that  purpose  —  but  if  they 
are  mellowed  down  too  much,  they  will  lose  all 
meaning. 

"Every  variety  of  outline  hitherto  mentioned, 
may  be  traced  by  the  undenvood  alone,  but  fre- 
quently the  same  effect  may  be  produced,  with  more 


56  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

ease,  and  much  more  beauty,  by  a  feiv  trees,  stand- 
ing out  from  the  thicket,  and  belonging,  or  seem- 
ing to  belong  to  the  wood,  so  as  to  make  part 
of  its   figures." 

Particular  attention  must  be  paid  to  Jiight,  in 
finishing  the  margin  of  any  tract  of  plantation. 
The  body  of  the  wood  being  completed,  the  next 
efibrt  of  the  gardener  must  be,  to  complete  the 
efiect  of  the  irregular,  broken  Outlines  (described 
in  a  preceding  section),  by  bringing  into  connec- 
tion with  them  plants  of  smaller  growth.  And 
here  he  must  look  to  Nature  once  more.  With  her 
work  before  him,  and  intent  on  producing  through- 
out his  landscape  a  natural  variety,  he  will  at  once 
see  the  impossibility  of  bringing  his  outlines  regu- 
larly and  gradually  down,  as  the  plant-grower  would 
his  flower-pots  on  the  staging  of  a  greenhouse. 
Lower  growing  trees  and  shrubs,  must  be  grouped 
in  front  of  the  margin,  and  at  such  distances  as 
not  to  destroy,  by  their  proximity,  the  bold  efiect 
of  the  entire  mass.  Arranged  with  a  strict  regard 
to  the  rules  of  shape  and  color,  they  will  fall  natu- 
rally into  groups,  some  higher,  some  lower,  here 
in   broader   and   there   in    narrower    masses.      Here 


OUTLINES.  57 

the  bold  upright  trunk  of  the  Oak,  bearing  aloft 
its  majestic  round  head,  will  be  partly  shown  above 
the  tops  of  the  lower  growth;  there  the  heavy 
limbs  of  the  Elm  droop  down,  until  they  form  a 
solid  mass  of  foliage,  in  connection  with  the  lower 
growing  trees.  Everywhere  this  lower  growth  must 
stand  sufficiently  thick  to  hide  from  view  the  bare 
trunks  of  the  taller  trees,  which  otherwise  will  have 
the  appearance,  in  the  distance,  of  a  plantation  of 
straight  sticks.  Foliage  thus  continued,  and  gradu- 
ally and  variedly  brought  down,  will  be  found  to 
add  a  peculiar  grace  and  charm  to  the  appearance 
of  the  whole,  which  will  be  found  likewise  in  the 
natural  forest.  Masses  which  may  be  viewed  from 
different  points,  should  be  treated  as  above  directed, 
on  all  the  fronts  which  may  be  open  to  view.  In 
plantations  forming  boundaries,  or  skirting  a  road 
or  walk,  of  course  they  need  only  be  thus  treated 
on   the  marffin  of  the   walk   or   drive. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

COMPOSITION. 

The  beauty  of  Garden  scenery  depends  very 
mucli  on  correctness  of  composition,  i.  e.,  joining  of 
parts.  As  the  painter  aims,  by  a  skillful  blend- 
ing of  colors,  to  give  greater  effect  to  bis  work, 
so,  in  like  manner,  must  the  gardener  endeavor 
skillfully  and  tastefully,  and  above  all,  naturally, 
to  join  together  the  various  groups,  and  to  pre- 
serve harmony  by  a  tasteful  arrangement  of  their 
diflFerent  tints,  shades,  sizes,  etc.  In  plantations  on 
a  large  scale,  the  points  of  connection  between  the 
different  groups,  must  be  formed  in  the  manner 
nature  adopts,  namely,  a  gradual  change  from  one 
form  of  vegetation  to  the  other.  In  works  on  a 
smaller  scale,  this  rule,  however,  would  only  lead 
to   confusion,    and    the    plan    generally    adopted    in 

such  cases    is,   to  let  the  different   groups  run  into, 
(58) 


COMPOSITION.  59 

or  dovetail  into  one  another,  which  gives  a  strik- 
ing effect  to  the  hohl,  massive  lines  of  trees,  where 
the   change    occurs. 

Different  species  of  trees,  present  to  the  eye 
very  various  forms,  hoth  of  trunk,  houghs,  and 
leaves.  Thus,  the  most  careless  ohserver  can  read- 
ily distinguish  an  Oak  from  a  Pine,  or  a  Locust 
from  a  Beech.  In  laying  out  plantations,  it  has 
been  found  convenient  to  divide  or  classify  trees 
according  to  their  shapes,  as  being  either  round- 
headed,  or  oblong-headed,  or  spiry-topped.  Among 
these,  again,  we  find  a  great  variety  in  the  forms 
of  the   leaves. 

Thus,  the  Beech  and  Maple  have  roundish  leaves ; 
the  Willow  has  oblong;  the  Catalpa  is  distinguished 
for  its  very  large  leaves,  and  the  Walnut  and 
Locust  for  what  is  styled  the  pinnate  form.  Again, 
the  leaves  differ  in  color,  some  having  a  clear  shade 
of  green,  as  the  Sugar-maple,  the  Catalpa,  the 
Plane-tree,  Locust,  and  Honey -locust,  etc.,  etc.;  others 
having  a  whitish  caste,  as  the  Swamp-maple,  the 
Silver-poplar,  and  Bohemian  Olive ;  and  others,  again, 
covered   with   a   dark-green   foliage. 

Thus,    by   the   aid   of    the   various   shapes    and 


60  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

colors  of  the  plants  at  the  disposal  of  the  gardener, 
he  is  enabled  to  make  his  landscape  either  gravs 
or  gay,  beautiful  or  picturesque,  harmonious  or  con- 
trasted. By  connecting  groups  of  the  round-topped 
trees,  such  as  Oaks,  Beeches,  Elms  and  Maples, 
whose  appearances  naturally  harmonize  together,  we 
create  a  softness  and  fullness  of  form  and  outline, 
which  is  called  beautiful.  The  same  may  be  done 
with  trees  having  oblong,  or  spire-like  tops,  creating 
more  picturesque  effect.  Groups  whose  members 
possess  foliage  of  similar  appearance  only,  may  also 
be  connected  together,  and  create  a  beautiful  sym- 
metry or  harmony.  Of  these  we  may  mention  the 
broad-leaved  kinds :  Plane-trees,  Swamp-maples,  Pop- 
lars, Lyriodendrons.  Of  the  ovate-leaved  kinds,  Elms, 
Beeches,  Cherries,  etc.  Of  the  pinnate  leaved,  Wal- 
nut, Hickory,  Ash,  Locust,  Mountain-ash,  etc.  And 
lastly,  of  the  various  species  of  Pines,  Firs,  Juni- 
pers,  etc. 

A  universal  harmony,  however,  would  soon  prove 
tiresome  and  monotonous,  and  it  is  therefore  neces- 
sary to  enliven  the  scene  by  occasional  abrupt  and 
marked  changes  or  contrasts.  The  preservation  of 
a  proper  proportion  between  harmony  and  contrast, 


COMPOSITION.  61 

is  what  gives  expression  and  life  to  scenery,  pre- 
venting the  beautiful  from  becoming  monotonous, 
and  restraining  the  picturesque  from  wild  confusion. 
And  here  it  is  necessary  to  say,  that  a  truly  pic- 
turesque scene  can  not  be  produced,  as  too  many 
imagine,  by  an  indiscriminate,  hap-hazard  mixture 
of  different  species  of  vegetation ;  this  only  makes 
confusion.  In  a  landscape,  intended  to  be  pictu- 
resque, the  individuality  of  each  species  of  tree 
introduced,  should  be  preserved,  and  its  peculiarities 
of  shape  and  color  brought  into  notice  by  planting 
in  groups  of  single  species,  as  before  mentioned ; 
care  being  taken  at  the  same  time  to  place  the 
various  species  and  groups  in  such  juxta-position, 
as  to  produce,  by  their  dissimilarities,  the  contrasts 
which  make  up  the  picturesque.  It  will  be  appa- 
rent to  any  one,  that  in  this  way,  by  preserving 
the  individual  traits  of  each  plant  or  species,  the 
contrast  will  be  much  stronger  than  by  an  indis- 
criminate  and   tasteless    arrangement. 

It  may  also  be  stated,  as  a  general  rule,  in 
regard  to  the  positions  to  be  assigned  to  the  va- 
rious colors  of  leaves,  in  the  general  arrange- 
ment of   the    Landscape,  or    Wood,  that    the    darker 


62  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

tints  of  green  giving  out  a  heavier  and  more  solid 
appearance,  sliould  be  placed  in  the  background. 
This  will  have  the  effect  of  giving  greater  dis- 
tinctness of  expression  to  tlie  lighter  colors,  which 
are  then  placed  in  front.  Yet  this  rule  is  not 
without  exceptions,  as  light  and  dark  tints  are 
oftentimes  placed  on  the  same  range,  when  the 
nature  of  the  woods,  or  a  desire  to  produce  a  par- 
ticular   effect,  renders    it  desirable. 

We  next  come  to  that  of  the  hight  and  groivtii 
of  trees  used  in  plantation.  This  is  a  very 
important  consideration  with  the  Landscape  Gar- 
dener. On  his  knowledge  of  the  (comparative- 
ly) fast  or  slow  growth  of  trees  and  shrubs, 
and  their  comparative  hight  when  grown,  depends 
very  much  of  the  future  beauty  of  his  plantation. 
The  labors  of  a  Landscape  Gardener  are  not  for 
his  day  only.  They  may  in  fact  never  arrive  at 
the  perfection  designed  for  them,  until  long  after 
his  time.  It  is  of  the  highest  importance  there- 
fore, that  he  should  be  able  not  only  to  see  the 
present  or  immediate  eflPect  of  his  improvements, 
but  also  to  foresee  their  effects  when,  in  the  course 
of  time,    his    plantations    shall    have    attained    their 


COMPOSITION.  63 

full  growth  and  development.  Otherwise,  it  is  evi- 
dent, he  will  not  be  able  to  so  arrange  his  works 
as  to  make  them  present,  constantly,  an  appear- 
ance in  accordance  with  good  taste,  and  correct 
rules.  Should  the  gardener,  in  laying  out  any 
heavy  or  solid  mass  of  timber,  plant  indiscrimi- 
nately together,  fast  and  slow-growing  trees,  he  will 
have  a  broken  picture  for  many  years,  than  which 
nothing  presents  a  poorer  appearance.  The  top 
lines  of  plantations  should  present  a  continual  vari- 
ety of  shape;  round-headed  trees  ranging  along  in 
undulating  lines,  until  relieved  by  the  lofty  heads 
of  a  group  of  oblong-headed  trees,  rearing  their 
tops  above  their  neighbors ;  these  last  being,  in 
turn,  contrasted  with  trees  of  another  shape,  or  per- 
haps of  a  different  color  of  foliage.  It  should  be 
the  aim  of  the  gardener  to  produce  in  the  out- 
lines of  the  tops  as  great  and  effective  a  variety  as 
possible,  and  this,  if  successfully  done,  will  add 
much  to  the  beauty  of  a  grove,  belt,  or  wood  of 
any  description. 


CHAPTER    V. 

GROVES. 

A  BEAUTIFUL  Grove  of  trees  has  many  attrac- 
tions, and  adds  mncli  to  the  appearance  of  a  place. 
As  a  place  of  resort  for  the  family,  where  they 
may  retire  from  the  heat  of  summer,  and  sitting 
beneath  the  canopy  of  leaves  and  boughs,  listen  to 
the  sweet  carol  of  birds,  the  Grove  is  one  of  the 
pleasantest   components    of   a   country  residence. 

A  Grove  shows  to  most  advantage  when  placed 
along  a  gentle  slope  or  hill-side,  where  the  eye 
can  at  once  take  in  its  extent  and  beauties,  and 
where  likewise  the  noble  trees  of  which  it  may 
consist  will  be  brought  prominently  in  view.  Where 
there  already  exists,  on  the  grounds  to  be  improved, 
a  grove,  or  collection  of  trees,  planted  there  by 
Nature,  the  gardener  will  not  fail  to  take  advan- 
tage of  them.  They  should  not  be  disturbed,  unless 
(  64 ) 


GROVES.  65 

very  mucli  interfering  with  the  levels  of  the  ground 
or  the  lines  of  walk.  If  the  outlines  can  he  improved, 
this  may  he  done  hy  a  careful  use  of  the  ax,  hut 
it  is  often  more  advisahle  to  plant  additional  trees 
on  the  margins  or  projections,  to  give  greater  appa- 
rent depth  to  the  wood,  than  to  make  the  inci- 
sion  deeper   hy  cutting   down   trees. 

In  planting  a  Grove,  the  improver  should  he 
careful  to  avoid  any  regular  recurrence  of  partic- 
ular trees,^'''  nor  should  they  he  set  at  regular 
distances  apart,  hut  scattered  irregularly  over  the 
surface — here  wider  apart — there  closer  —  here  two 
or  three  together  —  yonder  an  open  space,  admit- 
ting the  sun  to  the  grass,  and  making  a  hright 
spot  to   contrast  the  surrounding  shade.      None  hut 


*'As  an  illustration  of  the  difference  between  that  irregu- 
larity which  is  monotonous,  and  that  which  makes  true  and 
tasteful  variety,  Repton  gives  the  following :  "If  ten  clumps  be 
composed  of  ten  different  kinds  of  trees  each,  they  become  so 
many  things  exactly  similar ;  but  if  each  clump  consists  of  the 
same  sort  of  trees,  they  become  ten  different  things,  of  which 
one  may  be  a  group  of  Oaks,  another  of  Elms,  another  of 
Chestnuts,  or  of  Thorns,  etc." — Reptm  on  Landscape  Gardening, 
p.  334.  g 


66  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

straight-growing,  wide-spreading  trees  should  be  used 
in  planting  a  Grove,  that  we  may  have  an  arch 
of  foliage  formed  overhead  which  will  effectually 
protect   from   the   rays   of  the   sun. 

It  is  worth  while  to  observe  here,  that  when 
it  is  desired  to  make  a  Grove  of  a  dense  forest 
or  thicket,  care  should  he  taken,  in  opening  out, 
not  to  cut  away  too  much  at  once,  as  trees  which 
have  been  used  to  grow  up  closely  surrounded  by 
others,  will  not  bear  the  exposure  to  light  and  air, 
except  they  are  gradually  accustomed  to  it.  Care- 
lessness in  the  observance  of  this  will  not  fail  to 
destroy  the   trees    intended   to   be   preserved. 

Single  trees,  or  detached  groups  of  two  or  more 
trees,  are  often  placed  to  much  advantage  along 
the  line  of  approaches  to  the  house,  and  if  beau- 
tiful in  themselves  and  appropriately  situated,  add 
much  to  the  effect  of  the  Landscape.  Single  trees, 
or  open  groups,  also  have  a  fine  effect  when  scat>- 
tered  on  the  side  of  a  steep  hill,  because  they  may 
be  made  to  mark  the  degree  of  its  declivity,  and 
the   shadows   of  the   trees   are   very  conspicuous. 

A  few  Maples  or  other  fine  foliaged  trees, 
planted    behind    the    dwelling,    and    showing    their 


GROVES.  67 

tops  above  the  roof,  when  approached  from  the 
front,  also  have  a  beautiful  eftect,  beside  offering 
a  pleasant  shade  to  that  part  of  the  house  con- 
tiguous to  them.  Evergreens  are  found  very  appro- 
priate as  detached  trees,  or  in  small  groups,  set  at 
a  distance  of  twenty  or  twenty-five  yards  in  front 
of  a  mass  of  deciduous  trees.  Their  form  and 
color   contrast   admirably  here. 

Flowering  Shruhhery  and  Floivers,  are  choice  gifts 
of  Nature  to  the  Landscape  Gardener.  With  them 
he  diversifies  the  milder  parts  of  his  landscape, 
and  beautifies  the  grounds  more  immediately  con- 
nected with  the  dwellings  of  man.  Like  trees, 
flowers  should  be  planted  in  masses  of  similar  spe- 
cies and  colors.  This  will  give  much  more  variety, 
as  well  as  greater  strength  and  expression  to  their 
beauty,  than  if  planted  in  wild  confusion.  These 
groups  and  masses,  while  distinctly  separated  on  the 
lawn,  should  by  no  means  preserve  any  regularity 
in  shape  or  in  distance  apart,  which  would  impart 
a  stiSness  to  the  whole.  Let  them  be  of  flowing 
forms,  and  thrown  at  irregular  distances  on  the 
surface,  regard  being  had  to  the  various  points 
from  which  they  may  be  viewed.      Along  the  banks 


68  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

of  a  little  murmuring  brook,  flowers  are  peculiarly 
appropriate,  adding  beauty  and  grace  to  the  land- 
scape, as  well  as  enlivening  it.  Planted  in  front 
of  masses  of  shrubbery  and  trees,  to  continue  the 
descending  line  to  the  ground.  Flowers,  and  Flowering 
Shrubs  will  give  a  finished  appearance  to  the  scene. 
Here  they  may  even  be  allowed  to  extend  them- 
selves along  the  ground  in  large  masses,  and  their 
bright  colors  will  be  found  to  produce  a  striking 
effect.  In  Flower  Gardens,  too,  the  flowers  will  be 
found  to  show  to  greatest  advantage  by  being- 
planted  in  masses,  consisting  each  of  a  separate 
species.  Thus,  a  group  of  Salvias  (red);  one  of 
White  Petunias;  another  of  Verbenas — the  whole 
backed  by  the  green  foliage  of  a  belt  of  Shrub- 
bery—  can  not  fail  to  awaken  the  admiration  of 
even   the   most   tasteless. 


CHAPTEE    VI. 

WATER. 

Of  Plantation  by  the  Water-side.  —  Proper 
plantation  along  the  shores  of  Lakes,  Ponds,  Streams 
or  Brooks,  adds  very  much  to  the  heauty  of  scenery. 
Plantation  must,  however,  here  vary  much  according 
to  the  character  given  naturally  to  the  Landscape, 
by  the  shape  or  conformation  of  the  ground,  either 
natural  or  artificial.  Thus,  the  shores  of  a  lake 
may  rise  abruptly  from  the  water's  edge,  in  tall 
cliffs,  or  crags.  In  such  a  situation,  which  is 
romantic  or  picturesque  in  a  high  degree,  the  rocks 
should  he  covered  with  moss  and  ferns,  interspersed 
with  such  plants  as  are  usually  found  in  scenes 
of  that  description,  as  Ehododendrons,  Savinas,  etc. 
Of  trees,  Evergreens  are  the  most  suitable  to  such 
scenes.       Where    the    shore    overhangs    the   water   a 

single   Weeping    Willow,  its   long   drooping    boughs 

(69) 


70  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

trailing  near  the  water,  often  lias  a  liiglily  pictur- 
esque and  pleasing  effect.  Lombardy  Poplars  are 
also  suitable  to  be  placed  at  the  water,  to  form  a 
connection  'W'ith  the  body  of  the  surrounding  woods. 
In  spots  where  the  shores  of  the  lake  are  less 
abrupt  and  decline  gradually  toward  the  water's 
edge,  tall,  heavy  trees,  as  the  Ash,  and  the  larger 
species  of  Evergreens,  whose  images  will  be  reflected 
by  the  water,  will  be  most  suitable.  A  view  from 
the  opposite  side,  of  a  large  group  of  such  trees,  with 
an  occasional  opening  forming  a  vista  at  the  end 
of  which  may  be  seen  other  woods,  such  a  view  will 
awaken  the  most  pleasing  feelings  in  the  breast 
of  the   beholder. 

For  spots  where  the  shore  is  flat  or  nearly  on 
a  level  with  the  water.  Willows,  Alders  and  Plane- 
trees  are  suitable,  when  interspersed  with  smaller 
plants.  These  last  mentioned  trees  are  peculiarly 
fitted  to  grow  near  water,  flourishing  there  natu- 
rally,   and   to   great   advantage. 

In  flowing  water,  as  streams  and  brooks,  we  do 
not  so  often  find  occasion  for  the  picturesque.  When 
it  is  needed,  however,  as  in  the  neighborhood  of 
waterfalls,  the  suggestions  made  in  relation  to  lakes 


WATEK.  71 

will  answer.  The  general  efiect  of  a  small  stream 
or  brook,  iu  a  landscape,  is  to  give  it  softness 
and  quietness.  This  we  help  most  eflPectually,  by 
planting  along  the  borders  of  the  stream,  low-grow- 
ing bushes,  as  Willows,  Viburnums,  Hazels,  etc., 
and  interspersing  these  with  occasional  groups  of 
higher  forest  trees,  to  give  more  effect  or  expres- 
sion to  the  scene.  The  little  promontories  formed 
by  the  curves  in  the  stream,  should  be  planted 
thickly  with  heavy-looking  trees,  to  give  an  idea 
of  strength  or  ability  to  resist  the  flow  of  water, 
and  of  force  to  make  the  stream  change  from  its 
direct  course.  These  clumps,  seen  at  some  dis- 
tance, make  a  beautiful  appearance.  Care  should 
be  taken  to  give  a  natural  appearance  to  the  plan- 
tation along  the  bank  of  a  Eiver.  To  this  effect, 
it  is  well  not  to  confine  the  plantation  too  strictly 
to  the  bank  of  the  stream,  but  to  let  it  occa- 
sionally extend  back  on  the  meadow  or  lawn.  Such 
an  arrangement  will  prevent  the  scene  from  becom- 
ing monotonous  and  tiresome  to  the  eye.  When 
a  stream  takes  its  course  through  a  dense  forest, 
or  wood,  it  exchanges  its  lively,  or  quiet  and 
peaceful  character,  for  the  solemn  grandeur  imparted 


72  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

to  it  by  the  dark,  overlianging  foliage  of  the  for- 
est. To  prevent  this  characteristic  from  going  to 
extremes,  it  is  well  to  open  up  the  wood  in  spots, 
having  in  its  place,  pleasant  grass-spots,  spaces  on 
which  the  sun  may  cast  his  cheerful  rays.  Should 
the  character  aud  conformation  of  the  surrounding 
country  he  such  that  a  highly  picturesque  scene 
would  not  he  out  of  keeping,  it  is  often  found 
advantageous  to  lead  the  stream  over  an  artificial 
bed  of  Rockwork,  or  down  a  Precipice,  when  the 
noise  and  turmoil  of  the  foaming  waters  will  help 
to  create  an  efiect  picturesque  in  a  very  high 
degree. 

Water  is  the  life  of  scenery  in  all  landscapes, 
and  should  be  introduced  in  garden  scenery  where- 
ever  possible.  The  Lake,  by  its  broad  expanse  of 
water,  gives  a  peculiar  appearance  of  grandeur  and 
importance  to  the  scenery.  One  side  of  its  shores 
should  always  be  open,  only  bounded  by  the  ver- 
dant meadow.  The  scenery  surrounding  the  Pond 
is  generally  impressed  with  an  idea  of  solitude  — 
its  shores  may  be  surrounded  by  shrubbery,  droop- 
ing  down   in   the   water. 

The   lake   may,  by    a   proper   arrangement   of  its 


WATER.  73 

bounds,  be  made  to  appear  much  larger  than  it  is 
in  reality.  This  deception  is  often  necessary  in 
artificial  waters,  where  these  are  of  but  limited 
extent.  To  this  end,  those  parts  of  the  banks  or 
shore,  over  which  the  eye  glances  to  distant  parts 
of  the  scenery,  should  be  kept  low,  nearly  at  the 
level  of  the  water.  On  such  places,  no  trees  or 
buildings  should  be  visible,  to  make  all  comparison 
of  size  and  distance  entirely  impossible.  A  single 
lofty  tree,  if  seen  in  its  full  grandeur,  in  such 
a  spot,  would  at  once  detect  the  small  extent  of  the 
water.  In  some  places,  the  end  of  the  deeper 
recess  may  be  hidden  by  trees,  and  drooping  shrub- 
bery, planted  on  the  foremost  prominences.  Thus 
the  water  is  lost  sight  of,  under  the  masses  of 
foliage,  and  may  be  supposed  to  extend  farther 
back  than  it  really  does.  No  walk  should  approach 
too  near  to  such  spots,  else  the  deception  is  easily 
detected.  The  bounds  or  margin  of  a  piece  of 
water,  in  natural  scenery,  should  appear  as  the 
genuine  production  of  Nature;  no  artificial  form, 
especially  no  straight  line  should  be  visible.  It 
must  be  a  line  of  irregular  recesses  and  promi- 
nences,   which    the    taste    and  understandino-    of    the 


74  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

gardener  lias  to  accommodate  to  tlie  shape  of  ground, 
extent  of  water,  and  all  other  prevailing  circum- 
stances. 

The  hounds  of  a  Stream,  in  like  manner,  should 
appear  natural,  widely  differing  from  those  of  a 
canal ;  the  opposite  shores  should  never  be  strictly 
parallel.  Its  course,  commanding  the  impression  of 
power,  should  not  so  frequently  change  its  direc- 
tion, as  the  meandering  Brook,  which  passes  under 
various  curves,  through  the  meadow.  The  curves 
of  the  stream  should  he  in  strict  proportion  with 
its   breadth   and   course. 

A  brook  having  a  fair  supply  of  water,  may 
be  led  on  a  bed  of  wider  extent,  thus  forming  a 
stream ;  yet  great  precaution  is  necessary  to  make 
a  deception  of  this  sort  successful.  Deception,  if 
discovered,  loses  all  its  value,  and  should  but  spar- 
ingly be  made   use  of 


Fountains  have  their  most  appropriate  place 
among  the  more  artificial  portion  of  the  Garden 
scenery,  as  in  the  Flower  Garden,  or  on  terraces 
near  the  house.  They  may  also  be  introduced  in 
picturesque    scenery,  but  must  appear  there  more  as 


WATER.  75 

the  works  of  Nature  than  of  Art,   being  left  with- 
out   their    usual    artistic  embellishments. 


The  Lawn.  —  The  Lawn  is  that  part  of  Gar- 
den scenery  planted  in  grass.  Lawn  and  water 
form  the  light  parts  of  the  landscape,  while  trees 
and  shrubs  make  up  the  shade.  A  smooth,  clean, 
closely-cropped  Lawn,  adds  very  greatly  to  the  beauty 
and  variety  of  the  landscape,  and  consequently,  in 
natural,  or  Landscape  Gardening,  the  Lawn  is  a 
very  important  component,  forming,  as  it  were,  the 
groundwork   of  the   scene. 

On  places  or  grounds  of  limited  extent,  where 
cattle  can  not  be  admitted,  the  Lawn  must  be  kept 
trimmed  by  the  scythe  and  roller.  With  due  atten- 
tion, it  will  make  a  beautiful  appearance.  In  large 
Parks,  the  lawn  or  meadow  is  used  for  pasture,  or 
hay  is  cut  from  it.  Cattle,  feeding  upon  an  ex- 
tensive forest-skirted  lawn,  give  life  and  animation 
to  a  scene  which,  otherwise,  would  often  become^ 
monotonous   or   insipid. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ON    THE    CHOICE    OF    A    SITUATION    FOR    A    HOUSE. 

No  department  of  the  Landscape  Gardener's  art, 
seems  so  easil}'  settled,  yet  in  no  other  are  so  many 
errors  committed  as  in  this ;  and  this  for  the  very 
reason  that  every  one  fancies  himself  competent  to 
determine  so  simple  a  matter.  Repton  remarks  very 
truly:  "Not  only  men  of  taste  fall  into  this  error, 
but  the  carpenter,  the  land-steward,  or  the  nursery- 
man feels  himself  equally  competent  to  pronounce 
on  this  subject.  No  sooner  has  he  discovered  a 
spot  commanding  an  extensive  prospect,  than  he 
immediately  pronounces  that  spot  the  true  situation 
for  a  House;  as  if  the  only  use  of  a  mansion, 
like  that  of  a  prospect-tower,  was  to  look  out  of 
the    windows." 

The   same   author   remarks   further :  *•  "  However 

"Il«pton's  "Landscape  Gardening,"  p.  61. 
(76) 


CHOICE    OF   A    SITUATION    FOR   A    HOUSE.  77 

various  opinions  may  be  on  the  choice  of  a  situ- 
ation for  a  House,  yet  there  appear  to  be  certain 
principles,  on  which  such  choice  ought  to  be  founded  ; 
and  these  may  be  deduced  from  the  following  con- 
siderations : 

"  First.  The  natural  character  of  the  surrounding 
country. 

"  Second.  The  style,  size  and  character  of  the 
house. 

"  Third.  The  aspects  of  exposure,  both  with  re- 
gard to  the  sun,  and  the  prevalent  winds  of  the 
country. 

"  Fourth.  The  shape  of  the  ground  near  the  House. 

"  Fifth.  The  views  from  the  several  apartments ;  and 

"Sixth.  The  numerous  objects  of  comfort — such 
as  a  dry  soil;  a  supply  of  good  water;  proper  space 
for  offices,  with  various  other  conveniences  essential 
to   a   mansion. 

"It  is  hardly  possible  to  arrange  these  six  con- 
siderations according  to  their  respective  weight  or 
influence,  which  must  depend  on  a  comparison  of 
one  with  the  other,  under  a  variety  of  circumstances ; 
and  even  on  the  partiality  of  individuals  in  affix- 
ing different   degrees    of    importance    to    each   con- 


78  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

sideration.  Hence  it  is  otvious  that  there  can  he 
no  degree  of  sameness  in  any  two  designs  con- 
ducted on  principles  thus  estahlished ;  since  in  every 
different  situation  some  one  or  more  of  these  con- 
siderations must  preponderate ;  and  the  most  rational 
decision  will  result  from  a  comhined  view  of  all  the 
separate  advantages  or  disadvantages  to  he  fore- 
seen  from  each." 

Other  conveniences  heing  alike,  shade  and  shel- 
ter should  never  he  sacrificed  to  freedom  of  view, 
in  the  selection  of  a  situation  for  a  House.  Mr. 
Mepton  says  of  this :  "  After  long  experiencing  the 
many  inconveniences  to  which  lofty  situations  are 
exposed;  after  frequently  witnessing  the  repentance 
and  vexation  of  those  who  have  hastily  made  choice 
of  such  situations,  under  the  flattering  circumstances 
of  a  clear  atmosphere  and  hrilliant  sky ;  after 
ohserving  how  willingly  they  would  exchange  pros- 
pect for  shade  and  shelter,  and  after  vainly  look- 
ing forward  to  the  effect  of  future  groves,  I  am 
convinced  that  it  is  hetter  to  decide  upon  the  situa- 
tion of  a  House,  when  the  weather  is  unfavorahle  to 
distant  prospects,  and  when  the  judgment  may  he 
ahle   to   give   its   due   weight  to  every  circumstance 


CHOICE   OF  A   SITUATION   FOB   A   HOUSE.  79 

whicli  ought  to  be  considered  in  so  material  an 
object  —  that  the  comforts  of  habitation  may  not  be 
sacrificed  to  the  fascinating  glare  of  a  summer's 
day." 

The  suggestion  most  difficult  of  apprehension,  in 
the  selection  or  adaptation  of  a  building  site,  is 
that   pertaining   to  the 

Shape  of  the  Ground.  —  Upon  this,  therefore, 
we  shall  offer  a  few  observations  to  guide  the  inex- 
perienced improver.  "  All  natural  shapes  of  ground 
must  necessarily  fall  under  one  of  these  descrip- 
tions, viz  :  Convex,  Concave,  Plane,  or  Inclined  Plane. 
Except  in  very  romantic  or  picturesque  situations, 
all  the  rooms  on  the  principal  floor  ought  to  range 
on  the  same  level.  There  must  also  be  a  plat- 
form, or  certain  space  of  ground,  with  a  gentle 
descent  from  the  House,  every  way.  If  the  ground 
be  naturally  convex,  or  what  is  generally  called  a 
knoll,  the  size  of  the  House  must  be  adapted  to 
the  size  of  the  knoll."  For  were  the  House  too 
large  for  the  knoll,  it  is  evident  that,  while  a 
smaller  one  would  have  a  sufficiency  of  platform, 
the  large  one  would  stand  on  the  brink  of  a  steep 
bank,  or  fall    of  ground,  rendering   the   approaches 


80  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

unpleasant.  Strict  regard  must  therefore  be  paid, 
in  this  instance,  to  the  preservation  of  a  proper 
proportion.  Hillocks  or  knolls  may  sometimes  he 
formed  hy  Art,  hut  this  is  hut  little  done  in  this 
country.  This  will  show  the  impossibility  of  mak- 
ing up  a  plan  or  design  for  a  House,  without  a 
previous  acquaintance  with  the  situation  or  shape 
of  the   ground   on   which   it   is   to   be   built. 

"  Where  the  shape  is  naturally  either  concave, 
or  perfectly  flat,  the  House  would  not  be  habitable 
unless  the  ground  sloped  sufficiently  to  throw  the 
water  from  it.  This  is  often  ejBected,  in  a  slight 
degree,  merely  by  the  earth  that  is  dug  from  the  cel- 
lars and  foundations.  But  if,  instead  of  sinking  the 
cellars,  they  were  to  be  built  upon  the  level  of  the 
ground,  they  may  afterward  be  so  covered  with  earth, 
as  to  give  all  the  appearance  of  a  natural  knoll,  the 
ground  falling  from  the  House  to  any  distance  where 
it  may  best  unite  with  the  natural  shape."  Should 
there  be  any  small  hillocks  near  the  proposed  site, 
they  may  be  used  to  effect  this  purpose.  This 
expedient  can  also  be  used  in  an  inclined  plane, 
falling  toward  the  House,  where  the  inclination  is 
not   very   great;    but   it   must   be   observed    of  the 


CHOICE   OF   A   SITUATION   FOR   A   HOUSE.  81 

inclined  plane,  that  the  size  of  the  House  must 
be  governed  in  some  measure  hy  the  fall  of  the 
ground. 

"  But  another  shape  of  ground  is  also  to  be 
considered  —  thus  it  generally  happens  that  a  knoll 
ij^^onger  one  way  than  another,  or  it  may  even 
extend  to  a  natural  ridge,  of  sufficient  length  for 
a  long  and  narrow  house.  But  such  a  house 
must  be  fitted  to  the  ground,  for  it  would  be 
absurd  in  the  architect  to  place  it  either  diago- 
nally or  directly  across  such  a  ridge.  The  same 
holds  good  of  the  inclined  plane,  which  is,  in  fact, 
the  side  of  a  valley,  whose  general  inclination  must 
be  consulted  in  the  position  of  the  building;  thus 
a  square  house  would  appear  awry,  unless  its  fronts 
were  made  to  correspond  with  the  shape  of  the 
adjacent   ground. 

"  It  may  be  observed,  in  conclusion,  that  on  a 
dead  flat  or  plain,  the  principal  apartments  ought 
to  be  elevated,  as  the  only  means  of  showing  the 
landscape  to  advantage.  Where  there  is  no  ine- 
quality, it  will  be  very  difficult  to  unite  any  arti- 
ficial ground  with  the  natural  shape;  it  will  in 
this   case   be    advisable    either    to    raise    it   only  a 


82  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

very  few  feet  from  the  ground,  or  to  set  the  house 
on  a  basement  story.  But  whenever  a  place  abounds 
in  natural  inequalities,  even  though  the  ground 
near  the  House  should  be  flat,  we  may,  without 
impropriety,  venture  to  create  an    artificial    knoll."-'' 

The  shape  of  the  ground  must  be  carefully 
examined,  before  plans  for  improvement  are  sug- 
gested. In  many  cases,  the  ground  will  allow  to 
be  altered,  at  comparatively  small  expense,  to  suit 
the  wishes  of  the  gardener.  We  will  mention,  here, 
only  a  few  instances,  where  an  alteration  of  the 
natural  shape  of  the  ground  may  be  advisable.  All 
small  eminences  and  hollows,  often  caused  by  the  for- 
mer use  of  the  ground,  are  to  be  brought  down  and 
filled   up,  to  restore  the  ground  to  its  natural  form. 

The  surface  of  a  flat,  or  nearly  level  ground, 
may  be  greatly  improved,  by  raising  eminences 
and  forming  easy  valleys;  thus  creating  an  undu- 
lating  surface,    far   superior   to   a   dead   flat   one. 

An  abruptly  broken  ravine  may  be  changed  to 
a  beautiful  valley,  by  filling  up  its  bottom  with 
the   ground   taken   oS"  the   highest   banks. 

*■*  Repton — Skeiches  and  Hints  on  Landscape  Gardening,  p.  67. 


CHOICE   OF   A   SITUATION   FOR   A   HOUSE.  83 

K  a  natural  valley  is  cut  in  two  parts  by  a 
knoll  or  a  ridge,  it  is  often  advisable  to  remove 
sucb   an   eminence   entirely. 

The  introduction  of  roads  and  walks  in  tlie 
scenery,  often  requires  considerable  alteration  of  the 
surface  of  the  ground.  Every  location  having  its 
peculiar  shape  of  ground,  it  is  impossible  to  lay 
down  any  certain  rule,  how  far  the  alteration  of 
the  natural  surface  may  be  carried ;  it  is  only  to 
be  remarked,  that  wherever  material  improvement 
can  be  made  with  little  expense,  it  is  well  to 
undertake  it.  Alteration  of  the  shape  of  ground, 
on  a  large  scale,  is,  in  most  cases,  of  more  ex- 
pense than  of  actual  effect,  and  not  advisable. 
The  undulating,  rolling  ground,  covered  with  ver- 
dant turf,  is  undoubtedly  of  most  advantage  to 
erect  garden  and  park  scenery.  On  an  abruptly 
broken  terrace,  the  picturesque  style  will  find  its 
most  suitable  adaptation. 

Whatever  alteration  the  ground  may  undergo  — 
however  costly  the  operations  of  moving  ground 
may  be  —  all  interference  of  art  must  be  strictly 
concealed ;  when  completed,  the  whole  must  appear 
the   production   of  nature  —  only. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

ROADS     AND     WALKS. 

A  EoAD  or  Walk,  being  as  much  an  artificial 
work  of  convenience  as  a  house  or  bridge,  it  should 
plainly  appear  as  such,  and  not  be  hid  away  in 
a  ditch,  or  concealed  by  other  means,  which  will 
not,  after  all,  succeed  in  removing  it  entirely  from 
view,  or  if  they  do,  will,  at  the  same  time,  de- 
stroy its  utility.  A  Eoad  or  Walk  should  be  firm, 
of  a  breadth  adequate  to  the  use  to  which  it  is 
to  be  put ;  and  the  degree  of  curve  regulated  by 
the  breadth.  It  is  to  be  borne  in  mind,  that 
Walks  are  objects  of  convenience  —  that  therefore 
they  must  have  an  object — and  this  object  must 
not  be  lost  sight  of;  nor  is  it  allowable  to  lay 
out  Walks  out  of  a  mere  fanciful  desire,  or  with- 
out  an   object.      Neither   its   course,   nor   any   bend 

or   inequality   in    it   must    be   objectless,   but    must 
(84) 


ROADS   AND   WALKS.  85 

be  justified  by  the  8lmpe  of  the  ground,  by  its  final 
destination,  or  by  objects  along  its  line.  In  a  Eoad 
01'  Walk,  especially  if  it  passes  tbrougb  a  wood  or 
plantation,  a  second  bend  should  never  be  visible. 
The  degree  of  curve,  in  a  Walk,  therefore,  depends, 
in  some  degree,  on  its  width.  For  instance,  look- 
ing along  a  narrow  Walk,  a  curve  may  be  hidden 
from  our  view,  which  would  be  plainly  seen,  were 
the   Walk   broader. 

A  Eoad  or  a  Walk  should  recommend  itself 
by  a  graceful,  sweeping  line.  A  line  partially 
straight,  sweeping,  or  a  segment  of  the  circle,  is 
contrary  to  good  taste,  yet,  nevertheless,  often  found 
in  Gardens.  In  highly  picturesque,  or  wild  scenes, 
the  Walks  should  partake  of  the  leading  features. 
They  may  be  rougher,  narrower  and  more  abruptly 
bend  in  such  situations.  Where  a  Walk  separates 
'  into  two,  the  two  new  lines  should  diverge  in  dif- 
ferent directions,  rather  than,  by  their  new  course, 
give  rise  to  an  impression  that  they  are  to  re-unite. 
Where  a  Walk  joins  another,  it  should  be.  at  acute 
angles,  rather  than  forming  a  right  angle.  The 
angle  formed  by  the  divergence  of  two  Walks  or 
Roads,    should    be    planted    thickly,    to    conceal    the 


86  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

j)oiiits  or  direction  of  tlic  divergence.  Eoads  cal- 
culated to  be  accessible  to  carriages,  should  have 
no  sharp  or  abrupt  bends,  as  such  are  very  apt 
to   be    driven    over   by    the   coachman. 

The  approach  from  the  public  Koad  to  the  house, 
either  carriage  Eoad  or  simple  Walk,  is  the  most 
important  on  the  premises.  Of  the  rules  and  prin- 
ciples -which  should  guide  the  gardener  in  the  con- 
struction of  approaches,  Mepton  has  spoken  so  much 
to  the  point,  that  we  have  seen  fit  to  subjoin  his 
directions.  He  says :  "  Many  improvers  seem  to 
have  mistaken  the  most  obvious  meaning  of  an 
approach,  which  is  simply  this  —  A  Eoad  to  the 
House.  If  that  Eoad  be  greatly  circuitous,  no 
one  will  use  it  when  a  much  nearer  is  discovered ; 
but  if  there  be  two  Eoads  of  nearly  equal  length, 
and  one  be  more  beautiful  than  the  other,  the  man 
of  taste  will  certainly  prefer  it.  The  requisites  to 
a   good   approach   may    be    thus    enumerated: 

"  First.  An  approach  is  a  Road  to  the  House, 
and   to    that   principally. 

"  Second.  If  it  is  not,  naturally,  the  nearest  Eoad 
possible,  it  ought,  artificially,  to  be  made  impos- 
sible   to    so    nearer. 


KOADS   AND   WALKS.  87 

"  Third.  The  artificial  obstacles  which  make  this 
Eoad   the   nearest,  ought   to  appear  natural. 

"  Fourth.  When  an  approach  quits  the  high-road, 
it  ought  not  to  break  from  it  at  right  angles,  or  in 
such  a  manner  as  robs  the  entrance  of  importance ; 
but  rather  at  some  bend  of  the  public  Eoad,  from 
whence  a  lodge  or  gate  may  be  more  conspicuous, 
and  where  the  high-road  may  appear  to  branch 
from  the  approach,  rather  than  the  approach  from 
the   high-road. 

"Fifth.  After  the  approach  enters  the  Park,  it 
should  avoid  skirting  along  its  boundary,  which 
betrays    the    want    of  extent,    or    unity  of   property. 

"  Sixth.  The  House,  unless  very  large,  and  mag- 
nificent, should  not  be  seen  at  so  great  distance 
as    to   make    it    appear  much  less  than    it  really  is. 

"  Seventh.  The  House  should  be,  at  first,  pre- 
sented  in    a   pleasing   point    of  view. 

"Eighth.  As  soon  as  the  House  is  visible  from 
the  approach,  there  should  be  no  temptation  to  quit 
it  —  which  will  ever  be  the  case,  if  iha  Eoad  be 
at  all  circuitous  —  unless  sufl&cient  obstacles,  as  water, 
or  inaccessible  ground,  appear  to  justify  ils  course." 

To    these    directions    we  will    only  add,   that  the 


88  PKACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENmG. 

approach  to  a  House,  should  be  made,  by  proper 
plantation,  to  partake  of  the  character  of  the  House 
itself,  and  of  the  adjoining  grounds.  Thus  an 
appearance  of  grandeur  may  be  given  it,  by  the 
presence  of  lofty  forest  trees,  under  whose  umbra- 
geous foliage  the  visitor  may  stop  to  view  the 
scene.  Groups  of  flowers,  appearing  at  intervals, 
on  the  Eoad-side,  will  also  give  life  and  animation 
to   the   scene. 


EocKWORK,  when  in  its  proper  place,  on  the 
romantic  shores  of  a  Lake  or  Brook,  or  among  other 
broken  and  highly  picturesque  scenery,  is  highly 
appropriate  and  effective.  Wherever  introduced,  how- 
ever, the  hand  of  art  should  be  carefully  concealed, 
and  the  work  rendered  natural  in  itself,  as  well 
as   in   its   harmony   with   surrounding   objects. 


Architectural  Ornaments,  such  as  Summer- 
houses,  Temples,  etc.,  as  well  as  Statues,  are  ad- 
missible, more  especially  in  grounds  which  are 
themselves  laid  out  in  an  ornamental  manner.  It 
requires  a"  correct  and  practiced  taste  to  superintend 
the    distribution    of    such    objects    in    a   Garden,    as 


AECHITECTURAL  ORNAMENTS.  89 

however  beautiful  the  objects  may  be  in  themselves, 
if  placed  in  ungraceful  positions,  they  will  destroy 
the  appearance  of  the  whole  scene.  More  discrim- 
ination is  required  in  the  adaptation  of  ornaments 
of  this  kind  to  a  place,  than  in  any  other  part 
of  the  gardener's  duty.  Too  richly  or  highly  orna- 
mented, it  will  appear  gaudy  —  too  plain  will  argue 
poverty  —  and  to  be  out  of  place  will  betray  igno- 
rance. In  matters  of  this  kind,  nothing  should 
be  attempted,  without  being  carried  out  in  the  most 
perfect  manner  possible. 
8 


CHAPTER  IX. 

FREEDOM     OF     VIEWS. 

Exterior  Views  or  Prospects,  are  liigbly  desi- 
rable, when  tlie  scene  is  enlivened  by  the  mani- 
fold works  of  Nature,  awing  by  their  grandeur,  or 
softening  and  delighting  by  their  calm  beauty. 
Although  the  gardener  can  not  expect  to  rival 
Nature,  in  the  grandeur  or  extent  of  the  prospects 
he  introduces,  yet  he  has  it  in  his  power  to  aid 
her,  by  various  devices.  Thus,  while  spreading  out 
before  the  eyes,  at  one  place,  a  View  or  Prospect 
abounding  in  grandeur  and  majesty,  we  so  arrange 
plantation,  that  it  may  be  divided,  and  parts  of 
it  shown  from  other  points,  awakening  curiosity, 
and   keeping   alive  the  attention. 

As   an  extensive  prospect  is  much  to  be  prized, 

care   must   be   taken   by   the   gardener,    to   arrange 

his   plantation   in   accordance  with  this  feature.     In 
(90  4 


FREEDOM  OF  VIEWS  91 

mauy  places,  a  tree,  by  its  prominent  situation, 
Avill  hide  a  beautiful  scene.  Again,  a  clump  or 
group,  shuts  out  from  the  eye  the  most  exten- 
sive prospect.  The  gardener  must,  therefore,  ex- 
amine where  will  be  the  most  striking  Views,  both 
to  the  outside  and  the  inside  of  the  boundaries, 
and  open  his  plantation  in  accordance.  Views  from 
Gardens  differ  in  this,  from  those  from  a  prospect- 
tower,  that  while  in  the  latter  the  view  is  of 
unbounded  extent,  and  the  eye  roams  uncontrolled 
over  the  country,  as  far  as  vision  extends,  neces- 
sarily taking  in  deformities  with  beauties,  in  Gar- 
den Views,  we  are  able  to  direct  and  control  the 
eye  in  a  great  measure,  and  therefore  create  beau- 
ties on  a  minor  scale,  which,  by  being  more 
forcibly  brought  to  the  attention  by  the  greater 
confinement  of  view,  will  impress  often  more  favor- 
ably than  the  view  of  an  entire  country  from  the 
prospect-tower.  Points  for  Views  should  be  selected 
with  great  care,  and  only  a  matured  judgment 
direct  where  openings  should  be  made.  In  Plan- 
tation, the  growth  and  hight  of  trees  must  be 
taken  into  consideration,  in  regard  to  their  future 
effect  upon   desirable  Prospects.      Thus,  trees  which, 


92  PKACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

when  planted,  were  perfectly  unobjectionable,  might 
in  a  few  years,  when  full-grown,  materially  inter- 
fere with  the  finest  Views.  The  openings  left 
or  made  for  distant  Views,  should  never  have  the 
appearance  of  a  straight  line  or  channel.  In 
placing  masses,  or  cutting  openings,  while  attention 
is  given  to  the  view  to  be  produced,  we  are  not 
to  lose  sight  of  the  relative  appearance  and  con- 
nection  of  the   different   masses   of  plantation. 

In  creating  Views  or  Prospects,  therefore,  the 
gardener  has  the  opportunity  to  deceive  by  creat- 
ing a  false  impression  as  to  the  extent  of  his 
grounds;  and  this  it  is  necessary  to  take  advantage 
of  when  looking  to  freedom  of  view  within  the  boun- 
daries. While  arranging  for  freedom  of  view  with- 
out the  boundaries,  we  have  the  choice,  in  many 
cases,  of  most  extensive  and  majestic  prospects,  which 
we  can  present  to  the  eye  in  the  most  pleasing  man- 
ner. Within,  on  the  contrary,  we  have  generally 
but  few  scenes  upon  which  to  work,  and  of  these 
the  gardener  makes  the  most,  by  presenting  them 
from  different  points  of  view,  and  creating  a  variety 
of  forms  and  views,  which  will  interest  and  charm  as 
well  as  give  the  requisite  impression  of  extent.      To 


FREEDOM    OF   VIEWS.  93 

arrange,  thei-efore,  the  various  points  of  View  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  present  an  ever-clianging 
combination  of  scenery ;  to  keep  up  the  interest  by 
a  constant  revelation  of  new  beauties ;  to  raise  the 
curiosity  and  give  play  to  the  imagination  by  an  adroit 
management  of  the  termination  of  walls,  or  leading 
the  mind  to  suspect  the  existence  of  more  beyond — 
and  by  means  of  all  this,  to  give  to  the  arrangement 
of  the  grounds  the  charm  of  novelty,  must  be  the 
study  of  the   improver. 


CHAPTER    X. 

GENERAL     REMARKS. 

Mr.  Eepton,  who  has  very  closely  and  ably  inves- 
tigated the  causes  which  operate  to  produce  vari- 
ous effects,  in  th^  Landscape  Gardener's  art,  has 
given  us  the  following  as  the  principal  "  sources 
of  pleasure   in   Landscape   Gardening:" 

"L  Congruity:  Or  a  proper  adaptation  of  the 
several  parts  to  the  whole ;  and  that  whole  to  the 
character,  situation,  and  circumstances  of  the  place 
and   its   possessor. 

**  II.  Utility :  Which  includes  convenience,  com- 
fort, neatness,  and  everything  that  conduces  to  the 
purposes   of  habitation   Avith   elegance. 

"  III.     Order :  Including  correctness  and  finishing. 

"  IV.  Symmetry :  Or  that  correspondence  of  parts 
expected  in  the  fronts  of  buildings,  particularly 
Grecian. 

(94) 


GENERAL   REMARKS.  95 

"  V.  Picturesque  Effect :  Which  furnishes  the 
Garden  with  breadth  of  light  and  shade,  forms 
of  groups,  outline,  coloring,  balance  of  composition, 
and  occasional  advantage  from  roughness  and  decay, 
the   effect   of  time   and   age. 

"VI.  Intricacy:  Which  has  been  defined  to  be 
that  disposition  of  objects,  which,  by  a  partial  and 
uncertain  concealment,  excites  and  nourishes  curi- 
osity. 

"VII.  Simplicity:  Or  that  disposition  of  objects 
which,  without  exposing  them  equally  to  view  at  once, 
may  lead  the  eye  to  each  by  an  easy  gradation, 
without   ilutter,  confusion,  or   perplexity. 

"VIII.     Vaiiety. 

"IX.  Novelty:  Which  although  a  great  source  of 
pleasure,  is  most  difiicult  and  dangerous  for  an 
artist  to  attempt,  as  it  is  apt  to  lead  him  into 
conceits  and  whims,  which  lose  their  novelty  after 
the   first   surprise. 

"X.  Contrast:  Which  supplies  the  place  of 
novelty  by  a  sudden  and  unexpected  change  of 
scenery,  provided  the  transitions  are  neither  too 
frequent   nor   too   violent. 

"  XL     Co7itinuity :    This    seems    evidently   to   be 


96  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

a  source  of  pleasure,  from  the  deliglit  expressed 
in  a  long  avenue,  and  the  disgust  at  an  abrupt 
break  between  objects  that  look  as  if  they  ought 
to   be   united. 

"XII.  Association:  This  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
pressive sources  of  delight;  whether  excited  by 
local  accident,  as  the  spot  on  which  some  public 
character  performed  his  part ;  by  the  remains  of 
antiquity,  as  the  ruin  of  a  cloister  or  castle ;  but 
more  particularly  by  that  personal  attachment  to 
long-known  objects,  perhaps  indifferent  in  them- 
selves, or  the  favorite  seat,  the  tree,  the  walk,  or 
the  spot  endeared  by  the  remembrance  of  past 
events.  Such  partialities  should  be  respected  and 
indulged,  since  true  taste,  which  is  generally  attended 
by  great  sensibility,  ought  to  be  the  guardian  of 
it   in   others. 

"  Xni.  Grandeur:  Consisting  either  in  great- 
ness of  dimensions,  extent  of  prospect,  or  in  splendid 
and  numerous  objects  of  magnificence.  The  desire 
for  grandeur,  leads  to  the  very  common  error  of 
mistaking   extent   for   beauty,  in   scenery. 

"XrV.  Animation:  Or  that  pleasure  experienced 
from    seeing   life    and    motion ;    whether  the  gliding 


GENERAL   REMARKS.  97 

or  dashing   of  water,  the   sportive  .  play  of  animals, 
or   the   wavy  motion   of  trees." 

Uniformity  of  style  or  character,  and  harmony 
or  proportion  of  parts  with  the  whole,  which  we 
understand  to  he  the  meaning  of  the  first  of  the 
"  sources  of  pleasure,^'  mentioned  hy  Mr.  Eepton, 
is  also  one  of  the  most  important.  It  is  often 
mistaken  for  symmetry,  or  the  correspondence  of 
similar  parts,  which  produces  a  dull  monotony, 
instead  of  the  pleasing  variety  of  a  Landscape  in 
which  this  harmony  and  uniformity  are  kept  up. 
A  lack  of  harmony  and  proportion  will  not  fail 
to  make  a  place  look  ridiculous.  Thus  we  some- 
times see,  in  a  pleasure-ground,  flowers,  trees  and 
ornamental  shrubs,  mixed  indiscriminately  with  patches 
of  corn  or  cabbage.  Or  again,  the  writer  of  this 
has  seen  a  Landscape  made  up  of  graceful  plan- 
tation, a  fine  lawn,  and  finely-curved  and  sweeping 
lines  of  walks,  harshly  cut  into  by  a  straight  ave- 
nue of  formal  Eed  Cedars.  Who  would  not  see 
here  a  lack  of  understanding,  as  well  as  taste  ? 
Again,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind,  that  however 
beautiful  an  object  may  be  in  itself,  if  it  is  out  of 
place  in   the  scene,  its  beauty  will  not    save  it  from 


98  PKACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

being  oftensive  to  the  eye  of  taste.  Thus,  insert- 
ing a  mass  of  rockwork  in  the  midst  of  a  smooth 
lawn,  or  surrounding  an  ancient  castle  by  a  grass 
field,  or  placing  a  pond  on  a  hill-side,  would  be 
errors  which  the  most  common-place  observer  would 
detect. 

But  beside  this  harmony  or  relative  fitness,  we 
have  an  additional  consideration,  called  Scale,  or 
Comparative  Proportion.  It  is  an  axiom  in  Gar- 
dening, that  "  objects  are  great  or  small  only  by 
comparison,^'  or  as  they  have  a  reference  to  other 
objects,  with  which  they  are  liable  to  be  com- 
pared. As  an  example  or  illustration,  place  a 
small  cottage  alongside  of  a  church  or  mansion- 
house,  and  the  first  will  look  smaller  than  it 
really  is,  while  the  last  appears  larger,  from  the 
comparison  with  its  diminutive  neighbor.  So,  also, 
let  a  cottage  be  fronted  by  a  group  or  clump 
of  tall  Elms,  and  while  the  trees  look  tall  and 
bare,  the  importance,  as  well  as  apparent  size  of 
the  cottage  will  be  much  diminished.  Let  the 
same  cottage  be  backed  by  a  few  lower  growing. 
trees,  whose  tops  will  just  be  visible  over  its  roof, 
from   the  front,  and   it  will  be  found   to  add  vustlv 


GENERAL    REMARKS.  99 

to  the  apparent  size  and  importance  of  tlie  build- 
ing. So,  too,  in  judging  of  the  extent  of  a  lawn 
on  which  cattle  are  feeding ;  the  cattle  in  the  dis- 
tance appear  smaller  than  they  really  are,  and  by 
their  apparent  size  we  estimate  the  extent  of  the 
lawn.  Mr.  Eepton  gives  an  instance  in  point,  of 
the  application  of  this  principle.  He  says :  *'  At 
Hurlinghame,  on  the  Thames,  the  lawn  in  front  of 
the  house  was  necessarily  contracted  by  the  vicin- 
ity of  the  river,  yet,  being  too  large  to  be  'kept 
under  the  scythe  and  roller,  and  too  small  to  be 
fed  by  a  flock  of  sheep,  I  recommended  the  in- 
troduction of  Alderney  cows,  only  (a  very  small 
variety  of  the  cow),  and  the  effect  is  that  of  giv- 
ing imaginary  extent  to  the  place,  which  is  thus 
measured  below  a  true  standard ;  because,  if  dis- 
tance will  make  the  animal  appear  small,  so  the 
distance  will  be  apparently  extended  by  the  small- 
ness  of  the  animal."  Again,  the  fine  appearance 
of  a  group  of  noble  oaks  may  be  totally  destroyed 
by  their  being  overtopped  by  some  other  higher 
tree,  as  an  Elm  in  their  midst,  or  at  their  back, 
making  them  appear  as  diminutive  bushes.  All 
this    the   gardener  must  bear    in   mind  when   bring- 


100  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

ing  liis  plans  into  effect.  Thus,  in  crossing  a 
river  wliicli  is  tlie  work  of  art,  it  is  preferable  to 
use  a  bridge  containing  more  arches  than  one, 
while  in  natural  rivers  a  single  arch  is  often 
preferable,  because  in  the  latter  we  wish  to  in- 
crease the  magnitude  of  the  bridge,  while  in  the 
former  we  endeavor  to  give  importance  to  the 
artificial    river. 

The  power  of  increasing  or  diminishing  the 
apparent  size  of  any  object,  by  putting  it  in  com- 
parison with  some  other  object,  is  most  valuable 
to  the  skillful  gardener ;  but  when  it  is  not  duly 
kept  in  mind,  it  often  occasions  as  great  defects,  as 
it  might   have   created  beauties. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS. 


CHAPTER    XI. 

INTRODUCTORY     REMARKS. 

Having  in  the  preceding  pages  laid  down  such 
rules,  and  given  such  descriptions  and  explanations 
Qf  the  components  of  a  heautiful  Landscape,  as 
will,  we  trust,  be  understood  by  the  general  reader, 
as  well  as  aid  the  uninstructed  in  forming  a  cor- 
rect judgment  in  matters  appertaining  to  Garden- 
ing, we  now  proceed  to  give  some  instructions 
regarding  the  Practical  Operations  connected  with 
the   art. 

A  professional  Landscape  Gardener  must  neces- 
sarily possess  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  art  of 
Drawing,   and    a   familiarity  with   the  operations   of 

Surveying,    beside    being    entirely   at   home   in   the 

( 101 ) 


102  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Practical  details  of  Gardening.  The  Amateur  will 
find  in  the  following  pages,  such  hints  and  instruc- 
tions on  the  various  Practical  Operations  of  Gar- 
dening, as  will,  we  hope,  not  only  lighten  his  own 
labors,  hut  enable  him  to  economize  both  time 
and  money,  in  the  laying  out  and  keeping  of  his 
grounds. 

As  the  manual  labor  is  performed  by  common 
day-laborers,  who  have  no  ideas  of  beauty  or  grace 
in  lines  and  forms,  it  will  be  found  necessary,  in 
all  cases,  to  lay  out  their  work  for  them  plainly, 
and  watch  them  closely ;  without  this  they  will 
not  fail  to  obstruct,  rather  than  aid  the  amateur, 
by  their  obstinate  misunderstanding  of  a  tasteful 
plan. 

The  faculty  oi  foreseeing  the  effect  certain  altera- 
tions or  improvements  will  have  upon  the  appear- 
ance of  the  whole,  is  that  which  tends  most  toward 
economizing  labor  and  expense.  This  faculty  is, 
however,  necessarily  the  result  only  of  long  ex- 
perience in  the  adaptation  of  various  shapes  and 
colors  to  various  forms  of  ground,  and  different 
scenes.  Without  the  ability  to  foretell  with  cer- 
tainty,  the  effect  of  his   work,  the  gardener   would 


*    INTRODUCTORY     REMARKS.  103 

be  obliged  to  work  on  at  random,  and  his  art 
would  consist  of  but  a  series  of  expensive  and  tire- 
some experiments,  and  tedious  alterations.  To  pre- 
vent tbis,  it  is  always  necessary  to  engage  a  com- 
petent gardener  to  lay  out  a  Plan  for  the  proposed 
improvement.  Let  the  proprietor  closely  consider 
tbis  plan,  have  it  modified  by  the  gardener  in  any 
particular,  when  it  conflicts  with  his  direct  wishes  — 
the  latter  being  then  able  to  show  him  where  his 
wishes  would  come  in  conflict  with  the  harmony 
or  tastefulness  of  the  whole  design  ;  and  then,  when 
finally  the  plan  is  fully  settled  upon,  men  may 
be  set  to  work  to  execute  its  details,  without  the 
after  necessity  of  changes  or  alterations,  involving 
loss  of  time  and  money,  and  creating  vexation  and 
disgust. 

All  that  is  done  should  be  done  in  the  best 
manner,  else  will  the  improvement,  however  costly 
or  elegant  in  design,  be  sure  to  disappoint  the 
hopes  of  the  proprietor.  Slight  errors,  in  the  exe- 
cution of  a  Plan,  have  a  serious  effect  upon  the 
appearance  of  the  grounds.  Lines  which  should  be 
parallel,  and  are  not,  faults  in  the  level,  etc., 
etc.,  while  oftentimes  themselves  unperceived  by  the 


104  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

general  observer,  never  fail  to  give  out  an  unpleas- 
ant impression  of  the   whole    improvement. 

The  gardener  or  improver  must  be  careful  to  make 
his  works  join  harmoniously  with  those  of  nature. 
He  must  recollect  that  no  work  is  tasteful,  unless 
in  keeping  with  the  shape  and  general  conforma- 
tion of  the  ground,  and  harmonious  in  all  its  parts. 
All  defective  forms  of  natural  forest  growth,  as 
straight  lines,  formed  by  former  fences,  must  be 
restored  to  beauty  by  breaking  their  outline  bold- 
ly,—  thus  showing  the  beauties  of  individual  trees, 
or,  when  necessary  to  create  greater  distinctness  of 
outline,  new  plantations  may  be  added,  in  places, 
to  conceal  the  bare  stems  of  trees,  and  to  give 
greater  depth  and  impressiveness  of  appearance. 
Groves  are  much  improved  by  proper  and  careful 
thinning  out,  by  which  means,  clear  spots  of  lawn 
are  created  m  the  midst  of  groups  of  trees.  Where 
it  is  desirable  to  obtain  Views  to  the  outside, 
thinning  out  of  branches,  and  topping  are  often 
found  sufficient.  Where  this  will  not  answer,  solid 
woods  may  be  broken  through,  care  being  taken 
to  give  to  the  break  a  natural  freedom  of  shape. 
Thinning  out  must  be  carefully,  and  not  too  hastily 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  105 

performed.  Trees  wliicli  have  grown  up  in  the 
midst  of  a  dense  group,  protected  then  bj  others, 
from  cold  and  high  winds,  are  unfit  to  withstand, 
singly  and  at  once,  the  fierce  blasts  of  winter. 
The  change  should,  therefore,  be  brought  about 
gradually.  Trees  which  it  is  desired  to  remove, 
should,  in  all  cases,  be  taken  up  roots  and  all, 
as  nothing  looks  so  unsightly  and  tasteless,  as  a 
landscape  clogged  up  with  stumps.  Improvements 
with  the  ax,  such  as  those  spoken  of  above,  will 
be  found  to  succeed  best  when  the  woods  are  in 
full   foliage. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

PLANTING. 

In  taking  up  or  setting  out  trees,  we  should 
never  forget  that  they  are  possessed  of  life,  and 
may  not,  therefore,  be  handled  as  stumps  or  stones. 
It  is  necessary  to  preserve  the  largest  possible  por- 
tion of  the  roots,  and  to  trim  carefully  with  a 
sharp  knife,  those  which  were  cut  off  or  injured 
by  the  spade,  in  digging  up.  The  bark,  also, 
requires  careful  attention  —  should  it  become  dry, 
and  much  injured,  it  would  be  fatal  to  the  tree. 
Next,  the  tops  must  be  trimmed,  so  as  to  pre- 
serve, a  balance  between  the  body  of  the  tree  and 
its  roots.  The  roots  supply  nourishment  to  the  tree, 
while  the  leaves  are  its  lungs.  It  is  possible, 
therefore,  to  deprive  it  of  too  great  a  portion  of 
leaf-making  boughs,  which  will  make  it  puny  and 
sickly,  and  perhaps  kill  it.     Evergreens  and  Larches 

(106) 


PLANTING.  107 

are  only  trimmed  when  any  parts  are  badly  broken 
or  injured. 

Where  it  is  intended  to  plant  trees,  the  ground 
should  be  previously  prepared  by  a  deep  trench- 
ing and  manuring ;  this  will  be  found  to  add 
wonderfully  to  the  quick  development  of  trees. 
Where  this,  however,  is  found  too  expensive,  it  is 
necessary  to  make  the  holes  for  the  trees  quite 
large,  say  three  or  four  times  the  diameter  of  the 
circle  described  by  the  roots.  The  planter  must 
be  careful  to  place  the  roots  in  their  original  posi- 
tion, neither  in  a  bunch,  nor  in  a  direction  con- 
trary to  that  they  were  in  naturally.  Surround 
the  roots,  on  all  sides,  carefully  with  fine  earth.  It 
is  important  to  see  that  every  portion  of  the  roots 
comes  in  contact  with  the  ground.  Hard-wooded 
trees  must  be  placed  in  the  ground,  at  the  depth 
they  originally  held.  With  such  as  grow  from  cut- 
tings, as  the  Silver,  and  Lombardy  Poplars,  the 
Willow,  etc.,  the  depth  makes  no  material  differ- 
ence. They  may  be  set  at  any  convenient  depth. 
After  filling  in  the  ground  about  the  roots,  it  is 
trSmped  down,  and  the  operation  is  finally  completed 
by  throwing   two  or   three  buckets  of  water  around 


i08  PEACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

the  base  of  the  tree,  which  will  more  firmly  unite 
the    earth    around    the   roots. 

The  best  season  for  planting  or  transplanting, 
is  early  in  the  winter  and  in  the  spring.  For 
Evergreens,  spring  is  generally  considered  the  best 
time.  The  operation  of  taking  up  trees,  is  one 
requiring  much  care.  They  should  be  tenderly 
handled,  and  particular  attention  must  be  paid  to 
saving  the  roots,  as  much  as  possible.  After 
being  dug  out,  trees  should  not  be  left  lying  about 
on  the  ground,  or  put  away  above  ground,  but  if 
not  immediately  to  be  planted  again,  should  be 
hulled  in.  To  do  this,  a  trench  is  dug,  sufficiently 
deep   to   take   in   the   roots   completely. 

In  Plantations  of  single  trees  it  is  well,  here 
and  there,  to  set  two  or  three  of  the  same  species 
in  the  same  hole,  creating  an  effect  which  we  often 
see  in  natural  scenery,  and  which  adds  a  most 
pleasing  variety  to  the  Landscape.  Trees  thus 
planted  will  naturally  incline  from  the  perpen- 
dicular, and  often  assume  most  graceful  shapes. 
In  planting  to  form  a  grove,  the  choice  of  situa- 
tions for  trees,  is  a  matter  requiring  a  delicate 
and   correct  judgment,    and    some   experience.       We 


PLANTING.  109 

can  only  say  here,  that  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
to  avoid  all  formality  and  regularity,  and  most 
especially  the  regular  irregulainty  into  which  begin- 
ners often  run,  when  attempting  to  avoid  straight 
lines  and  regular  distances.  Trees  should  be 
planted  nearer  together  here  —  farther  apart  there  — 
but  everywhere  in  such  a  manner  that  the  eye  can 
not   detect    the    handiwork  of  art. 

In  planting  solid  masses,  or  groups,  the  efiect 
of  the  entire  body  upon  the  balance  of  the  scenery, 
as  well  as  the  effect  of  each  individual  part  to 
the  group  as  a  whole,  must  be  foreseen  by  the 
gardener.  Failing  in  this,  he  will  most  certainly 
be  unsuccessful  in  his  attempts  at  adding  a  grace- 
ful feature  to  the  Landscape.  The  faculty  of  fore- 
seeing effects,  as  before  remarked,  is  one  which  can 
not  be  attained  but  by  practice  and  experience, 
in  connection  with  a  correct  taste,  and  an  eye 
quick  to  take  in  all  the  details  of  a  scene.  We 
must,  therefore,  confine  ourselves  to  simple  direc- 
tions, as  to  the  preliminary  proceedings.  The  main 
features  of  the  plan  for  improvement  being  first 
marked  on  the  ground  with  sticks,  the  outlines 
of  the  groups  are  next  marked  off.  keeping  strictly 


110  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

in  mind  their  effect,  as  regards  freedom  of  view, 
and  of  form,  liiglit,  and  general  shape.  Longer 
sticks  may  serve  to  distinguish  the  irregular  out- 
lines ;  after  examining  which,  smaller  pegs  will 
serve  to  fill  up  the  lines  and  render  the  mark- 
ing plainer.  The  tree-holes  are  now  made ;  not, 
however,  following  the  outline  marks,  hut  irregu- 
larly—  simply  preserving  the  main  features.  In 
making  the  tree-holes,  when  several  workmen  are 
employed,  it  has  heen  found  an  excellent  expedi- 
ent, hy  which  to  avoid  uniformity,  to  allow  the 
workmen  to  suit  themselves,  in  the  first  set  of 
holes  they  make,  merely  preserving  intact  the  main 
outline.  To  follow  implicitly  any  marked  out- 
line would  produce  easy-flowing  lines  or  forms, 
which   are   invariahly   insipid. 

To  produce  dense  masses,  the  improver  must 
imitate  the  ways  of  nature,  viz :  let  them  grow 
up  from  a  thicket.  In  such  a  case  accidental 
effects,  and  the  workings  of  nature,  are  to  he 
securely  relied  on.  As  the  plants  composing  the 
thicket  grow  up,  the  weaker  ones  are  either  run 
out  hy  their  stronger  neighhors,  or  they  sprout 
from    the  bottom,  and    remain    as    undergrowth,  and 


PLANTING.  Ill 

can,  in  time,  he  cut  down.  By  proceeding  in  this 
way,  tlie  improver  will  secure  a  close,  compact 
group  for  many  years.  In  planting  a  group  in 
the  way  mentioned,  we  select  young  stems  from 
half  an  inch  to  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  set  them 
out  at  from  two  to  four  feet  apart,  then  leave 
the  development  of  the  group  to  nature.  Care 
must  he  exercised  to  avoid  regularity  in  the  dis- 
tances and  lines.  Trees  of  rarer  species,  and  which 
naturally  demand  a  more  conspicuous  place,  should 
not  he  mixed  with  the  commoner  species,  in  groups, 
as  either  they  would  therehy  be  lost  to  observa- 
tion, or,  in  the  attempt  to  make  them  prominent 
above  the  rest,  the  compactness  of  the  group  would 
he  destroyed.  Such  trees  are  planted  as  single 
specimens  before  the  group  to  which  they  belong ; 
thus  they  will  highten  the  spirited  form  of  the 
group,  and  have  sufficient  room  to  attain  their  full 
development  and  beauty.  If  it  is  intended  to 
plant  a  mass  or  group  of  half-grown  trees,  they 
must,  of  course,  be  set  at  greater  distances  apart, 
accordino'  to  their  size.  Brushwood,  such  as  Indian- 
arrow.  Dogwood,  Hornbeams,  etc.,  is  then  to  be  planted 
between,  to   make    the    group   compact    and    close. 


112  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

Particular  attention  should  he  pajd.  to  form  the 
margin  or  oblique  ascending  line  of  a  group.  The 
shrubbery  is  to  be  planted,  not  merely  to  cover 
the  bare  stems  of  the  higher  trees  in  the  interior 
of  the  groups,  but  to  produce,  at  the  same  time, 
an  ever-changing  natural  variety.  Several  plants 
of  the  same  species  should  be  set  together,  as 
though  springing  up  from  the  same  stock ;  the  out- 
side plants  should  incline  toward  the  ground,  thus 
gradually  rising  toward  the  lowest  branches  of  the 
trees.  It  will  be  found  of  good  effect  to  plant 
some  detached,  smaller  groups  or  clumps  of  shrub- 
bery, disposed  on  the  same  princij^le,  at  some  dis- 
tance before  the  group,  especially  in  such  places  as 
should  be  the  most  conspicuous  points  of  the  mar- 
gin, being  either  bold  prominences,  or  deep  recesses. 

The  Evergreens  should  always  be  set  together, 
rather  than  scattered  among  the  deciduous  trees  and 
shrubs.  Placed  by  themselves,  they  will  show  to 
much  more  advantage,  giving  pleasure  to  the  senses, 
in  summer,  by  the  cool  shade  of  their  dense  foliage, 
and  the  fragrance  with  which  they  scent  the  air, 
in  winter  —  lending  an  appearance  of  life  to  the 
Garden,    when    all    appears   withered    and   dead.       If 


PLANTING.  113 

they  are  wished  to  produce  immediate  efiect  on  the 
garden  scenery,  they  may  be  set  closer  together 
than  their  future  size  will  admit,  being  thinned 
out  and  removed  to  other  places,  when  becoming 
too  thick. 

This  is  generally  done  when  heavier  masses  of 
evergreens  are  planted.  In  planting  detached  groups 
of  three,  five,  seven  or  nine  plants  each,  the  plants 
may  be  set  at  once  at  such  distances  as  will  allow 
their  future  development.  In  planting  evergreens  by 
the  side  of  a  walk  or  road,  ample  allowance  must  be 
made  for  the  growth  of  the  spreading  branches  ;  they 
should  be  set  at  such  a  distance  from  the  border,  as 
never  to  interfere  with  the  free  passage  of  the  road. 

Those  kinds  of  evergreens  which  naturally  in- 
cline to  the  stiff  form,  as  the  Eed-cedar,  the  Juni- 
per, the  Arbor- vitse,  etc.,  should  always  be  set  in  a 
denser  clump,  thus  forcing  their  normal  forms  to 
attain   a   more   irregular,   rugged   shape. 

Fine  Flowering  Shrubbery  and  Flowers.  —  It 

has    been    remarked    above,   that   Flowering   Shrubs 

and   Flowers   are    grouped    according    to    the   same 

principles  as  the  larger  masses  of  trees  and  shrubs. 

They   show  best  when  grouped  in  masses,  consisting 
10 


114  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GAKDENESTG. 

of  but  one  kind  of  plant,  but  where,  in  large 
masses,  flowers  of  several  kinds  are  brought  to- 
gether, a  portion  of  the  outside,  or  margin,  should 
be  allowed  to  each,  when  its  beauties  will  be  shown 
to  most  advantage,  the  center  being  then  formed 
of  parts  of  all,  yet  not  so  intermixed  as  to  form 
a  wild  confusion.  In  such  an  arrangement  of  a 
flower-group,  the  flowers  should  not,  however,  be  set 
regularly  in  borders  or  wreaths,  but  a  natural 
arrangement  should  be  kept  up,  such  as  has  been 
before  spoken  of  Thus  we  should  set  them,  in 
one  place,  in  clumps,  showing  conspicuously  between 
masses  of  green  shrubbery,  and  in  another  as 
uniting  in  a  solid  mass,  forming  the  immediate 
margin   of  the   group. 

In  planting  trees  or  shrubs  of  any  kind,  it  is 
always  well,  when  possible,  to  select  for  each  species 
the  quality  of  soil  which  experience  and  examina- 
tion have  proved  is  best  adapted  to  its  growth  and 
well-being.  Many  plants  require  a  rich  soil,  while 
others,  again,  flourish  on  sterile,  barren  ground ; 
some  must  have  a  dry  soil,  while  others,  again, 
will  grow  when  the  ground  is  immersed  in  water. 
It   is  true  enough,  that    all,  or   nearly  all   varieties 


PLANTING.  115 

will  live  in  common  soil,  neither  ricli  nor  poor, 
wet  nor  dry.  Yet  it  is  plain,  that  when  they  are 
at  once  set  into  a  soil  adapted  to  their  wants,  they 
will  grow  faster,  and  become  hardier,  and,  of  course, 
be  objects  of  much  greater  beauty.  It  is,  however, 
but  seldom  in  the  power  of  the  improver  to  jpro- 
vide,  for  all  his  trees,  the  soil  they  should  have. 
Too  often  his  place  presents  a  soil  composed  of 
naught  but  stiff  clay,  barren  and  hard  to  work. 
It  is  therefore  expedient,  if  at  all  possible,  to 
trench  deeply  the  soil  he  intends  to  plant.  This 
is  an  operation  involving  considerable  labor  and 
expense.  Should  he  not  be  able  to  do  this,  he 
should,  in  all  cases,  make  his  tree-holes  much 
larger  than  common,  that  the  plant  may  be  able 
to  send  out  new  roots,  through  the  mellow  ground. 
For  such  plants  as  require  rich  ground,  well-rotted 
manure  or  loam  should  be  mixed  in  large  propor- 
tion  with   the   ground   thrown   around   the  roots. 

For  the  first  two  or  three  years  after  groups 
have  been  planted,  it  is  necessary  that  the  ground 
about  the  bases  of  the  trees,  be  kept  clear  of 
weeds,  as  well  as  partly  loose.  In  autumn  or  win- 
ter,   the    ground    should    be    turned    up    with    the 


116  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

spade  or  lioe,  in  order  that  it  may  receive  the 
meliorating  influences  of  the  frost  and  moisture  of 
winter.  The  turf  growing  around  the  groups  should 
not  he  cut,  or  otherwise  disturbed,  as  this  would 
draw  a  line  of  stiff  separation  between  the  groups 
and   the   lawn,   which    naturally   should    he    united. 

Where  plants  stand  on  the  lawn,  or  anywhere 
in  the  turf,  their  bases  should  be  kept  clear  for 
several  years,  that  they  may  have  no  lack  of  air 
and  moisture  at  their  roots.  It  will  be  found 
necessary  to  give  such  spots  an  occasional  clearing, 
covering  them  afterward  with  litter.  Should  this 
be  neglected,  the  plants  will  become  stunted  and 
sickly. 

Great  care  and  attention  to  all  necessary  details 
is  required,  in  moving  or  transplanting  trees  of 
large  size.  Trees  of  rapid  growth,  and  also  Ever- 
greens, having  generally  spreading  and  fibrous  roots, 
are  much  hardier,  and  do  not  require  so  much  care. 
It  is,  for  instance,  no  difiiculty  to  transplant  a 
Poplar  of  nine  inches  diameter  in  the  stem,  while 
an  Oak  of  that  size,  if  moved,  will  scarcely  ever 
grow.  In  all  cases,  the  utmost  attention  must  be 
given    to   the    preservation    of    the    roots.      For   the 


PLANTING.  117 

transportation  of  trees,  various  machines  have  been 
invented,  but  none  are  much  used,  in  this  coun- 
try. For  any  common  occasion,  a  dray  will  answer 
all  purposes.  This  should  be  backed  up,  as  closely 
as  possible,  to  the  base  of  the  tree  to  be  moved, 
and  the  roots  being  loosened,  the  ball  is  slipped 
on  the  dray.  For  the  purpose  of  moving  quite 
large  or  heavy  trees,  a  machine,  of  which  we  here 
give  a  description,  is  found  very  useful.  This  ma- 
chine is  formed  on  the  principle  of  the  common 
timber  truck,  being  a  strong  lever  attached  to  the 
axletree  of  a  pair  of  wheels.  The  latter  are  very 
strongly  constructed,  at  least  five  feet  in  diameter, 
and  with  a  six  or  nine  inch  tire.  The  axletree 
is  correspondingly  substantial,  and  to  its  middle 
the  pole  or  lever  is  securely  fixed.  The  pole  should 
be  made  of  the  toughest  wood,  seven  inches  square, 
with  the  edges  planed  off,  and  somewhat  reduced 
in  thickness,  toward  the  end.  The  length  should 
be  at  least  ten  feet ;  for  the  longer  it  is,  the 
greater  the  purchase  in  raising  a  tree.  The  pole 
is  strengthened  by  side  braces,  let  into  the  axle, 
and  mounted  with  an  iron  eye  and  ring  at  the 
point.      When    to   be    used,   it  is  backed  up  against 


118  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

the  tree,  and  the  pole  is  raised  and  made  fast 
thereto.  The  wheels  rest  in  the  hollow  made  by 
baring  and  loosening  the  roots,  though  not  upon 
any  of  them;  and  when  all  is  ready,  the  strength 
of  men,  or  of  a  horse,  is  applied  to  the  pole-chain, 
which  is,  together  with  the  tree,  pulled  to  the 
ground,  the  roots  being  by  that  means  lifted  out 
of  the  ground.  When  thus  borne  on  the  machine, 
it  is  drawn  away,  root  foremost,  to  its  new  place, 
previously  prepared  for  its  reception.  The  wheels 
are  drawn  into  the  new  opening,  the  pole  and  tree 
set  at  liberty,  and  if,  as  is  generally  the  case, 
the  root  be  heavy,  the  tree  will  resume  its  former 
position,  with  but  very  little  aid.  The  machine  is 
then  loosened  from  the  tree,  and  removed  out  of 
the  way.  The  roots  are  next  carefully  laid  out 
and  imbedded  in  loose  soil,  well  consolidated  and 
plentifully   watered,    and   the  job   is   done. 

When  a  machine  is  made  on  purpose  for  remov- 
ing large  trees,  the  axletree  may  be  made  to  fit 
a  pair  of  cart-wheels  for  a  temporary  purpose. 
The  axle  should  be  formed  with  straight,  not  droop- 
ing ends,  as  they  are  usually  made,  because  this 
renders  the  raising  of  the  pole  much  easier.      Upon 


PLANTING.  119 

the  upper  side  of  the  axle  there  should  he  a  thick 
hlock  of  wood  holted,  to  give  more  elevation  to  the 
root  when  drawn  along,  and  on  this  an  old  sack 
or  a  thick  hand  of  straw  is  hound,  to  prevent  chafing 
the   hark   of  the  tree. 

After  heing  transplanted,  as  hefore  ohserved, 
trees  require  much  water,  and  in  the  hottest  part 
of  summer  they  must  he  well  attended.  Water 
should  he  applied  not  only  to  the  roots,  hut  also 
to  the  entire  stem  and  houghs,  every  hit  of  hark 
heing  made  wet.  Evergreens,  in  particular,  require 
this  treatment.  When  ahout  to  transplant  trees, 
it  is  a  very  good  plan  to  prepare  them  for  that 
step  a  year  heforehand.  For  this  purpose,  it  is 
necessary  to  dig  carefully  round  the  roots,  to  the 
depth  of  some  of  the  main  roots.  The  side  roots 
are  cut  with  the  ax  or  spade  at  some  distance 
from  the  stem.  The  trench  dug  round  the  roots 
is  then  filled  up  again  with  earth  and  well  watered. 
By  adopting  this  plan,  the  roots  are  forced  to  send 
out  small  fihrous  rootlets,  which  will  soon  form 
a  solid  hall.  Trees  prepared  in  this  way  will  he 
much  more  likely  to  live  than  if  simply  taken  up 
without   previous   preparation. 


120  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

In  winter,  trees  may  be  removed  witli  tlie  fro- 
zen ball ;  having  been  dug  round,  the  ball  is 
watered  in  the  evening  previous  to  a  cold  night. 
In  the  morning,  the  ball  being  sufficiently  frozen, 
the  tree  is  taken  up  and  removed ;  trees,  espe- 
cially Evergreens,  thus  removed,  will  succeed  very 
well.  In  replanting  larger  trees,  it  is  well  to 
surround  the  roots  with  sand,  or  fine  gravel,  before 
filling  in   the   earth. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE    LAWN. 

There  are  two  ways  to  establish  the  grass  on 
the  Lawn,  either  by  sowing  the  seed,  or  by  sodding. 
Whatever  way  be  adopted,  it  must  be  observed  that 
the  ground  must  first  be  put  in  good  order.  It 
should  be  spaded,  and  made  fine  with  the  rake. 
In  smaller  places,  sodding  is  far  preferable  to  sow- 
ing the  seed,  as  it  finishes  the  job  at  once.  The 
sods  may  be  cut  with  a  sharp  spade  from  a  pas- 
ture or  meadow,  in  pieces  of  a  size  convenient  to 
handle,  and  of  one  to  two  inches  in  thickness. 
When  put  down,  the  edges  are  joined,  as  nearly 
as  possible,  and  fine  earth  or  manure  filled  in  the 
cracks.  In  smaller  or  neater  places,  as  in  city 
lots,  great  care  is  generally  taken  to  join  the  sods 
smoothly  —  laborers  are  frequently  seen  on  their 
knees,    trimming    the    edges    with    a    knife.       After 

11  (.121) 


122  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

the  sods  are  laid  down,  they  should  be  beaten  down 
with  the  spade,  or  a  ponnder  made  expressly  for 
this   purpose. 

If  the  grass  is  to  be  raised  from  seed,  the 
ground  should  undergo  a  very  careful  preparation. 
If  it  be  poor,  its  surface,  after  being  spaded,  must 
be  enriched  with  fine  manure,  else  the  young  grass 
will  meet  with  but  little  success.  The  seed  may 
be  sown  pretty  thickly ;  it  should  be  but  slightly 
raked  under,  after  which,  a  roller  is  passed  over 
the  ground,  to  make  the  surface  smooth  and  firm. 
The  ground  should  be  of  such  quality  as  to  start 
the  grass  quickly,  else  it  will  soon  be  covered  by 
an   abundance   of  weeds. 

The  borders  of  the  Lawn  should  be  sodded, 
under  all  circumstances;  they  should  not  rise  more 
than  one  or  two  inches  above  the  level  of  the 
walk. 

Lawns  of  larger  extent  may  conveniently  be 
worked  with  the  plow  and  harrow,  and  treated  on 
the  principle  generally  followed  by  the  farmer  —  to 
sow   the    grass-seed   between    oats    or    wheat. 

The  Bluegrass  is  the  kind  of  grass  most  desi- 
rable   for    grass-plots    intended     to    be    kept  smooth 


THE   LAWN.  123 

and  short,  or  for  pasture,  Timothy  and  Clover 
may  be    used   for   larger    Lawns   intended   for    hay. 

The  verdant  turf  of  the  Lawn  forms  a  very 
important  component  of  a  beautiful  garden  scene. 
Its  luxuriant  growth  and  verdure  is  highly  im- 
proved by  frequent  manurings,  which  should  be 
applied  in  winter.  After  the  manure  has  had  the 
influence  of  frost,  it  is  raked  even  and  the  litter 
piled  up  and  removed."  The  grass  should  be  kept 
low  and  smooth  —  the  scythe  and  roller  being  freely 
used.  The  borders  must  always  be  nicely  trim- 
med—  they   should    be   kept  very  smooth  and  short. 

Many  little  contrivances  have  been  invented,  and 
may  be  found  in  the  seedstores,  for  the  purpose 
of  facilitating  the  labor  of  trimming  grass  bor- 
ders. These  are  most  properly  left  to  ladies  and 
children.  A  sharp  spade,  and  a  steady  eye  and 
hand,  are  all  that  are  necessary  to  trim  the  neat- 
est border. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

MOVING      GROUND, 

Is  the  most  expensive  operation  in  Landscape 
Gardening.  It  is,  therefore,  needful  to  use  every 
precaution  which  may  serve  to  economize  expense. 
To  this  purpose  it  is  necessary,  in  the  first  place, 
that  a  complete  and  well-digested  plan  of  the  pro- 
posed alterations  should  he  prepared.  This  done, 
the  improver  must  so  arrange  his  operations,  as  to 
simplify  them  as  far  as  possihle.  Matters  must  he 
so  arranged  that,  when  ground  is  once  taken  up, 
it  will  he  put  down  only  in  the  place  where  it  is 
intended  to  leave  it.  This  rule  should,  on  no  con- 
sideration, he  hroHeu  through.  Tlie  ground  should 
he  obtained  as  near  as  possihle  to  the  scene  of 
operations,  and  should  never  he  taken  from  a  place 
which  will  afterward  have  to  he  again  filled  up. 
When    it    is  only  necessary  to  move  ground  a  short 

(  124  ) 


MOVING   GKOUND.  125 

distance,  and  on  level  or  descending  ground,  it 
will  be  found  advantageous  to  work  with  wheel- 
barrows, while  in  more  extended  operations,  and 
where  it  is  necessary  to  carry  the  ground  some 
distance,  carts,  or  perhaps  wagons  are  preferable ; 
where  wheelbarrows  are  used,  the  kind  called  7ml- 
road  hm-rows,  having  a  round  and  open  bed,  will 
be  found  to  be  a  saving,  both  of  time  and  labor. 
On  level  ground,  an  article  called  a  scraper  will 
be  found  very  useful.  The  ground  being  first  bro- 
ken up  with  the  plow,  two  horses  are  hitched  to 
one  of  these  scrapers,  and  follow  immediately  after. 
A  man  with  two  horses  will,  in  this  way,  easily 
perform  the  labor  of  half  a  dozen  men  with  wheel- 
barrows. 

Whatever  mode  is  used  to  move  the  ground,  it 
is  of  importance  that  all  should  be  conducted  with 
regularity  and  order.  There  should  be  men  enough, 
at  every  station,  loading,  hauling,  or  leveling,  to 
keep  all  parties  constantly  going.  Carts  or  wag- 
ons should  be  so  managed  as  not  to  get  in  one 
another's  way,  thus  losing  no  time  by  waiting  one 
for  the  other.  The  overseer  should  attend  to  it, 
that  no   team   goes   off  without   a   full   load. 


126  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

The  shaping  of  the  Ground,  and  the  laying  out 
of  Koads,  are  operations  very  closely  related  to  one 
another,    and    depend    upon   each   other   in   a   great 
measure.      The   natural   surface   of    the   ground   in- 
fluences  the   improver   in   the   directions  he   chooses 
for  his  roads  or  walks,  while  these  again  govern  en- 
tirely the  arti"ficial  grading  of  the  ground,  which  must 
appear   natural   when  completed.     On   level  ground, 
the    gardener   has   only   to   consult   his   taste   as   to 
the  courses  of   his    roads  and    walks.       After  this  is 
determined    upon,    however,  he    has    to   consider  how 
the  best  effect  may  be  produced  upon  the  flat  ground 
lying   between   the   roads.     Here   he  will  follow   the 
dictates  of  taste,  so  far  as  circumstances   allow.     He 
may   sink   in   one   place  an   easy  valley,  using   the 
earth   which   is   taken   out   to    form    a   gentle    emi- 
nence   or    rising  ground   beyond,   which    shall  accord 
with    the    shape   of    the   valley.      As    in    this    pro- 
ceeding,  the   difference  in  higlit   is  just   double  the 
depth  of  ground   taken   out,    it    is   possible   to    pro- 
duce   a   great   effect    by   comparatively   little   labor. 
On    rising   or    broken   ground,   it   is   a    matter    of 
greater    difiiculty    to   select    courses   for   walks   and 
roads,   as   the   gardener    has   to   consult    both   good 


MOVING    GROUND.  127 

taste  and  economy  of  expense.  On  such  ground, 
the  course  of  a  road  often  requires  a  deep  cut-in 
or  an  embankment  raised  up.  Yet  it  must  be  borne 
in  mind  by  the  gardener,  that  he  must  so  arrange 
the  road  or  walk,  and  the  grounds,  in  reference 
to  each  other,  as  to  produce  the  impression  that 
the  road  was  regulated  by  the  shape  of  the  ground, 
and  not  the  ground  by  the  road.  To  do  this, 
requires,  sometimes,  a  little  additional  labor,  and 
always  a  clear  apprehension  of  the  matter  under 
consideration.  The  grade  of  the  road  should  be 
alternately  ascending  and  descending,  accommodating 
itself,  in  all  cases,  naturally  and  unobtrusively  to 
the  shape  of  the  ground.  Thus  only  will  a  road 
or  walk  appear  in  its  natural  and  proper  place. 
Eminences,  knolls,  and  rising  ground  in  general, 
where  made,  are,  as  before  said,  mostly  formed  from 
the  earth  taken  out  when  forming  the  valleys  and 
ponds.  It  must  be  the  aim  of  the  gardener  to 
produce,  in  all  his  alterations  of  the  surface,  free, 
unbroken,  undulating  lines,  which  shall  nowhere 
betray  the  hand  of  art.  Such  forms  it  is  not 
possible  to  mark  out  on  the  ground  by  stakes ; 
they  must  be  conceived  by  the  experienced  imagina- 


128  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

tion  of  the  gardener,  and  can  be  carried  into  effect 
only  under  his  supervision.  In  forming  an  emi- 
nence, however,  the  hight  to  which  it  is  intended 
to  carry  it  may  be  quite  well  marked  with  sticks, 
the  tops  of  which  will  then  show  the  greatest  ele- 
vation to  which  the  ground  should  be  leveled. 
After  a  sufficiency  of  earth  has  been  filled  in, 
the  whole  is  graded  and  leveled,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  gardener,  and  receives  from  him  its 
final  and  enduring  expression;  and  this  is  what 
can  not  be  previously  marked  down  by  sticks. 
While  filling  in  the  ground,  and  before  leveling, 
should  any  fine  slopes,  by  accident,  develop  them- 
selves, they  must  be  carefully  preserved.  In  opera- 
tions on  an  extended  scale,  the  grading  and  level- 
ing may  be  performed,  in  great  part,  by  the  plow 
and  harrow ;  but  it  will  be  found  necessary  to  put 
on  the  finishing  strokes  with  the  spade  and  rake. 
In  forming  eminences,  it  must  be  remembered  that 
they  must  be  strictly  in  unison  with  the  surround- 
ing grounds,  and  never  betray  signs  of  filling  up. 
There  is  nothing  more  tasteless,  or  which  more 
deforms  a  scene,  than  the  so-called  Indian  mounds, 
which   people  of  a  certain  taste  delight   in   placing 


MOVING     GROUND.  121) 

in  conspicuous  situations,  in  tlieir  gardens  or  before 
their  houses  —  circular  or  sugar-loaf  formed  —  and 
generally  surmounted  by  a  trimmed  Cedar,  or  a 
scraggy-looking  Eosebush :  these  pimples  upon  the 
fair   face   of  Nature   are   highly   admired. 

The  sinking  of  Valleys  is  likewise  a  work  which 
can  not  go  on  without  the  constant  superintendence 
of  the  gardener.  In  directing  the  workmen  as  to 
the  depth  to  be  cut  in,  a  profile  line  is  cut  in 
the  ground  in  several  places,  showing  the  average 
depth  at  the  several  points.  The  ground  is  then 
removed  in  accordance  with  these  lines,  and  the 
rough  form  of  the  valley  will  appear.  Where  a 
valley  is  to  be  formed  of  a  ravine,  profile  lines 
are  struck  on  both  sides  of  the  hollow,  and  the 
ground  coming  out  from  the  sides  is  filled "  in 
the  bottom.  As  the  filling  up  advances,  a  heavy 
garden-line  or  long  rope  is  suspended  between  oppo- 
site profile  lines,  to  determine  and  mark  by  its 
help  the  degree  of  curve  to  be  given.  When  the . 
line  is  arranged  to  suit  the  improver,  he  proceeds 
to  mark  the  different  ranges  with  stakes  whose 
tops  will  just  touch  the  line.  Earth  is  then  filled 
in  level  with   the   tops  of  the  stakes ;   which   done, 


130  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENINGf. 

the  form  of  the  Valley  will  be  before  us,  ready 
to  receive  its  final  finish,  under  the  direction  of 
the  improver.  In  directing  the  laborers  in  their 
final  labors,  the  gardener  takes  care  to  view  the 
work  from  many  different  points,  in  order  that  no 
defects  of  form  may  escape  his  eye,  and  that  he 
may  obtain  for  his  work  the  greatest  beauty  com- 
patible with  its  situation.  A  valley  of  this  kind, 
when  finished,  should  be  at  once  sodded,  as,  unless 
it  is,  the  heavy  rains  will  alter,  to  some  extent, 
the  newly-formed  surface,  by  washing  down  into 
the   hollow. 

It  is  necessary,  in  forming  a  Valley  under  the 
above  directions,  to  make  such  allowances  for  the 
nature  of  the  ground,  as  will  prevent  it  from  being 
wet  or  marshy  in  any  part,  when  finished.  In 
heavy,  flat  soil,  which  is  generally  wet,  it  will  not 
do  to  cut  in  below  the  surface.  Here  earth  must 
be  filled  in  on  both  sides,  so  as  to  leave  a  hol- 
low between ;  but  care  must  be  taken,  not  thereby 
to  disarrange  the  harmony  of  the  surface,  extend- 
ing beyond  the  sides  of  the  proposed  valley.  Drains 
are  often  made  to  lead  off  the  water  that  might 
otherwise   accumulate.      These   may  be   built   either 


MOVING    GROUND.  131 

of  stone,  underground,  or  a  deep  trencli  may  be 
filled  with  loose  stones,  old  logs,  etc.,  through  which 
the   water   will  sink,  and   leave    the   surface   dry. 

In  smaller  Gardens  the  shape  of  the  ground 
may  be  vastly  improved  by  a  good  spading  over, 
throwing  the  ground  so  as  gradually  to  form  an 
easy,  swinging  line,  much  superior  to  a  dead  level. 
However  level  the  grounds  may  originally  be,  the 
Lawn  should  be  in  some  degree,  more  or  less, 
either  concave  or  convex,  as  a  dead  flat  never 
looks   well.  * 

''There  is,  now-ardays,  a  rage  for  "leveling,"  among  many 
of  the  working  hands.  No  matter  what  may  be  the  advan- 
tages a  place  may  offer  for  a  rolling  or  undulating  surface, 
they  insist  upon  bringing  it  down  to  "  a  nice  level,"  or  "  a 
pretty  terrace."  If  these  gentlemen  would  stick  to  railroading, 
at  which  they  have  evidently  graduated,  their  "leveling"  pro- 
pensities might  be  of  some  use  to  the  community  at  large,  and 
certainly  of  less  injury  to  the  Art  of  Landscape  Gardening. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

ROADS     AND     "WALKS, 

As  made  for  use,  rather  than  show,  should  be 
firm,  smooth,  and  dry,  at  all  seasons  of  the  year. 
And,  inasmuch  as  they  are  objects  which  are  open  to 
public  inspection,  they  should  also  be  kept  with  great 
neatness.  Their  shapes  should  be  sharply  cut  and 
distinctly  defined;  their  borders  kept  in  order,  and 
all  sorts  of  dirt  or  rubbish  carefully  excluded  from 
them.  Thus  kept,  they  will,  by  their  graceful 
curves  and  turns,  add  much  interest  to  the  land- 
scape or  scene.  It  has  been  said,  in  another  part 
of  this  volume,  that  the  course  of  a  Eoad  or  Walk 
should  not  be  a  matter  for  the  fancy  of  the  gar- 
dener or  the  proprietor  to  decide  upon,  but  that 
a  Walk  must  have  an  object  as  well  as  a  course. 
We  may  say  here,  in  addition,  that  while  the  walks 

are  laid  down  on   the   paper-plan  of  operations,  this 
(132) 


ROADS   AND   WALKS.  133 

can  not  entirely  bind  the  gardener,  but  he  must 
be  directed,  in  the  execution,  by  his  judgment,  and 
the  accidental  and  perhaps  unforeseen  advantages 
or  disadvantages  of  the  ground.  While,  then,  in 
the  direction  and  main  points  of  his  Walks  he  fol- 
lows the  design  or  plan,  his  eye  and  good  taste 
can  alone  guide  him  in  giving  to  them  those  grace- 
ful bends  and  curves  which  make  them  objects  of 
attraction,  and  which  alone  can  give  them  expres- 
sion. The  man  of  taste  will  not  be  ruled  by  a 
Plan ;  his  love  for  choice  forms,  and  for  the  beau- 
ties of  a  Landscape,  will  always  lead  his  roads 
and  walks  through  the  choicest  spots,  and  in  the 
easiest   and   most   graceful   lines. 

In  marking  out  the  line  for  an  intended  Eoad 
or  Walk,  the  gardener  should  make  use  of  sticks 
about  two  feet  long,  with  which  he  first  proceeds 
to  secure,  by  measurement  from  his  Plan,  correct- 
ness of  general  outline.  Having  marked  the  turn- 
ing points  and  general  outline,  he  next  proceeds 
to  estabKsh  by  them,  such  curves  and  easy-flowing 
lines  as  seem  to  him  best  and  most  appropriate, 
to  connect  his  former  marks.  When  arranged  to 
his    satisfaction,    the    sticks    are     driven     into     the 


134  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

ground,  and  the  labor  of  preparing  it  for  the  recep- 
tion of  the  suhstance  which  is  to  form  the  future 
walk,  commences. 

Carriage  Koads,  or  Drives,  require  to  he  huilt 
sufficiently  strong  and  firm,  to  resist  the  weight 
and  motion  of  carriages  and  horses.  They  should 
have  an  easy  descent  on  both  sides,  being  slightly 
raised  in  the  middle.  The  course  of  a  carriage 
road  should  not  be  led  over  broken  or  steep  ground, 
but  should,  on  the  contrary,  offer  every  facility 
throughout,  for  easy  and  rapid  driving.  As  the 
shape  of  the  ground,  of  course,  governs  in  a  great 
degree  the  line  of  the  road,  and  the  surface  may 
be  broken,  consisting  of  different  levels  —  these 
levels  must  then  be  connected  by  easy  and  flowing 
lines  —  nothing  abrupt  showing  itself.  The  lack 
of  such  unity  and  freedom  spoils  many  expensive 
approaches.  Carriage  roads  must  have  a  solid 
foundation  of  stone,  to  resist  the  wear  and  tear 
of  the   weather. 

From  some  experience  in  the  construction  of 
roads  or  drives,  we  confidently  ofier  the  following 
rule,  as  forming  the  best  road  that  has  come  to  our 
knowledge:  the    ground  must  first  be  graded  to  the 


ROADS    AND   WALKS.  135 

exact  level  of  the  future  Eoad,  that  there  may  be 
a  foundation  upon  which  to  work.  The  surface 
should  then  he  laid  with  stones,  about  six  inches 
square,  and  having  the  lower  surface  flat.  After 
laying  these  stones  tolerably  close  together,  a  layer 
of  coarse  gravel  is  put  over  them,  say  to  the  depth 
of  two  inches,  filling  also  all  the  interstices  left 
between  the  stones.  A  course  of  fine  gravel,  two 
inches  deep,  is  next  put  on,  which  must  be  rolled 
down  with  a  very  heavy  roller,  fair  and  hard  —  a 
heavy  rain,  before  commencing  to  roll  it  down,  is 
quite  an  advantage,  aiding  greatly  in  solidifying 
the  road.  Another  course  of  gravel  should  not  be 
put  on  until  the  entire  road  is  firm  and  solid. 
When  put  on,  it  is  also  to  be  rolled  down,  and 
made  as  firm  as  possible.  A  road  made  in  this 
manner,  gradually,  and  hardened  by  degrees,  will 
outlast  any  other  that  we  have  ever  seen.  Too 
much  gravel  put  on  at  once,  makes  it  a  bad  drive 
for  a  long  time.  Eoads  formed  of  smaller  stones 
(pike  stones),  filled  in  to  the  depth  of  six  inches, 
and  covered  with  gravel  to  the  depth  of  three 
inches  (a  mode  often  pursued),  are  not  near  so 
solid.     Beside    requiring   much   more    labor   and  ma- 


136  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

terial,  they  mucli  sooner  show  the  traces  of  pass- 
ing wheels ;  horses,  too,  are  very  apt  to  work  up 
the  small  stones  to  the  surface,  where  they  lie 
among  the  gravel,  disfiguring  the  road.  The  width 
of  the  road  must,  of  course,  be  regulated  by  its 
importance.  An  approach  road  to  the  house  should 
not  be  less  than  ten  feet  wide,  but  must  be  strictly 
in   keeping   with   the   style   of  the   mansion. 

Garden  walks,  being  only  for  the  use  of  pedes- 
trians, and  not  being  very  much  used,  need  not 
be  built  so  solidly  as  drives.  The  best  way  to 
construct  them,  however,  is  to  pave  the  ground 
(previously  prepared),  with  flat  stones,  as  recom- 
mended in  making  a  drive,  and  then  to  cover  the 
stones  with  a  layer  of  fine  gravel,  which,  being 
well  rolled,  will  become  as  firm  and  even  as  could 
be  desired.  In  place  of  flat  stones,  the  bottoms 
of  the  walks  may  be  filled  with  the  rubbish  which 
generally  remains  about  a  new  building.  And  in 
many  cases,  where  the  ground  is  high,  and  not 
marshy,  the  surface,  after  being  well-graded,  may 
be  simply  covered  with  a  good  layer  of  gravel, 
which,  when  rolled  for  some  time,  will  prove  as 
firm    and    uniform  as    need  be.      On    places  making 


KOAD»  AND   WALKS.  187 

less  pretensions  to  elegance,  walks  are  often  made 
of  tan-bark.  This  substance  is  neither  firm  nor 
lasting,  and  is  only  used  because  less  expensive 
than  nice,  clean  gravel.  Whatever  substance  walks 
may  be  composed  of,  it  is  important  that  they 
should  be  neatly  leveled,  and  that  the  borders 
should  be  kept  clean  and  distinctly  marked.  In 
places  where  the  picturesque  is  the  ruling  feature, 
it  is  not  necessary  that  so  much  neatness  should  be 
observed,  the  most  important  consideration  there, 
being  a  dry,  unincumbered  walk.  In  situations 
where  the  ground  is  steep,  walks  are  often  nicely 
divided  into  little  planes,  connecting  one  with  the 
other  by  a  few  steps  of  stone  or  wood.  This  makes 
the   walks   easier,   or   gives   them   less   pitch. 

When  constructing  a  road  or  walk  of  any  kind, 
it  is  highly  important  that  the  ground  upon  which 
its  foundations  lie,  should  be  hard  and  solid.  If 
it  has  been  lately  dug  up  or  spaded,  or  in  any 
way  disturbed,  it  should  be  left  to  be  settled  by 
the  rains  and  storms  of  a  winter,  or  it  should  be 
pounded  down  solidly.  A  neglect  of  this  precau- 
tion   often    causes    much    trouble    and    unnecessary 

expense. 
12 


138  PEACTICAL    LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

The  improver  must  also  make  calculations  as  to 
drainage  for  his  walks  and  roads.  Where  the  ground 
is  undulating,  and  the  walks  sweep  across  the  coun- 
try, now  high,  now  low,  it  is  easy  to  see  that,  in 
the  lowest  places,  the  water  will  stand,  in  wet 
weather,  at  least.  This  water  must  be  received  in 
a  subterranean  channel,  and  led  off.  Heavy  rains, 
too,  are  apt  to  wash  the  roads,  and  injure  them 
in  that  way.  To  prevent  this  as  much  as  possi- 
ble, the  road  should  be  inclined  toward  that  side 
by  which  the  water  is  most  easily  disposed  of.  Thus 
a  road  running  along  a  hill-side  should  incline  to- 
ward the  lower  side  of  the  hill.  Sometimes  it  will 
be  found  expedient  to  have  little  channels,  at  reg- 
ular distances,  along  the  lower  edge,  by  which  the 
water  may  escape.  This,  or  some  other  plan,  must 
be  adopted,  to  break  and  divide  the  mass  of  water 
collecting  during  rains  or  freshets,  from  a  road, 
and  the  lawn  adjoining,  where  the  land  is  an  in- 
clined plane,  as,  if  allowed  to  gather  into  a  body, 
it  would  wash  away  and  destroy  the  lower  part  of 
the  road,  along  which  it  would  run.  In  places 
where  a  road  runs  along  a  steep  inclination,  the 
water  should  be  led  into  a  stone  gutter,  on  the  lower 


ROADS   AND   WALKS.  139 

edge,  whicli  may  have  openings,  at  regular  dis- 
tances, to  let  the  water  out  again.  Care  and  atten- 
tion is  necessary,  to  keep  any  road  in  good  order, 
and  preserve  it  from  the  ravages  of  water.  After 
every  rain,  roads  should  be  carefully  inspected,  and 
every  defective  spot  mended.  "Without  this,  the  best 
constructed   road   will   soon   fall   into   ruins. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

WATER. 

The  peculiarly  enlivening  effect  of  a  body  of 
water,  in  Garden  scenery,  has  been  spoken  of  in  a 
previous  part  of  this  work.  Owing  to  the  dry  sum- 
mers which  prevail  in  America,  however,  there  are 
comparatively  few  places  where  a  uniform  supply 
of  water  can  be  kept  up  all  the  year  round.  But 
there  are  many,  notwithstanding,  when,  by  the 
exercise  of  a  little  ingenuity,  the  improver  may 
provide  a  Pond,  or  little  Lake,  which  will  obtain 
its  supply  of  water  from  a  never-failing  spring  in 
the  neighborhood,  and  may  thus  be  as  well  filled 
in  summer  as  in  winter.  Ponds  may  also  be 
formed,  by  damming  up  the  course  of  a  creek  or 
branch,  which  will  afibrd  a  steady  supply.     A  stream 

of  water   sometimes  runs  through  the  grounds.     If 

(140) 


WATER.  141 

such  is  the  case,  its  banks  must  be  beautified  by 
plantation,  and  its  course  changed  or  altered,  when 
necessary,  to  make  it  conform  more  strictly  to  the 
general  aspect.  When  it  is  necessary  to  dig  a 
channel  for  a  Brook,  it  should  not  be  dug  deep, 
as  the  water  will  soon  make  it  deeper.  In  lay- 
ing out  or  forming  a  Pond  (as  every  piece  of 
standing  water  in  garden  scenery  is  called  in  this 
country),  the  first  thing  necessary  is  to  ascertain 
the  exact  water  level,  which,  being  marked,  will 
then  become  the  basis  of  all  future  operations. 
The  bed  of  the  pond  is  then  formed.  The  sides 
should  be  sloping  toward  the  middle,  and  not  abrupt 
or  perpendicular,  to  prevent  accidents,  from  people 
or  cattle  falling  in.  The  shores  should  be  com- 
posed of  strong  or  firm  ground,  to  resist,  as  much 
as  possible,  the  pressure  of  the  water.  The  bottom 
should  be  water-tight,  if  possible,  in  order  that  as 
little  as  may  be  of  the  contents  be  lost  by  leakage. 
On  low  ground,  which  is  naturally  moist,  and  does 
not  therefore,  absorb  much  water,  there  is  not  much 
difficulty  about  this.  Where  it  is  otherwise,  it  is 
often  necessary  to  have  the  entire  bottom  laid 
with    cement.      To    prevent    the    sides    of    a    pond 


142  PRACTICAL  LAJSTDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

from  being  waslied  away,  or  destroyed  by  freshets, 
a  channel,  or  overflow,  to  lead  off  the  surplus 
•water,  must  be  constructed.  Care  must  be  taken 
to  have  this  sufficiently  strong  and  capacious  for 
any   emergency. 


CHAPTER    XVII. 

ROCKWOEK. 

Two  different  modes  of  formiug  rockworh,  are 
practiced  by  gardeners.  One,  by  arranging  stones 
or  rocks,  in  such  shapes  and  heaps  as  will  be 
agreeable  to  the  eye,  leaving  room  between  them 
for  the  growth  of  Ferns,  Climbers,  and  other  plants, 
which  naturally  flourish  among  rocks.  The  other, 
by  imitation  of  dropstones  or  stalactite,  by  which 
mode  many  picturesque  objects,  such  as  grottoes, 
arcades,  seats,  etc.,  may  be  readily  formed.  Much 
experience  in  the  matter  is  requisite  for  the  con- 
struction of  a  nice  piece  of  Eockwork,  but  if  taste- 
fully and  appropriately  arranged  it  is  a  great  orna- 
ment to  a  Landscape.  To  construct  a  Eock-scene 
of  the  description  first  named  —  say  for  a  water- 
fall, or  to  place  on  the  shore  of  a  pond  —  the  first 
requisite  is  to  provide  a  foundation  so  secure  that 
there  will  be  no  danger  of  its  being  undermined  by 

('  143  ) 


144  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

water.  Upon  this  the  stones  are  placed  in  the 
manner  and  to  the  hight  required.  All  appear- 
ance of  regularity  must  be  avoided  in  their  arrange- 
ment, and  the  grain  of  the  stone  should,  if  pos- 
sible, be  kept  uniformly  one  way  —  either  perpen- 
dicular or  horizontal.  The  largest  pieces  obtain- 
able only  should  be  used,  and  where  no  large 
stones  can  be  got,  several  smaller  ones  should  be 
united  into  one  by  mortar,  which  will,  at  a  dis- 
tance, give  them  the  appearance  of  one  large  mass. 
In  the  cracks  or  fissures  left  between  the  large 
masses  we  then  plant  Evergreens,  Kalmias,  Rhodo- 
dendrons, Ivy,  Virginia-creepers,  Honeysuckles,  Ferns, 
or  other  plants,  which  will  give  it  the  natural 
appearance  of  wildness,  which  all  rockwork  must 
possess. 

In  planting,  as  in  placing  the  rocks,  care  must 
be  taken  to  make  them  stand  out  in  spirited, 
picturesque  forms.  Where  such  rockwork  is  desired, 
a  single  large  specimen  should  not  be  left  alone, 
but  surrounded,  at  various  distances,  by  rocks  and 
stones,  strewn  round  in  different  shapes  ;  these 
smaller,  detached  masses,  then,  seem  naturally  to 
lead   to   the   main   piece. 


ROCKWOKK.  145 

When  it  is  possible  so  to  place  the  rockwork 
as  to  direct  the  course  of  a  little  brook  across 
it,  letting  its  waters  fall,  surging  and  foaming, 
into  a  basin  or  pond  below,  the  effect  of  the  entire 
scene,  it  need  not  be  said,  will  be  highly  pic- 
turesque and  stirring.  As  solitude  seems  the  most 
appropriate  for  such  a  place,  plantations  of  Ever- 
greens seem,  and  are,  peculiarly  proper  to  surround 
it   with. 

To  form  the  last-mentioned   species  of  rockworh, 

it   is   necessary   to   possess    some   knowledge   of    the 

mason's   and  bricklayer's  business,  as  the  tools  and 

materials   of    those    trades    must    be    used.       It    is 

well    known    that    many    beautiful    shapes    of    the 

Dropstone    or    Stalactite    are    met    with   in   caverns 

and  subterranean  galleries ;   and,  also,  that  they  are 

formed  by  the  continual   dropping   of  water,  which, 

leaving  a  deposit,  gradually  and  slowly  builds  up  a 

pillar,  or  a  grotto,  or  a  series  of  such  and  other  more 

fantastic  shapes.     Great  masses  of  stalactites  are  also 

found  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  in  different  parts 

of    the    s'lobe.       It    is    these   creations    of    accident 

that   we    seek    to    imitate.      The    foundations  of  the 

work   must    bo    stone.       The    stones    are    arranged 
13 


146  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENmG. 

roughly,  yet  solidly  laid  in  mortar,  and  in  such 
shajies,  bold  and  in  high-relief,  as  we  see  in  stalac- 
tite or  dropstone  formations  generally.  After  the 
rough  mass  has  thus  risen  under  the  hand  of  the 
gardener,  he  gives  it  a  farther  degree  of  finish  by 
carefully  hiding  the  points  and  connecting  links  of 
the  stones  composing  the  whole  mass  ;  thus  giving 
it  the  appearance  of  an  entire  body  of  stone,  jut- 
ting out  irregularly  in  various  fantastic  shapes  and 
forms.  This  is  done  with  a  mortar  composed  in 
part   of  Hydraulic   cement. 

Smaller  crevices  are  left,  here  and  there,  in 
which  to  plant  various  Shrubs  and  Creepers,  wdiieh 
will  afterward  aid  in  giving  it  a  finished  or  natural 
appearance.  These  crevices  and  fissures,  however, 
must  be  so  arranged,  with  the  help  of  the  mortar, 
as  to  seem  to  occur  naturally  in  the  body  of  the 
rock,  the  joints  between  individual  stones,  in  such 
places,  being  carefully  hidden.  This  done,  the  mass 
is  ready  for  the  final  operation  of  covering  the, 
as  yet,  bare  stones  with  several  coatings  of  Hydraulic 
cement,  which  will  give  it  the  appearance  of  hav- 
ing been  formed  by  the  operations  of  nature.  The 
cement    should   be    of    good    quality,    and    must    be 


ROCKWORK.  14:7 

■well  mixed  in  water  with  an  equal  quantity  of 
sand.  It  is  applied  with  a  broom  or  brush,  the 
first  coat  being  quite  thin,  the  succeeding  two 
thicker. 

Where  it  is  desired  to  imitate  certain  tints  of 
dropstone,  such  may  be  done  by  mixing  in  a  lit- 
tle lampblack  or  ground  ochre.  The  sprinkling 
with  the  broom  or  brush  will  give  to  it,  when 
hardened,  that  rough,  irregular  appearance  which  is 
peculiar  to  stalactitic  formations.  This  kind  of 
work  is  peculiarly  applicable  to  the  construction 
of  grottoes,  which  are  so  refreshingly  cool  during 
the  heats  of  summer;  they  may  also  be  made  a 
cheap  and  pleasant  substitute  for  the  ugly  square 
spring-house,  which  so  often  disfigures  pleasure- 
grounds  in  this  country.  The  edges  or  shore  of 
a  Pond,  and  the  interior  of  a  Greenhouse,  when 
ornamented  in  this  way,  may  be  made  to  present 
a  peculiarly  picturesque  appearance,  which  can  be 
produced  in  no  other  way.  Eustic  seats  are  also 
very  cheaply  and   easily  constructed  in  this  manner. 

The  making  of  rockworh  has  been  but  very  lit- 
tle practiced  in  this  country,  and  is  often  under- 
taken   by  men    of  but   little    taste,  and  less   experi- 


148  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

ence.  Tliis  -will  account  for  the  many  ridiculous 
and  tasteless  specimens  of  the  work,  to  be  met 
with  in  different  parts  of  the  country,  and  which 
have  caused  many  men  of  true  taste  to  condemn 
the   whole   art. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

A     PLAN, 

Is  made  to  represent,  on  paper,  and  in  little 
compass,  the  form,  shape,  and  extent  of  improve- 
ments suggested  for  a  certain  place.  In  doing 
this,  the  general  outline  of  the  ground  or  place, 
with  every  object  thought  necessary  to  introduce 
upon  the  face  of  the  Plan,  as  buildings,  the  spaces 
occupied  by  trees,  etc.  etc.,  must  be  laid  down 
according  to  a  certain  scale  or  proportion  adopted, 
and  thus  the  whole  Plan  is  made  a  faithful  rep- 
resentation of  a   scries   of  objects. 

It  is  necessary  that  the  maker  of  a  Plan  should 
have  a  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  peculiari- 
ties of  the  grounds  to  which  it  is  to  be  applied. 
He  must  compare  and  combine,  as  far  as  possi- 
ble, the  wishes   of  the   proprietor  with   the   dictates 

of  good   taste,    and   adapt   the   result,    as    much   aa 

(149) 


150  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

practicable,  to  tlie  conformation  of  the  grounds  to 
be  improved.  Thus,  in  marking  out  his  future 
groups,  he  has  not  only  to  consider  their  shapes, 
but  must  also  be  able  to  foresee  what  species  of 
shrubs  and  trees  will  have  the  best  eSect  in  dif- 
ferent  places. 

Again,  in  laying  down  on  paper  the  lines  of 
his  intended  Eoads  and  Walks,  he  must  not  confine 
himself  to  describing  charming  curves  and  sweeps 
upon  the  paper  —  he  must  aim  to  lead  the  walks 
and  roads  by  these  sweeps,  and  through  the  finest 
scenes  upon  the  grounds.  It  is  true,  that  on 
naked  and  level  spots,  the  plan  may  be  made  to 
fit  the  grounds,  or,  vke  versa,  the  grounds  to  fit 
the  plan,  to  a  certain  degree.  But  on  places  hav- 
ing any  natural  advantages,  when  the  ground  is 
broken  or  perhaps  hilly,  the  plans  of  the  improver, 
or  gardener,  must  be  greatly  modified  by  the  pre- 
vailing advantages  or  disadvantages  of  the  place ; 
and  the  drawing  of  an  exact  plan  ceases  to  be 
a   possibility. 

Plans  are  either  ivorTdng  or  profile  Plans.  On 
the  first-named,  various  lines,  to  exhibit  the  inside 
and   outside  views,  are   marked,    showing   the   space 


A   PLAN.  151 

to  be  filled  by  Plantation  —  that  devoted  to  LaAvn, 
etc.  The  dimensions  of  each  division  and  lino 
are  given,  and  trees  and  shrubbery  numbered,  their 
names  and  numbers  being  afterward  marked  on 
the  margin  for  convenient  reference.  As  this  Plan 
is  made  to  direct  the  operations  of  the  gardener, 
it  must  contain  all  information  needed  by  him  in 
the  prosecution  of  his  operations.  The  proprietor, 
is  furnished  Avith  a  p'ofile  'plan,  from  which  he 
should  be  able  to  gather  the  fullest  and  most 
explicit  information  concerning  his  grounds  in  their 
improved  state.  This  last  should  be  finished  in 
a  better  style  than  the  toorking  plan,  a.s  it  will 
serve  as  a  constant  reference  chart,  for  the  pro- 
prietor. 


CHAPTER   XIX. 

LIST   OF  TREES   AND   SHRUBS   USED    IN    LANDSCAPE    GAR- 
DENING. 

"  KOinNA   BI   NESCIS   COGNITIO   RERUM  PEUHT." 

It  lias  been  thought  proi^cr  to  introduce  a  List 
of  Trees  and  Shrubs,  generally  used  in  Landscape 
Gardening,  for  the  ornamentation  of  the  scenery. 
A  great  many  of  the  choicest  forest  trees,  are 
native  trees  of  North  America,  which  justly  can 
boast  of  the  noble  trees  composing  its  Sylva.  The 
trees  are  introduced  according  to  the  natural  order 
of  Families,  as  followed  in  the  excellent  work  on 
"Trees   and    Shrubs   of  Massachusetts." 

The    Shrubbery   is   arranged   as   being    Climbers, 

Peat   or  Bog-earth  Plants,  and   the   Finer  Flowering, 

Ornamental  Shruhs.     The  limits  of  this  volume  will 

not   allow   us   to   give   especial    descriptions    of    the 

various   trees    and   shrubs. 
(  152  ) 


LIST    OF    TREES     AND     SHRUBS.  153 

CoNiFERJi;.     Evergreens. 

PiNUS.  Pine. 

Pinus  Strobus.      White  Pine. 

"  rigida.      Pitch  Pine. 

"  resinosa.    Norway  Pine. 

"  mitis.     Yellow  Pine. 

"  inops.    Jersey  Pine. 

"  pungens.    Mountain  Pine. 

"  tieda.    Loblolly  Pine. 

"  serotina.    Pond  Pine. 

"  Lambertiana. 

"  Austriaca.     Austrian  Pine. 

"  Cembra. 

"  Laricio.     Corsican  Pine. 

"  sylvestris.    Scottish  Pine. 

"  pinea.     Stone  Pine. 

"  pinaster.     Cluster  Pine. 

Abies.  Spruce. 

Abies  Canadensis.     Hemlock  Spruce. 

"  nigra.    Doiible  or  Black  Spruce. 

"  alba.     White  Spruce. 

"  cscelsa.    Norway  Spruce. 

PiCEA.  Pir. 

Picea  balsamifera.    Balsam  Fir. 

"  Fraseri.      Double  Balsam  Fir. 

"  argentea.    European  Silver  Fir. 


154  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Cedrus.     Cedar. 

Cedrus  Libani.     Cedar  of  Lebanon. 
"      Deodora.    Indian  Cedar. 

JuNiPERTJS.     Juniper. 

Juniperus  communis.    Juniper. 
"  Virginiana.    Red  Cedar. 

"  sabina.    Savin. 

Thuja.     Arbor-vitge. 

Thuja  occidentalis.    American  Arbor-vitae. 
"      orientalis.    Chinese  Arbor-vitas. 
"      pendula. 
"      nepalensis. 
"      Tartarica.    Tartarian  Arbor-vitae. 

CuPRESSus.     Cypress.     Cedar. 
Cupressus  thyoides.    White  Cedar. 

Taxus.     Yew. 

Taxua  Canadensis.    American  Yew. 
"      baccata.    English  Yctv. 
"      Hibernica.    Irish  Yew. 

Larix.     Larch. 

Larix  Americana.    Hackmatack. 
"     Europea.    European  Larch. 

Taxodium  Distichum.     x^merican  Cypress, 


LIST    OF    TllEES    AND    SHRUBS.  155 

GiNKO  BiLOBA.     Salisbury  Tree. 

DECIDUOUS    TREES, 
CUPULIPER^. 

QuERCTJS.     Oak. 

Quercus  alba.    White  Oak. 

"        bicolor.    Swamp  White  Oak. 

"        castanea.    Chestnut  Oak. 

"        tinctoria.    Black  Oak. 

"        coccinea.    Scarlet  Oak. 

"        rubra.    Red  Oak. 

"        macrocarpa.    Over-cup  White  Oak. 

«'        virens.    Live  Oak. 

"        palustris.    Pine  Oak. 

"        prinus  monticola.     Rock  Chestnut  Oak. 

"        robur.    English  Royal  Oak. 

"        cerris.    Turkey  Oak. 

"        suber.    Cork  Oak. 

««        Ilex.    Holly  Oak. 

Fagus.     Beech. 

Fagus  sylvatica.    European  Beech. 
«•  «'         var.  Americana.    American  Beech. 

"      atropurpurea.    Blood  Beech. 
"      pendula.    Drooping  Beech. 

Castanea.     Chestnut. 
Castanea  vesca. 


156  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENIlSra. 

CORYLUS.     Hazel. 

Corylus  Americana. 

"        Colurna.    Constantinople  HazeL 


Carpinus.     Hornbeam. 
Carpinus  Americana. 
"        Betulus. 

OsTRYA.     Hop  Hornbeam. 
Ostrya  Virginica. 

JUGLANDACE^. 

JuGLANS.       Walnut. 

Juglans  cinerea.      Butternut. 
"        nigra.      Black  Walnut. 
"        regia.      English  Walnut. 

Carya.       Hickory. 

Carya  alba.      Shellbark  Hickory. 

"       tomentosa.      Mockernut  Hickory. 
"       amara.      Butternut  Hickory. 
"       oliviBformis.      Pecan  Nut. 
"       porcina.      Pignut  Hickory. 

Betulace^. 

Betula.  Birch, 

Betula  lenta.      Black  Birch  —  Sweet  Birch. 

"  excelsa.      Yelloiv  Birch. 

"  populifolia.      White  Birch. 


LIST    OF    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  157 

Betula  nigra.     Red  Birch. 

"       papyracea.       Canoe  Bircli. 

"       alba.      European  Wliite  Birch. 

"  "      pendula.      Drooping  Birch. 

Alnus.       Alder. 

Alnus  serrulata.      Common  Black  Alder, 

"  incana.     Speckled  Alder. 

"  glutinosa.      Common  Alder. 

"  laciniata.      Cut-leaved  Alder. 

Platanace^. 

Platanus.       Plane-tree. 

Platanus   occidentalis.      Buttonwood-tree    (often   called 
Sycamore  tree.) 
"  orientalis.      Oriental  Plane-tree. 

Salicine^. 

PopuLus.       Poplar. 

Populus  grandidentata.      Large  Poplar. 

"  tremuloides.  American  Aspen. 

"  candicans.      Balm  of  Gilead. 

"  Balsamifera.      Balsam  Poplar 

"  argentea.       Cotton-tree. 

"  Canadensis.      Cottonwood. 

"  angulata.      Carolina  Poplar. 

"  nigra.      Black  European  Poplar. 
"  "        dilatata.     Lombardy  Poplar. 


158  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Salix.       Willow. 

Salix  alba.      White  WilloTV. 

"  vitellina.      Golden  Willow. 

"  Babylonica.      Weeping  Willow. 

"  Russelliana.     Bedford  Willow, 

"  caprea.      Flowering  Willow. 

"  decipiens.      Varnished  Willow. 

"  cordata.      Heart-leaved  Willow. 

"  fragilis.     Crack  Willow. 

Artocarpe^. 

MoRus.      Mulberry, 

Morus  alba.      White  Mulberry. 

"       nigra.      Black  European  Mulberry, 
"       rubra.      Red  American  Mulberry. 

Broussonetia.     Paper  Mulberry-tree. 
Broussonetia  papyrifera.  "^ 

Maclura.      Osage  Orange. 
Madura  Aurantiaca. 

Ulmace^. 

TJlmus.  Elm. 

Ulmus  Americana.      White  Elm. 

"  fulva.      Slippery  Elm. 

"  alata.      Wahoe  Elm. 

"  campestris.      European  Elm,  English  Elm. 
"  '*  virens.      Kidbrook  Elm. 

"  "  suberosa.      Cork-barked  Elm. 


LIST    OF    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  159 

Ulmus  montana.      Scottish  Elm. 

"  "  fastigiata.    Spire-topped  Elm. 

"  "  pendula.    Weeping  Elm. 

Celtis.      Nettle-tree. 

Celtis  Occidentalis.      American  Nettle-tree. 
♦'     crassifolia.      Hackberry, 

Planera  Ulmifolia.      Planer-tree. 
Planera  Richardii.      Zelkowa-tree. 

LiQuiDAMBAR.     Sweet  Gum. 
Liquidambar  Styraciflua. 

SANTALACEiE. 

Nyssa.  Pepperidge-tree,  Tupelo.     Sour  Cxum-tree. 
Nyssa  multiiiora. 

"    grandidentulata.     Large  Tupelo. 
"    capitata.    Sour  Tupelo. 

Laurine^. 

Laurus      Sassafras.  (Sassafras  Officinale)  Sassafras- 
tree. 

Benzoin.      Feverbush,  Spicebush. 
Benzoin  odoriferum. 

Oleace^. 

Fraxinus.     Asb. 

Fraxinus  acuminata.      White  Ash. 


160  PKACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

Fraxiuus   pubesceus.      Red  Asli. 

sambucifolia.      Black  Ash. 
viridis.      Green  Ash. 
excelsior.      European  Ash. 
pendula.      Weeping  Ash. 
ornus.      Flowering  Ash. 

Aquifoliace^. 
Ilex.      Holly. 

Hex    Opaca.    American  Holly. 
"    aquifolium.     European  Holly. 

BlGNONIACE^. 

Catalpa.      Catalpa-tree. 

Catalpa  Syringifolia. 

CORNACE^. 

CoRNUS.  Cornel.     Dogwood. 

Cornus  Alternifolia.    Alternate-leaved  Cornel. 

"  sericea.      Silky  Cornel. 

"  Florida.      Flowering  Dogwood. 

"  alba.    Red  Dogwood. 

"  mascula.     Cornelian  Cherry. 

VlBURNE^. 

ViBUKNUM.     Guelder  Rose. 

Viburnuni  lentago.      Sweet  Viburnum, 
dentatum.      Arrow-wood. 


LIST    OF    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  161 

Viburnum  Opulus.      Cranberry-tree. 
"  Lantana. 

"  Lantanoides.      Hobble-bush. 

Sambucus  Canadensis.      Common  Elder. 


Hamamelace^. 

Hamamelis.      Witch  Hazel. 
Hamamelis  Virginica. 

EOSACE^. 

Ceat^gus.  Thorn. 

Cratsegus  Coccinea.    White  Thorn. 

"  crus-galli.     Cockspur  Thorn. 

"  populifolia.      Washington  Thorn. 

"  oxyacantha.     English  Hawthorn. 

Pyrus  Commttnis.      Pear. 

Pyrus  IMalus.     Apple. 

"       Americana.      American  Mountain  Ash. 
"       aucuparia.    European  Mountain  Ash. 
"       Sorbus.      Soi'b  or  Service-tree. 
"       Aria.     White  Beam. 

Prunus.      Plum. 

Prunus  Americana.     Canada  Plum.     Yellow  Plum, 

"         insititia.     BuUace-tree. 

"         Padus. 
14 


162  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

Amelanchiee  Canadensis.     Shop-bush. 
"  Pyracantha. 

Cerasus.  Cherry. 

Cerasus  Pennsylvanica.     Northern  Red  Cherry. 

"  serotina*     Black  Cherry. 

"  sylvestris.     European  Wild  Cherry. 

EBENACEiE. 

DiosPTRos.     Persimmon-tree. 
Dyospyros  Virginiana. 

Leguminos^. 

EOBINIA.       Locust. 

Robinia  Pseudo-acacia.  Common  Locust. 
"  viscosa.  Pink-flovrering  Locust. 
"        inermis. 

G-LEDiTSCHiA.      Honcj  Locust. 

Gleditschia  Triacanthos.     Three-thorned  Acacia. 

"  horrida  or  Sinesis.     Chinese  Gleditschia. 

Gymnocladus.      Kentucky  Coffee-tree. 

Gymnocladus  Canadensis. 

ViRGiLiA  Ltttea.     Yellow-wood,     Virgllia-trec. 

Cercis.      Judas-tree.      Eed-bud. 

Cercis  Canadensis.     Canada  Judas-tree. 
"        siliquastrum.     European  Judas-tree. 


list  of  trees  and  shrubs.  163 

Ehamnace^. 

Rhamnus.      Buckthorn. 

Rhamnus  catharticus.      Common  Buckthorn. 
"         frangula. 

Celastrace^. 

Staphtlea.      Bladder  Nut. 

Stapliylea  trifolia.    Tliree-leaTed  Bladder  Nut. 
"         pinnata. 

^Esculace^. 

-lEscuLus.     Horse  Chestnut. 

jEscuIus   Hippoc  istanum.     Horse  Chestnut. 
"  rubicunda. 

"         glabra.     Ohio  Buckeye. 

Pavia  Eubra.     Red  Pavia. 
Pavia  lutea.     Yellow  Pavia. 

Acerace^. 

Acer.     Maple. 

Acer  rubrum.    Red  Maple. 
"    dasjcarpum.    White  Maple. 
"     saccharinum.     Sugar  Maple.     Rock  Maple. 
"     striatum.    Striped  Maple. 
"    Negundo.     Ash-leaved  Maple. 
"    pseudo-platanus.    Sycamore-tree 
"    platanoides.    Norway  Maple. 
"    campestre.    European  Field  Maple. 
"     macrophyllura. 


164  practical  landscape  gardening. 

Anacardiace^. 

Ehus.     Sumach. 

Rhus  typhina.    Stag's  Horn  Sumach. 
"      glabra.    Smooth  Sumach. 
"      cotinus.    Smoke- tree. 

Xanthoxylace^. 

Xanthoxylum.     Prickly  Ash. 
Xanthoxylum  Americanum. 

AiLANTHus  Glandulosa.     Trcc  of  Heaven. 

TlLIACE^. 

TiLiA.     Lime-tree.     Linden-tree, 
Tilia  Americana.    American  Lime-tree. 
*•     alba.    White  Lime-tree. 
"     pubescens.    Downy  Lime-tree. 
"     Europea.    European  Lime-tree. 

Magnoliace^. 

Ltriodendron.     Tulip-tree. 
Lyriodendron  tulipifera. 

Magnolia.     Magnolia-tree. 

Magnolia  acuminata.    Cucumber-tree. 

"        grandiflora.    Evergreen  Magnolia. 
"        tripetala.     Umbrella  Magnolia. 
"         macrophylla. 


LIST    OF    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  165 

Magnolia  cordata. 
"         purpurea. 

.SCROPHULARIACEiE. 

Paulownia  Imperialis.     Paulownia. 

CLIMBING      SHRUBS 

Glycine    Frutescens. 
Glycine  Chinensis. 

BiGNONiA  (Iecoma)  Crucigera. 

Bignonia  grandiflora.     Trumpet  Flower. 
'•         radicans. 

Hedera  Helix.    Ivy. 
Hedera  quinquefolia. 

Aristolochia  Sipho.    Birthworth.    Dutchman's  Pipe. 

Periploca   GrRJECA.      Silk    Vine. 
Lonicera  (Caprifolium)  Peryclemenum.    Woodbine. 
Lonicera  sempervirens.    Evergreen  Honeysuckle. 

"         flexuosum.    Chinese  Honeysuckle. 

"         flava.    Yellow  Honeysuckle. 

"         Belgica. 

Clematis.  Virgin's  Bower. 

Clematis  viticella. 

"  ccerulea. 

"  crispa 


166  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Clematis   Florida. 
"  flammula. 

"  Seiboldii. 

Amelopsis   Hederacea.     Virginia   Creeper. 

Menispermum   Canadense.     Canada    Moonseed. 

Celastrus   Scandens.      Climbing    Staff-tree. 

FINE-FLOWERING    SHRUBBERY. 
Amorpha  Fruticosa. 
Amorpha  fragrans. 
"  glabra. 

Amyqdalus.     Almond. 

Amygdalus  communis.     Double. 
"  incana. 

AucuBA  Japonica.     Japan  Gold-dust-tree. 

Berberis.     Barberry. 
Berberis  vulgaris. 
"  atropurpurea. 

"  Chinensia. 

Buxus.     Box-tree. 
Buxus  sempervirens. 

Caltcanthus  Ferax.     Sweet-scented  Shrub. 
Calycanthus  Florida. 

Ceanothus  Americana.     Jersey  Tea. 


LIST    OF    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  167 

Cephalanthus  Occidentalis.     Button-bush. 

COLUTEA    ArbOKESCENS. 

Colutea  orien  talis. 
CORCHOKUS        JapONICA. 
CORIARIA    MyRTIFOLIA. 

COTONEASTER    ACUMINATA. 
Cotoneaster  melanocarpa. 

Cydonia.     Quince. 
Cydonia  Sinensis. 

Cytisus  Alpinus. 
Cytisus  Laburnum. 
"        purpureus. 

Deutzia  Canescens. 
Deutzia  scabra. 

DiRCA  Palustris.     Leather-wood. 

El^agnus  Angustifolia.     Bohemian  Olive. 
Elseagnus  argentea. 

EuoNiMUS  Americana.     Indian  Arrow. 
Euonimus  EuropEeus. 
"  Japonicus. 

Genista  Germanica. 
Genista  tinctoria. 

Hyppopii^.  Eitamnoides. 


168  practical  landscape  gardening. 

Hibiscus  Steiacus. 

Hydkaxgea  Arborescexs 
Hydrangea  horteusis. 

LiGusTRiTM  VuLGARE.     Prim.  Privet. 

LoNiCERA  Tartarica.     Tartarian  Honeysuckle. 

Myrica  Gale.     Sweet  Gale. 

Philadelphus  Coroxarius.     Jasmin.     Syringa. 

Pliiladelphus  cordifolius. 
"  grandiflorus. 

Pyrus  Japoxica. 
Pyrus  indica. 
"      torminalia 

"      nivalis 

RiBES  Atropurpureum.     Currant. 
Ribes  aureum. 
"      palmatum. 
"      Gordonianum. 

EuBUS  Fruticosus. 
Rubus  odoratus. 

Sophora  Japoxica. 
Sopbora  pendula. 

SPIR,5LA.    LaxCEOLATA. 
Spiraea  corymbosa. 
"         rotiindifolia. 


LIST    0¥    TREES    AND    SHRUBS.  169 

Spirtea  prunifolia. 
"        ulmifolia. 

Symphoeicarpus  Mexicana.     SnowLcrry. 

Tamakix  Gallica. 
Tamarix  Gerinanica. 

Syrixga  Tulgakis.     Lilac. 
Syringa  Chinensis. 
"        Persica. 

SHRUBS     REQUIRING    TEAT    OR    BOG-EARTH. 
Azalea  Glauca. 

Azalea  nudiflora. 
"        pontica, 

Andromeda  Acuminata. 
Andromeda  polifolia. 

Kalmia,      American   Laurel. 

Kalmia  latifolia. 

"  angustifolia. 

"  rubra. 

"  glauca. 

Ledum.        Labrador   Tea. 
Ledum    latifolium. 
"        suaveoleus. 

Prinos.       "Winterberry. 
Prinos  glaber.     Tackberry. 
"       verticillatus. 
"      Iscvigatus. 

15 


170  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Rhododendrox.     Eose-bay. 

Rhododendron  ponticum. 

"  maximum.     American  Rose-baj 

"  viscosum. 

"  Caucasicum. 

'♦  macrocarpum. 


PART     II. 

ORNAMENTAL  IMPROVEMENTS. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

IMPROVEMENTS 


Improvements  of  ground  are  of  various  kinds, 
according  to  tlie  use  intended  to  be  made  of  the 
place  to  be  improved.  Thus  the  farmer  "  im- 
proves" his  place  by  cutting  down  the  groAvth  of 
centuries,  to  make  room  for  his  fields  of  Avheat 
and  corn,  and,  to  his  eyes,  a  flourishing  field  of 
grain    is    an    object   for    especial  admiration. 

The  market-gardener  delio-hts  in  seeing  high 
piles  of  manure  —  and  a  prosperous  cabbage-patch 
is,  to  him,  a  fit  subject  upon  which  to  expatiate. 
The  cattle  grazer  dwells  with  pleasure  upon  im- 
mense tracts  of  pasture ;  and  the  city-bred  land 
speculator   views   a   tract   of  land   only  in  reference 

to   its   eligibility  for  "  building-sites." 

( in ) 


172  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GAEDENING. 

The  Landscape  Gardener's  view,  however,  par- 
takes partly  of  all  these,  and  his  aim,  in  "improv- 
ing," is  to  unite,  as  far  as  possible,  three  great 
requisites :  heauty,  comfort,  and  jprofit 

In  his  contemplated  improvement,  the  propri- 
etor has,  of  course,  the  choice  between  the  different 
styles  of  laying  out  grounds ;  the  ancient  Geomet- 
rical style,  and  the  more  modern,  called  "Land- 
scape Gardening."  He  may  adopt  either,  but  should 
never  allow  himself  to  make  up  a  mixture  of  both 
styles,  as  he  can  do  naught  thereby  but  create  con- 
fusion. 

As  before  said,  an  improvement  should  be  the 
result  only  of  mature  consideration,  and  its  details, 
previous  to  execution,  should  be  carefully  examined 
in  all  their  bearings  upon,  and  relations  to,  the 
peculiarities  of  the  grounds  to  be  improved  to  the 
wishes  of  the  proprietor;  and  last,  but  not  least, 
to   the   amount  of  money  he   wishes   to   expend. 

The  professional  Landscape  Gardener,  when  con- 
sulted upon  a  contemplated  improvement,  must  lay 
aside  all  individual  prejudices  in  favor  of  this  or 
that  peculiarity.  His  business  is  to  advance,  as 
far   as   may  be,  the   principles   of  true  taste  in  his 


IMPROVEMENTS.  173 

art,  and  to  apply  these,  as  well  as  lie  can,  to  the 
wislies  of  the  proprietor.  He  should  not  obsti- 
nately insist  upon  a  particular  Plan,  but  must 
remember  that  his  plan  must  be  made  to  fit  to 
the    ground  —  and    not    the    ground    to    the    plan. 

The  employer,  on  the  other  hand,  should  not  be 
too  ready  to  take  advice  of  other  persons.  Differ- 
ent persons  take  different  views  of  the  same  mat- 
ter, each  looking  from  his  own  narrow  point  of 
view.  Almost  any  one  can  suggest  an  alteration, 
but  only  he  who  has  studied  the  art,  is  able  to 
lay  out  an  improvement.  Neither  is  it  right  that 
the  employer  should  be  too  obstinately  set  upon 
the  carrying  out  of  his  own  wishes.  It  is  plain 
that  he  who  has  made  a  subject  the  study  of  his 
lifetime,  must  know  more  about  it  than  he  who 
has  scarcely  given  it  a  thought.  Obstinacy  in 
adhering  to  peculiar  notions,  is  one  of  the  great- 
est difficulties  in  the  way  of  the  "  professional  gar- 
dener." 

Property  may  often  be  highly  improved,  and  its 
cash  value  largely  increased,  at  comparatively  small 
expense,  provided  the  improvements  be  carried  into 
effect    under    the    direction    of    a    man     of    taste; 


174  PKACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENESiG. 

otherwise,  it  is  liiglily  probaUe-  tliat  tlie  most  costly 
and  elaborate  operations  will  but  excite  disgust, 
after  the  first  charm  of  novelty  has  worn  off. 
There  is,  however,  in  this  country,  a  tendency  to 
lavish  large  sums  of  money  on  splendid  mansions, 
while  the  grounds  surrounding  such  are  left  in  a 
wretched  state  of  neglect.  A  man  erects  a  dwell- 
ing at  an  expense  of  several  thousand  dollars,  but 
thinks  it  an  outrageous  imposition  if  asked  to  lay 
out  some  hundreds  in  improving  and  ornamenting 
the  surrounding  grounds,  setting  out  shade  trees, 
etc.  It  is  evident  that  this  is  wrong  policy,  and 
that  both  improvements  should  be  carried  on  at 
the  same  time,  and  to  the  same  extent,  in  order 
to  maintain  a  harmony,  without  which  there  is  no 
beauty. 

But  let  the  improvements  be  as  costly,  and  as 
tastefully  made,  as  may  be,  they  will  be  of  little 
use  without  proper  keeping.  It  is  a  matter  of 
much  difficulty  to  make  domestics  and  children 
keep  everything  in  such  perfect  order  and  regu- 
larity as  is  necessary ;  and  Avithout  perfect  clean- 
liness and  order,  the  choicest  patterns  will  soon 
lose  their  impressive  beauty,  become  indistinct,  their 


s* 


,  IMPROVEMENTS.  175 

forms  no  longer  strike  the  eye  as  "beautiful,  and 
soon  all  is  confusion.  It  is  necessary  that  the 
proprietor  should  keep  a  watchful  eye  over  his 
household  and  dependents.  Every  breach  against 
perfect  order  and  cleanliness  of  keeping,  should  be 
strictly  prevented.  He  should  provide  a  place  for 
everything,  and  should  then  see  that  everything  is 
in  its  place,  and  nowhere  else.  The  outhouses 
should  be  as  conveniently  situated  as  possible,  and 
a  regular  and  convenient  drainage  must  be  pro- 
vided. It  will  be  found  universally  true,  that  the 
less  trouble  it  is  to  be  clean  about  a  place,  the  cleaner 
it  will  be  kept.  Let  those  interested  bear  this  in 
mind. 

In  regard  to  outbuildings,  it  may  be  well  to 
observe  here,  that  when  the  style  of  architecture 
of  the  main  buildings  is  peculiar,  it  has  a  fine 
effect  to  imitate  it,  to  a  certain  extent,  in  the 
smaller  outbuildings  —  keeping  up  thus  a  harmony 
or  connection  between  the  mansion  and  its  depen- 
dencies, which  never  fails  to  catch  the  attention, 
and  please  ^  the  mind  as  a  suitable  harmony  of 
parts. 


CHAPTER   XXI. 

CITY    LOTS. 

If  it  were  true,  as  many  assert  aud  believe, 
that  a  city  building  must,  to  be  beautifully  situ- 
ated, be  surrounded  by  a  regular  parterre  or  ter- 
race, tbe  Landscape  Gardener  would  find  no  work 
in  the  cities,  and  bis  art  would  be  confined  to  the 
country.  But  the  same  taste,  wliich  demands  a 
stiff  terrace,  as  tbe  only  tbing  in  perfect  barmony 
witb  tbe  straight  and  angular  bouse  walls  of  tbe 
city,  should,  to  be  consistent,  likewise  clip  and  shear 
of  their  fair  proportions,  the  shade  trees  planted 
on  the  streets,  as  they  surely  fail  to  harmonize 
with  the  appearance  of  the  house.  But  no  one 
thinks  of  asking  that.  The  fact  is,  that  parterres 
and  terraces  are  often  introduced  by  a  false  taste, 
or  a  lack  of  taste,  in  individuals,  rather  than  from 
a  necessity  existing   therefor.      The   eye  which   has 

(176) 


CITY   LOTS.  177 

grown  tired  of  a  monotonous  succession  of  liouses, 
smoke  and  dust,  will  rest  with  delight  upon  a 
group,  however  small,  tastefully,  and  ahove  all,  natu- 
rally disposed,  among  green  turf.  We  are  here 
pleased  not  so  much  by  the  actual  beauty  of  tho 
group,  as  by  the  pleasing  contrast,  or  change  from 
the  monotonous  succession  of  buildings,  to  a  scene, 
seemingly  cut  out  of  a  smiling  Landscape.  Who 
has  not  felt  his  breast  filling  with  pleasurable  sen- 
sations, as,  after  rambling  for  hours  through  the 
crowded  streets  of  a  city,  he  suddenly  looks  up 
and  sees  rising  before  him  a  lofty  tree,  spreading 
its  huge  branches  over  the  surrounding  dwellings? 
who  has  not,  on  a  hot  summer's  day,  stood  beneath 
the  shade  of  such  a  tree,  and  bared  his  brow  to 
the  breezes  whose  abodes  seem  ever  to  be  among 
its  branches  —  and  who,  on  just  such  a  day,  has 
not  hurried  in  disgust  past  the  bare  and  sun- 
scorched  terrace  or  parterre,  enviously  raised  above 
the   level    of  the   common   sidewalk? 

Let  us  have  as  many  Garden-spots  in  our  cities 
as  possible,  for  it  is  there  they  are  most  needed. 
Many  of  the  little  spaces  for  garden-spots  are, 
to   be    sure,    so    small    and    confined    that   it   would 


178  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

be  a  vaiu  attempt  to  give  to  them  any  natural 
appearance.  But  in  many  others  there  is  a  chance 
where  the  gardener  may  produce  just  such  a  little 
natural  scene,  as  would  make  an  appropriate  con- 
trast to  the  masses  of  hrick  and  mortar.  Yet  in 
nine  cases  out  of  ten,  the  ground  is  strictly  leveled 
and  terraced  up,  the  plants  stuck  do^Yn  in  straight 
rows  or  circles,  and  we  are  called  npon  to  admire 
the  "improvement."  It  is  in  accordance,  too,  with 
this  wretched  taste,  that  the  trees  having  the  stiff- 
est,  most  ungainly  shapes,  are  most  admired  in 
cities.  The  finest  specimens  of  the  Pine  or  Fir, 
are  pronounced  shapeless,  while  the  Eed  Cedar,  the 
Arhor-vitffi,  and  the  Juniper,  when  well  trimmed, 
and  looking  like  brushwood  pyramids,  are  pro- 
nounced beautiful.  Thus  many  little  gardeu-spots 
in  the  city,  and  also  in  the  country,  show  naught 
but  straight  rows  and  avenues  of  such  trees,  cov- 
ering and  concealing  the  most  favorable  aspects  of 
the  house.  Where  such  exist,  the  best  thing  to 
do  with  the  trees,  is  to  place  them  in  little  groups 
at  the  corners  of  the  house,  where  they  will  add 
somewhat  to  its  appearance  and  importance.  If 
the  house    is    such  that    it    is    not  desirable  that  its 


CITY   LOTS.  179 

front  should  be  seen,  it  is  better  to  conceal  all 
defects    by  Climbers    and    running   Eoses. 

To  form  a  Natural  scene  before  a  bouse  in  the 
city,  a  due  proportion  must  be  kept  up  between 
tbe  amount  and  liigbt  of  the  plantation,  and  tbe 
size  of  tbe  ground.  If  unnaturally  crowded,  they 
will  not  be  fully  supported  by  the  ground,  and  if 
too  sparse,  the  place  will  look  bald  and  bare. 
Walks  should  be  very  highly  finished,  and  should 
strike  the  eye  by  their  neatness,  and  the  correct- 
ness of  their  shape.  None  but  the  choicest  and 
most  beautiful  Flowers  and  Shrubs  should  be  admit- 
ted in  such  small  Gardens  as  we  find  in  cities,  in 
order  that  they  may  make  up  in  quality,  Avhat  they 
must  lack  in  quantity.  Such  flowers  as  the  Mag- 
nolia Grandiflora,  Eemontant  and  Bourbon  Eoses, 
and  amoug  Fine-flowering  Shrubs,  Spiraeas,  Pyrus 
Japonicas,  Lilacs,  and  Honeysuckles,  are  suitable  to 
embellish  city  garden-spots.  (For  further  descrip- 
tions of  Flowers  and  Shrubs,  see  under  head  of 
Flower-Gaeden".) 

Fig.  1,  represents  a  City-lot,  of  ordinary  size. 
The  house  and  back-building  are  easily  distin- 
guished,   being    of    darker     tint.         The     house     is 


180 


PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 


^ig-  1-  supposed   to  stand   elevated   from 

tlie  street.  The  entrance  pave- 
ment, A,  is  divided  into  two  equal 
platforms  by  a  flight  of  steps. 
A  pavement  leads  around  the 
house,  and  terminates  at  the 
stable,  in  the  rear  of  the  lot. 
The  two  squares,  in  the  hack 
lot,  are  intended  to  he  grass- 
plots.       A    few    lofty   trees    may 

be  planted  in  them,  to  aff'ord   shade  and   shelter  to 

the   building. 

To  improve  the  empty  square  in  front  of  the 
building,  two  plans  may  be  adopted.  The  one  would 
be,  to  raise  a  terrace  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
entrance  steps  rise ;  thus  dividing  the  ground  into 
two  platforms.  On  the  upper  platform  a  few 
straight-growing  Evergreen  sentinels  might  be  plant- 
ed, to  hide  the  greater  part  of  the  houso  entirely 
from  sight,  when  full  grown  ;  on  the  lower  plat- 
form some  pretty  Bushes  or  Flowers  may  be  set  out, 
also,  but  by  all  means  in  a  straight  row.  Adopt- 
ing this  plan,  the  proprietor  follows  the  ordinary 
fashion,    prevailing    in    so    many    of    our    city    Gar- 


CITY   LOTS.  181 

dens.  The  improvement  will  thus  be  justified, 
not  by  its  tastefulness,  but  only  as  being  a  fac- 
simile  to   the   neighbors'   lots. 

The  other,  and,  perhaps,  more  advisable  plan 
would  be,  to  grade  the  ground  to  a  concave  shape, 
gradually  rising  from  the  base  of  the  fence  to  the 
level  of  the  upper  pavement ;  thus  the  square  Av^ould 
appear  to  be  a  bit  of  naturally  undulating  ground, 
more  liable  to  ]5lease  the  eye  of  taste.  The  ground- 
plan.  Fig.  1,  shows  the  shrubbery  and  flowers  con- 
veniently lodged  in  appropriate  situations.  A  Foun- 
tain near  the  upper  pavement,  would  be  of  good 
effect.  Around  the  pond  some  of  the  choicest 
Flowers  may  find  their  places.  A  clump  of  Ever- 
greens may,  also,  be  placed  before  the  corner  of 
the  house,  to  conceal  the  back  road  from  view ;  a 
group  of  Shrubbery  and  Flowers  could  be  planted 
around  the  two  sides  of  the  lot.  The  highest 
plants  should  be  set  near  the  fence  —  gradually 
diminishing  in  size.  The  margin  of  the  group 
should  be  enlivened  with  the  brightest  flowers,  droop- 
ing  down   on   the   velvet   grass. 

Arranged  in  such  a  manner,  a  city  Garden,  how- 
ever  small    and    cooped   up,    will    form   a   pleasing 


182 


PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 


foreground  to  the  building,  whose  front  can  be 
seen  from  the  street,  to  the  best  advantage.  By 
the  belt  of  Shrubbery  surrounding  its  open  sides, 
it  receives  some  degree  of  privacy,  and  the  shrubs 
and  flowers  composing  the  group,  are  seen  to  best 
advantage  from  the  front  windows ;  care  should, 
however,  be  taken  to  allow  sufficient  room  for  a 
verdant  Grass-plot,  always  to  be  kept  in  the  most 
polished   style   possible. 


Fig.  2. 


In  Fig.  2,  the 
ground-plan  of  a 
double  house  and 
double  lot  is  easily 
recognized.  The 
breadth  of  the 
main  entrance  walk,  from  the  gate  to  the  front-door, 
should  have  due  proportion  to  the  size  and  im- 
portance of  the  house  ;  if  the  front  side  of  the 
building  is  elegant,  the  main  Walk  should  be  broad 
and  conspicuous  also  ;  if  the  building  is  a  hum- 
ble  cottage,  the   main   walk   may   be   narrower. 

From  the  main  walk  a  Side-walk  turns  off  to 
the  side  entrance  of  each  house.  A  back  lot  is 
left   to  every   house,    in   the   rear    of  the    lot.       A 


CITY   LOTS.  183 

border  of  turf  is  between  the  house  and  the  side- 
walks. The  space  for  outward  improvement  being 
very  limited,  only  a  bed  for  smaller  flowers  on 
each  side  of  the  walk  can  be  made.  A  belt  of 
shrubbery  may  surround  the  limits  of  the  lot,  the 
taller  shrubs  being  placed  at  the  sides,  to  con- 
ceal the  back  lot  of  each  house.  The  part  front- 
ing the  street  should  be  composed  of  smaller,  fine- 
flowering  Shrubs,  and  showy  Flowers,  which  can  thus 
conveniently  be  seen  from  the  windows  of  the  house. 
However  narrow  and  small  such  a  belt  may  be,  it  may 
be  so  arranged  as  to  appear  like  a  natural  group, 
and  not  as  a  wreath,  by  boldly  breaking  its  outlines. 


In  Fig.  3,  a  larger  space  of 
ground  is  offered  for  improvement. 
The  dwelling  is  situated  in  the 
middle  of  the  lot ;  in  front,  a  lawn 
has  been  laid  oft';  the  rear  of  the 
lot  is  employed  partly  for  a  Kitch- 
engarden,  and  partly  for  the  stable 
and  back-buildings.  Both  kitchen- 
garden  and  stable  are  concealed 
from  view,  by  groups  of  shrubbery, 
planted   before   them. 


Fig.  3. 


184  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

The  drive,  on  tlie  right-hand  side,  is  the  ingress 
carriage  way,  while  the  left-hand  side-drive  gives 
free  access  from  the  gate  to  the  stahle.  The  junc- 
tion of  both  drives,  at  the  corner  of  the  building, 
will  afford  room  enough  for  turning  the  carriages, 
without  a  circle  before  the  house  —  often  made  for 
that  purpose.  The  groups  situated  on  the  front 
lawn  should  be  made  up  with  the  choicest  of  Shrub- 
bery and  Flowers ;  the  highest  plants  being  placed 
in  the  middle  of  the  group,  gradually  coming  down 
till  the  smaller  flowers  close  its  margin.  A  belt 
of  higher  Shrubbery  is  planted  around  the  limits  of 
the  lot,  to  give  privacy  to  its  interior.  Some  fine 
specimens  of  trees  or  shrubs  may  occasionally  be 
placed  before  the  groups,  near  to  the  walk,  where 
they   may   be   seen   to   the   best   advantage. 

A  group  of  Evergreens,  at  the  corner  of  the 
building,  as  shown  in  figure  3,  will  appear  to  good 
advantage.  In  the  border  surrounding  the  other 
side  of  the  house,  Climbing  plants  may  be  planted, 
to  be  trained  on  the  wall,  and  to  shade  the  porch, 
on  the  back  part  of  the  building.  A  numerous 
collection  of  plants  can  be  cultivated  in  a  small 
garden,    as   shown   in   this   figure. 


CITY   LOTS. 


185 


Fig.  4. 


The  design  represented 
in  this  figure,  might  con- 
veniently he  executed  on 
a  square  hlock  in  a  city, 
to  suit  the  wishes  of  an 
amateur  of  Flowers.  The 
dwelling,  a,  is  situated  in 
one  corner  of  the  square ; 
a  conservatory,  B,  is    huilt    adjoining   the    house. 

The  ground  is  laid  out  in  the  ordinary  flower- 
garden  style,  having  various  regular  Flower-heds, 
in  which  a  rich  collection  of  flowers  is  to  he  cul- 
tivated. Being  situated  between  four  public  streets, 
it  will  he  necessary  to  surround  the  Garden  with 
a  dense  helt  of  shruhhory  and  trees.  This  belt 
may  be  composed  of  various  families  of  trees  and 
shrubs,  arranged  in  such  a  manner  as  to  produce 
a  pleasing  variety  of  masses  of  foliage,  differing 
in   higlit,    shape    and    tints. 

A  Walk  aftbrds  a  free  circulation  through  the 
ground,  striking,  in  its  course  through  the  lawn, 
a  shady  Bower,  surrounded  by  the  shrubbery  of  the 
belt;  it    terminates    at  a  back    gate  of  the    Garden. 

The   various    kinds    of   flowers    are   arranged    on  the 

IG 


186  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

beds  according  to  their  families  or  colors,  eacli  sec- 
tion of  tlie  Led  consisting  of  but  one  family  or 
color. 

Pine  specimens  of  Evergreens  and  deciduous  Shrubs 
are  growing  on  the  lawn,  where  they  may  be  seen 
to  most  advantage,  and  have  sufficient  room  to 
attain  their  full  size  and  beauty.  The  Gardenesque 
Style,  mentioned  on  a  former  page,  will  find  its 
suitableness  to   such   gardens. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE     PLEASURE-GROUND, 

Is  the  uaniG  given  to  that  part  of  the  grounds 
more  immediately  surrounding  the  mansion  or  dwell- 
ing. Coming  more  directly  and  constantly  under 
the  eye  of  the  inhabitants  and  visitors,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  this  part  should  receive  an  especial  degree 
of  culture  and  ornamentation,  and  that  more  than 
common  attention  should  be  paid  to  its  after  keeping. 

On  places  of  small  extent,  the  most  appropri- 
ate place  for  the  Plcasure-Ground,  and  that  where 
it  is  usually  found,  is  in  front  of  the  house,  gen- 
erally, on  such  places  as  are  most  open  to  public 
view.  In  such  cases,  the  back  parts  are  devoted 
to  the  Fruit  and  Vegetable-gardens.  On  places  of 
greater  extent,  and  where  the  grounds  adjoining 
the   mansion    are    immediately   connected   with   park 

or   forest    scenery,  it  is  necessary  to   have    a  barrier 

(  187  ) 


188  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

of  some  kind  to  keep  cattle  out  of  the  Pleasure- 
Ground.  A  sunk  fence,  or  one  of  wire,  not  too 
heavily  constructed,  and  painted  green,  will  be  most 
suitable  for  this  purpose,  as  being  least  obtrusive 
to  the  eye,  and  therefore  presenting  less  obstruc- 
tion   to   an    extended  and    unbroken  view. 

On  the  Pleasure-Ground,  the  gardener  lavishes 
his  choicest  treasures  of  trees,  flowers  and  shrub- 
bery, making  use  of  the  most  pleasing  and  tasteful 
forms  in  their  arrangement.  To  the  ornaments 
afforded  him  by  nature,  he  may  here  also  add, 
without  impropriety.  Statues,  Fountains,  Vases,  and 
other  works  of  art,  suitable  to  place  among  gar- 
den scenery.  A  graceful  and  correct,  and  above 
all,  harmonious  disposition  of  the  different  parts, 
in  their  bearings  to  each  other,  and  to  the  dwell- 
ing  they  surround  and  ornament,  is  then  only 
necessary    to   create  a  pleasing  and   perfect   picture. 

In  laying  out  the  Pleasure-Grounds,  the  gardener 
or  proprietor  may  use  as  he  wishes,  the  plain  and 
natural  Landscape  style,  or  the  more  intricate,  but 
often  no  less  pleasing  Geometrical  stjde.  But, 
whatever  mode  is  adopted,  it  should  be  in  keep- 
ing   with    the    building    whose    surrounding    it    is 


THE   PLEASURE-GROUND.  189 

intended  to  embellish,  and  above  all,  tlio  entire 
work  should  he  consistent.  One  style  should  he 
chosen,  and  adhered  to  throughout.  Nothing  looks 
so  poor  and  tasteless,  as  a  mixture  of  the  styles. 
Thus,  it  is  ridiculous  to  see  parterres,  and  labo- 
riously constructed  geometrical  flower-beds,  placed  in 
the  midst  of  a  Lawn,  or  to  see  walks,  in  one 
place  straight  and  stiflP,  in  another,  easy  and  flow- 
ing; or  Plantation,  here  disposed  in  regular  shapes, 
shaven  and  trimmed,  in  another  place  growing  in 
irregular,  naturally-shaped  groups  or  masses.  Such 
a  confounding  of  styles  is  a  grave  error,  but  too 
often   met   with   in   this   country. 

In  calculating  the  expenses  connected  with  a 
Pleasure-Ground,  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that 
keeping  is  as  important  a  matter,  as  laying  out. 
The  more  tasteful  and  elaborate  th§  design,  the 
greater  will  also  be  the  trouble  and  expense  of 
keeping,  and  as  cleanliness  and  order  are  the  two 
chief  requisites  to  beauty  in  gardening,  it  is  well 
to  think  of  this,  in  this  country,  where  compara- 
tively few  working  gardeners  are  kept.  If  the 
improver  has  not  leisure  or  means  to  spare  to 
have    an    elaborately-laid-out   Pleasure-Ground   kept 


190  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

in  perfect  order  and  neatness,  lie  will  do  much 
better  to  choose  a  style  of  embellisliment  which, 
though  perhaps  more  simple,  and  to  his  taste  less 
beautiful,  he  will  eventually  find  much  more  pleasing, 
because  easier  to  keep  in  order.  In  this  country, 
where  labor  is  very  dear,  every  design,  however 
beautiful  or  tasteful,  must  recommend  itself  chiefly 
by  the  comparative  ease  •  with  which  it  may  be 
kept ;  else,  if  carried  out,  as  soon  as  it  loses  the 
charm  of  novelty,  it  will  become  a  tiresome,  costly 
burden,  which  will  eventually  only  excite  the  dis- 
gust of  the  proprietor.  Many  a  pleasure-ground, 
laid  out  in  a  costly  and  fanciful  manner,  we  have 
seen  changed  into  a  simple  lawn,  whose  smooth 
and  pleasant  turf  gave  much  more  pleasure  than 
had  the  intricate  and  laboriously-arranged  flower- 
beds and  parterres.  The  improver  should  there- 
fore aim  to  produce  in  his  Pleasure-Ground,  such 
features  of  Natural  scenery  as,  while  sufficiently 
showing  the  hand  of  art,  will  yet  require  but  lit- 
tle care  or  attention.  Such  are  groups  and  masses 
of  lofty  trees,  which  will,  with  comparatively  little 
expense,  grow  up,  and  improve  from  year  to  year 
in  beauty  and  shade.      There   is,  to  our  taste,  much 


THE   PLEASURE-GROUND.  191 

greater  teauty  in  a  verdant  Lawn,  enriched  by 
masses  and  groups  of  flowers,  and  diversified  by 
noble  trees  and  shrubs,  in  whose  shade  rustic  seats 
and  benches  may  invite  to  rest  and  repose,  than 
in  all  the  fanciful  gimcracks,  and  loretty  things, 
that  some  gardeners  have  in  common  with  the 
confectioner,  and  which  are  assuredly  more  in  place 
when  decorating  a  cake,  than  when  embellishing  a 
pleasure-ground. 

The  Pleasure-Ground  should  possess,  if  possible, 
charms  for  all  seasons  of  the  year.  The  flowers, 
shrubs  and  trees  which  bloom  and  bud  earliest  in 
Spring,  should  be  placed  nearest  the  house,  in  order 
to  extend  to  its  inhabitants  as  early  as  possible, 
the  cheering  influences  of  Spring.  The  finest 
masses  of  flowers  and  shrubbery  should  always  be 
placed  where  they  may  show  to  best  advantage 
from  the  windows.  To  enliven  the  scenery  in  win- 
ter. Evergreens  should  be  provided ;  these  also  add 
much  to  the  beauty  and  comfort  of  the  place  in 
summer.  They  should  not,  however,  surround  the 
house  at  regular  distances,  like  sentinels.  Grouped 
in  natural  forms,  at  the  sides  of  the  house,  they 
will   create   a   fine    effect ;    and   when   the   dwelling 


h9 
OQ 

d 

H 
Q 

O 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND.  193 

Wliere  this  is  clone,  sufficient  room  must  be  allowed 
for  outside  views,  wliile  unsightly  objects  are,  as 
much  as  possible,  concealed;  thus,  the  mud  of 
the  street  may  be  hid  from  sight  by  plantations 
of  Eoses,  Jasmines,  etc.,  as  these  would  not  con- 
ceal  from  us  the   movements   of  passing   objects. 

The  Kitchen-garden  and  Orchard  should  be  sur- 
rounded by  Plantation;  and  all  buildings  belonging 
to  these  departments,  as  the  fruit  and  dry  houses, 
in  the  orchard,  and  the  hotbeds,  pits  and  green- 
houses, in  the  Kitchen-garden,  should  be  placed 
near  them.  The  Kitchen-garden  should  be,  if  pos- 
sible, near  the  stables,  for  convenience  in  obtaining 
manure.  Greenhouses,  where  built  in  a  tasteful 
style  of  architecture,  and  thus  assuming  the  char- 
acter of  conservatories,  may  properly  make  part  of 
the  embellishments  of  the  Pleasure-Ground.  But 
where  they  consist  simply  of  square  walls,  with  an 
ugly,  slanting  glass  roof,  they  can  not  be  admit- 
ted to  form  part  of  elegant  scenery.  Proprietors, 
sometimes,  spend  considerable  sums  of  money  in  the 
erection  and  furnishing  of  a  greenhouse,  and  of  course 
have  a  great  desire  to  give  it  a  conspicuous  posi- 
tion on  their  grounds,  not  for  any  beauty  they 
17 


194  PKACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

miglit  fancy  such  an  object  to  possess,  but  simply 
to  make  evident  to  the  passing  world,  that  they 
are  rich  enough  to  afford  a  luxury  of  that  kind. 
We  need  not  say,  that  this  is  not  an  evidence  of 
taste.  Many  gardeners,  too,  of  more  experience  in 
growing  plants  and  cultivating  vegetables,  than  taste 
in  laying  out  grounds,  naturally  give  an  undue 
importance  to  the  "greenhouse,"  which  has  been 
the  scene  of  their  most  extensive  operations.  And 
so  the  ignorance  of  the  gardener  combines  with 
the  vanity  of  the  proprietor,  in  destroying  the  har- 
mony and  beauty  which  should  be  the  main  points 
in    a   Pleasure-Ground. 

Where  the  distance  from  the  dwelling  to  the 
highway  or  street  is  insufficient  to  admit  of  a  wind- 
ing approach,  a  straight  road  from  the  gate  to  the 
front  door,  with,  if  needed,  a  circle,  for  a  turn  for 
carriages,  is  the  simplest  way.  To  construct  this, 
no  gardener  is  needed,  as  any  common  day-laborer 
can   do   it   as   well,    and   cheaper. 

Where  a  gardener  is  employed  to  do  a  plain 
job  of  this  kind,  if  a  man  of  little  taste,  as  but 
too  often  happens,  he  invariably  thinks  it  neces- 
sary   to    introduce    some    little  fanciful    additions   of 


THE    PLEASUKE-G  ROUND. 


195 


his  own,  by  the  aid  of  which  he  generally  suc- 
ceeds, if  permitted,  in  spoiling  the  ^yhole  work. 
Where  simplicity  is  attempted,  it  should  be  duly  car- 
ried out ;  where  intricacy  is  desired,  it  can  be  had ; 
but  a  grafting  of  one  upon  the  other  will  never 
succeed. 

In  Figure  5,  the 
house  is  situated  be- 
tween groups  of  flowers 
and  shrubbery.  The 
foot  entrance  of  the 
Garden  is  from  one 
street  directly  fronting 
the  ground.  The  car- 
riage-way is  from  the 
lower  street ;  it  passes 
on  from  the  gate  to 
the  front  of  the  house, 
and  from  there  to  the 
stables,  situated  on  the 

A,  House  ;   B,  Fountain  ;   C,  Stable-yard  ; 
back   part    Ot    the    pre-   ^  Kitchen-garden ;  E,  Carriage-entrance ;  F, 
T)  1  •     1         xi        Foot-entrance;    G,  Orchard. 

mises.       isehmd      the 

house,  the   outhouses    are    situated,   in    a   group  of 

Shrubbery. 


196  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

A  group  of  shade-trees  is  planted  at  the  back 
corner  of  the  house.  A  belt  of  trees  and  shruhs 
conceals   the   boundary   fence   of  the   front   place. 

The  Vegetable-garden  is  placed  back  of  the 
house,  joining  the  stable-yard,  and  surrounded  by 
a  belt  of  Shrubbery.  The  walk  leading  to  the 
Kitchen-garden,  passes  through  a  group  of  lofty 
trees,    which   afford   shade   to   the   house. 

Two  groups  of  Flowers  are  in  front  of  the 
house;  also  a  group  of  flowers  on  each  side  of 
the   house. 

Passing  the  house,  the  approach  road  enters  a 
group  of  Evergreens,  on  its  way  to  the  stable- 
yard  ;  fruit-trees   are   planted   in   the   lawn. 

The  margin  of  the  belt  surrounding  the  front 
Garden,  should  be  composed  of  flowering  Shrub- 
bery and  Flowers,  united  in  bold,  conspicuous  masses ; 
before  some  of  the  most  prominent  parts  of  the 
groups  single,  choice  specimen-plants  may  be  set 
between   the   grass,    as   shown   in   figure    5. 

A  Plan,  as  shown  in  figure  5,  is  easily  accom- 
modated  to   a   place   of  one   to   three  acres   extent. 

In  Fig.  6,  the  Ground-plan  of  a  Pleasure-Ground 
and    Kitchen-garden    is    represented. 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND.  197 

The   house    and    stable    are    fronting     the     high- 
way.    On   hoth    sides    of  the   house,    an    entrance   is 
One   part    of   the   Pleasure-Ground  repre- 


Fis.  G. 


allowed. 

sents  a  scene  of  ever- 
greens ;  the  other  of 
groups  of  Shruhhery 
and   Plowers. 

In  r,  a  pavilion  will 
find  a  convenient  place. 
In  E,  the  orchard  is 
situated.  The  trees  are 
not  planted  in  straight 
rows,  hut  must  form  a 
Grove.  A  few  giant 
forest  trees  are  seen 
on   the   lawn. 

The  Vegetahle-gar- 
den  is  laid  off  in  four 
squares,  having  a  cir- 
cular flower-hed  in  its  center.  Every  square  is 
surrounded  by  a  border  of  Flowers  —  pyramid  fruit- 
trees  stand  at   equal  distances. 

A  Plan,  as  shown  in  this  figure,  is  well  adapted 
to   a   place   of  two   or   three   acres. 


A,  House ;  B,  Stable ;  C,  Kitchen-gar- 
den ;  D,  Flower-lawn ;  E,  Orchard ;  F, 
raviUon. 


198 


PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GAEDENING. 


Fig.  7.  The  house  is  surrounded  by  a  grove  of 
Forest  trees ;  the  Carriage-road  turns  from  the  gate 
to  the  left;  at  the  right,  the  ground  is  falling, 
making  an  approach  road  impossible.  There  are 
Fig-  7.  D         three  leading  scenes  to 

be  remarked  in  this 
Plan:  The  Grove  sur- 
rounding the  house ; 
the  Evergreen  drive, 
from  the  gate  to  the 
house;  and  the  Foot- 
entrance  walk,  which 
winds  through  a  mass 
of  shrubbery  and  flow- 
ers. The  belt  which 
is  to  hide  the  fence, 
may  be  composed  of 
taller  trees  and  shrubs, 

A,  House;  B,  Grove  of  Forest  trees;  C,    {^     those    plaCCS   whcre 

Front-entrance  ;  D,  Back-entrance  ;   E,  Sta- 
ble;  F ,  Front  lawn.  no     outside     Yiew     is 

wished.  In  other  places,  where  distant  views  are 
desirable,  smaller  shrubs  are  selected.  The  Ever- 
greens are  grouped  together  to  show  to  best  effect. 
The   Shrubbery  and   Flowers,   on   the   opposite   side, 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND. 


199 


Fis;.  8. 


THE   PLEASURE-GROUND.  201 

have  to  be  grouped  closely,  so  as  to  conceal  the 
presence    of   two    walks,  when    passing  in    one. 

Fig.  8.  The  house  is  situated  on  a  terrace,  sur- 
rounded by  a  parterre,  with  flower-beds  ornamented 
with  Vases  and  Statues.  Before  the  house,  a  large 
front  lawn  extends  to  the  gate.  The  Carriage-road 
passes  through  a  grove  of  lofty  forest  trees,  which 
are   worthy  to   be    preserved. 

The  upper  part  of  the  front  lawn  is  ornamented 
with  Evergreens  which  are  grouped  in  masses.  The 
Foot-entrance  gate  is  in  one  corner  of  the  place. 
The  Walk  passes  a  temple  or  pavilion,  and  resting- 
place,  with  seats  shaded  by  the  surrounding  belt. 
Before  the  pavilion  a  group  of  Shrubbery  is  planted, 
to  which  masses  of  showy  Flowers  are  joined,  which 
will   be   favorably  seen   from   the   terrace. 

The  dotted  straight  lines,  are  to  show  the  finest 
Views  enjoyed  from  the  house,  the  one  being 
directed  to  the  pavilion,  the  other  to  the  distance, 
in  the  surrounding  country.  The  Stable-yard  is 
concealed  from  view  by  a  belt  of  shrubbery;  being 
near  the  main  building,  the  outhouses  may  be 
built   near   the    stable. 


202  PKACTICAL    LAJSTDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

The  M'alls  of  the  terrace  are  covered  -with  Climb- 
ing plants,  planted  in  the  four  smaller  groups. 
The  outside  belt,  planted  in  some  places,  is  neces- 
sary to   give   privacy  to   the   place. 

Fig.  9.  In  this  Ground-plan  it  is  attempted  to 
show  three  different  scenes ;  the  first,  is  in  front  of  the 
mansion,  being  composed  of  groups  of  choice  trees, 
fine-flowering  Shrubbery,  and  an  abundance  of 
Flowers ;  the  second  is  a  mass  of  Evergreens,  screen- 
ing the  Vegetable-garden ;  the  third  is  composed 
of  lofty  primitive  forest  trees,  to  which  some  dense 
groups  of  trees  and  undergrowth  have  been  added, 
to   conceal   the  junction   of  the   walks. 

The  Vegetable-garden  is  conveniently  situated  on 
one  side  of  the  place ;  the  walk  leading  to  it  has 
a  row  of  fruit-trees  on  each  side.  The  Views  to 
the  distant  country  are  shown  by  three  dotted  lines. 
The  stable  is  surrounded  with    trees  and    shrubbery. 

The  groups  in  the  front  part  of  the  place  are 
made  up  with  fine-flowering  Shrubbery  and  Flow- 
ers, and  contrasted  by  trees  between  them.  The 
main  entrance  is  in  front  of  the  house,  opposite 
the   fountain. 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND. 


203 


Fiff.  9. 


A,  Main  Lawn.  E,  A  dense   group    of  Shrubbery,  in 

B,  Vegetable  Garden.  which  the  Outhouses  may  be  con- 

C,  Flower  Lawn.  cealcd. 

D,  Groups  of  fine  flowering  Shnib-  F,  Grove  of  Forest  Trees. 

bery.  G,  Views  to  the  distarvt  country. 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND. 

Fis.  10. 


205 


-^^liTM^i 


#1 


A,  House, 

B,  Parterre. 

C,  Stable. 

D,  Carriage-entrance. 

E,  Kitchen-gardon. 

1,  Korway  Spmee.    AVhite  Spruce. 

2,  'Wliite  Pines  and  Arbor-vitae. 


o,  li-il  Cedars.      Hemlock   Spruce  in 

front. 
i,  Balsam  Fir  and  Picea  Fraserii. 

5,  Austrian  Pine.    Yew. 

6,  Larches. 

7,  Crataegus.    Almonds  in  front. 

8,  Group  of  Maples.     Catalpa. 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND.  207 

Fig.  10.  Tliis  Plan  is  to  represent  two  leading 
scenes ;  the  one  this  side  of  the  main  carriage- 
road,  is  made  up  of  a  rich  collection  of  Evergreens  ; 
a  Parterre  of  Flowers  is  in  front  of  the  house.  The 
other  is  composed  of  deciduous  Trees,  Shruhs,  and 
FloAvers.  The  various  walks  meet  in  a  thicket 
of  trees  and  undergrowth,  through  which  no  second 
walk    should    be   visible. 

A  grove  of  Forest  Trees  stands  in  the  back 
part  of  the  ground ;  the  Kitchen-garden  is  con- 
cealed  by   a   belt   of  plantation. 

The  trees  to  make  up  the  Grove  may  be 
selected  from  the  families  of  the  Maples,  Poplars, 
Ash,  Elm,  etc.  The  gi"oups  composing  the  belt  may 
have  higher  trees,  and  undergrowths  of  Eedbud, 
Dogwood,  Hornbeam,  etc.  The  Parterre,  in  front 
of  the  house,  should  contain  a  rich  supply  of  Bul- 
bous plants  for  spring  flowers  and  greenhouse 
plants,  as  Verbenas,  Heliotropes,  Salvias,  etc.,  for  fall 
flowers. 

SEE    EIG.     10. 

9,  Eoses.    Verbenas  in  front.  13,  Hyppophce.    Bohemian  Olive. 

10,  Mass  of  Eoses.   Pseonias.    Petunias.  14,  Lilacs.    Snowballs. 

11,  Jasmines.    Deuzia.     Salvia.  15,  Lonicera.    Sophora. 

12,  Tree  Preonias. 


208  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

The  ground  represented  in  Figure  11,  might 
naturally  he  divided  into  two  Lawns,  extending  on 
each  side  of  the  house.  The  Front-lawn  is  orna- 
mented with  the  choicest  Trees,  Shruhs  and  Flowers  ; 
the  back  part,  with  the  Pond,  has  more  of  the 
picturesque. 

The  shores  of  the  Pond  should  he  made  with 
Eockwork,  and  planted  out  with  Khododendrons, 
Kalmias,  Ferns,  etc.;  the  helt,  surrounding  the  pond, 
should  be  composed  of  higher  trees,  to  shade  the 
plants  around  the  pond.  A  Summer-house  or  pavil- 
ion may  be  placed  near  the  pond,  under  the  shade 
of  the  belt.  Several  clumps  of  trees  are  planted 
on  one  side  of  the  pond  ;  they  should  be  com- 
posed of  different  kinds  of  trees,  to  contrast,  in 
shape  and  size,  with  one  another.  The  Vegetable- 
garden  should  be  concealed  from  view  by  dense 
masses  of  Shrubbery.  The  poultry-yard  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  wdre  fence,  and  groups  of  shrubbery. 
Each  group  should  be  made  up  of  one  family  of 
plants  —  the   Gardenesque   style   being   adopted. 


THE    PLEASURE-GROUND. 


209 


FiK.  11. 


A,  Dwelling. 

B,  Conservatory. 

C,  Poultry-j'ard. 

D,  Stable. 

E,  Pond. 

18 


F,  Kitchen-garden. 

G,  Orchard. 
H,  Out-houses. 
I,  Carriage-road. 
■T,  Distant   Views. 


CHAPTER   XXIII. 

THE     FLOWER-GARDEN. 

In    introducing  Flowers    among    garden    scenery, 
we    may    arrange    and    place    them    in    two    distinct 
Fig.  12. 


A  Parterre  of  Flowers ;  to  be  placed  in  front  of  the  house  or  conserva- 
tory. The  center  is  iron  trellis-worlt,  overrun  with  Climbing  plants.  In 
its  place  a  Fountain   may  be  adopter!,  and  would  be  of  good  eff.ct. 

(211  ) 


212  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GAF.DENING. 

styles,  either  or  both  of  which  may  be  adopted, 
according  to  the  style  or  peculiar  advantages  of 
the   place    to    he    ornamented. 

By  the  Landscape-Gardener  they  are  distributed 
in  suitable  places,  among  the  natural  scenery,  and 
there  help  to  enliven  and  diversify  it.  The  dis- 
position made  of  Flowers,  by  the  Landscape  Gar- 
dener, it  has  been  attempted  to  explain  by  the 
plans  and  dh'ections  for  Pleasure-grounds,  in  a  pre- 
ceding part  of  this  work.  We  therefore  come 
now,  naturally,  to  tlie  other  style,  where  Flowers 
are  arranged  in  a  spot  or  place,  set  apart  espe- 
cially for  their  cultivation  —  as  the  Flower-Garden, 
or  the  Parterre.  In  the  disposition  of  flowers, 
here,  the  fancy  or  peculiar  taste  of  the  gardener 
or  improver  has  much  wider  sway,  nevertheless,  he 
must  allow  himself  to  be  guided  by  principles  of 
harmony  and  congruity,  or  general  fitness. 

The  Parterre,  placed,  as  it  is,  in  front  of  the 
mansion,  or  the  consei'vatory,  should  partake,  as 
much  as  possible,  of  the  character  of  the  build- 
ings to  which  it  belongs,  rather  than  to  the  sur- 
rounding scenery.  The  Parterre  may,  and  indeed 
should     be,     ornamented     with     Fountains,     Statues, 


THE    FLOWER-GARDEN.  213 

Vases,  and  other  artistic  embellisliments,  m  keep- 
ing with  tlie  style  of  the  mansion,  which  will  add 
to  the  elegance  of  its  appearance.  Its  keojiing 
should  always  be  above  reproach,  for  cleanliness 
and  neatness.  It  must  be  laid  out  in  symmetrical 
and  pleasing  figures,  such  as  may  suggest  them- 
selves to  the  imagination  of  the  improver  or  gar- 
dener. The  lines  in  these  figures  should  be  very 
carefully  and  distinctly  cut,  and  their  regulai'ity 
and  symmetry  of  shape  strictly  preserved.  None 
but  the  choicest  flowers  and  shrubs  are  admitted 
into  the  Parterre,  which  is,  indeed,  the  place  where 
the  proprietor  may  be  appropriately  lavish  of  expense, 
in  procuring  and  introducing  all  that  will  tend 
to   add   to   richness   of  appearance. 

A  Parterre  is  peculiarly  suitable,  where  a  man- 
sion is  built  upon  a  terrace.  Indeed,  in  such  a 
situation,  nothing  else  does  so  well.  When  the 
dwelling,  however,  stands  on  a  level  with  the  sur- 
rounding scenery,  the  introduction  of  a  Parterre, 
in  place  of  Natural  scenery,  is  a  question  of  indi- 
vidual taste,  ruled,  however,  in  some  degree,  by  the 
style   of  architecture   of  the  house. 

The  Flower-Garden,  of  greater  extent  than  the 


214  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

parterre,  jDartakes,  however,  greatly  of  its  charac- 
ter. It  should  be  situated  conveniently  near  the 
house,    and   surrounded   by  a   belt   of    Shrubbery. 

Where  a  conservatory  or  greenhouse  is  kept,  and 
this  joins  the  house,  the  Mower-Garden  may  appro- 
priately join  that.  Many  different  Styles  are  adopted 
in  laying  out  Flower-Gardens.  A  regular,  geo- 
metrical design  is  often  adopted,  the  beds  being, 
by  that  means,  regularly  divided  by  walks,  which 
renders  access  to  them  easy.  The  irregular  method 
produces  meandering  walks,  and  beds  of  no  regu- 
larity of  shape  or  size.  A  third,  and  rather  favor- 
ite mode,  is  to  lay  out  the  various  beds  in  such 
shape  as  fancy  or  taste  may  suggest,  in  a  smooth, 
well-dressed  lawn.  Beside  these  Flower-beds,  speci- 
mens of  fine  Shrubs  and  smaller  trees  may  be 
placed  irregularly  upon  the  lawn,  and  will  there 
make  a  fine  appearance.  Many  pleasing  designs 
for  the  Flower-Garden  may  be  formed  of  Piockwork. 

Flower-Gardens  should  be  ornamented  also  with 
Statues,  Vases,  Seats,  etc.  Fountains  and  Pavilions 
also  have  a  fine  eft'ect.  The  various  species  and 
varieties  of  Flowers  should  be  collected  in  masses, 
each    Flower-bed    having   its   own    family,   species,  or 


THE   FLOWER-GARDEN. 


215 


even  its  own  color. 
To  mix  tlie  different 
kinds  of  Flowers  in- 
discriminately, in  all 
the  beds,  will  be  pro- 
ductive of  naugbt  but 
confusion. 

The  skillful  gar- 
dener   can    251'oducc 
harmony    and   great 
variety,  by  following 
the    same    principle 
here,  that  he  would 
adopt  when  grouping 
his  trees  and  shrubs, 
to  create  a  Natural 
scenery.      The   end- 
less variety  of  shape, 
color    and    bight    of 
the   plants,   as   well 
as   the  difference   in 
their      seasons      for 
blooming,    must-   be 
taken  into  consider- 


Fio-.  13. 


A  Flower-Garden,  in  the  regular  Geometri- 
cal style.  Tliis  design  would  also  be  well 
adapted  for  a  ParteiTe,  in  front  of  an  elegant 
building.  The  numerous  Flower-beds  are  sur- 
rounded with  turf  The  edges  of  the  main 
walks  might  be  of  Box-tree. 


216  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

ation,  and  it  is  best  to  bring  those  kinds  near 
each  other,  which,  by  their  peculiar  character,  will 
either  create  harmony  or  contrast.  The  Gardcn- 
esque  Style,  which  has  already  been  mentioned,  finds 
its  greatest  appropriateness  in  the  arrangement  of 
Mower-Gardens.  In  adapting  it  to  this  use,  how- 
ever, a  very  extensive  and  rich  collection  of  Flow- 
ers  and    Shrubs   is   necessary. 

The  Flower-Garden,  if  rightly  laid  out  and 
kept,  will  prove  an  unfailing  source  of  jileasure  to 
the  proprietor  and  the  various  members  of  his  fam- 
ily. In  it  they  will  see  and  study  the  most  beau- 
tiful exemplifications  of  Nature's  wonderful  works. 
Kept  as  it  should  be,  however,  the  care  and  keep- 
ing required  to  bring  out  and  perfect  a  constant 
succession  of  flowers,  will  be  found  to  be  tolerably 
expensive. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

CULTURE      OF      FLOWERS. 

No  success  need  be  expected  in  the  cultivation 
of  Flowers,  if  the  soil  in  which  they  are  to  grow, 
be  not  of  such  quality  as  the  plants  require.  The 
most  genial  soil  —  that  best  fitted  for  all  flowers  — 
is  a  rich  loam,  composed  in  part  of  sand,  to  make 
it  dry  and  loose.  Dryness,  looseness,  and  a  suffi- 
cient depth  to  enable  it  to  resist  the  droughts  of 
summer,  are  the  three  principal  requisites  for  the 
soil  of  a  Flower-garden.  None  but  well-rotted  ma- 
nure should  be  aj)plied  to  Flower-beds.  A  supply 
of  the  ingredients  used  in  the  composition  of  the 
ground  of  Flower-beds,  should  be  always  near  at 
hand,    for   the   use   of  the  gardener. 

The  ground  should  be  carefully  spaded  in  spring 

or  fall.     During   summer,   the  plants  must  be  kept 

clear   of  weeds    and   the   surface  of    the  Flower-bed 
19  (217) 


218  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

stould  be  repeatedly  lioed  and  stirred  up.  In  the 
dryest  parts  of  summer,  tlie  tenderest  Flowers  should 
be   regularly   watered. 

The  various  Families  and  Species  of  Plants  gen- 
erally grown  in  Flower-gardens  may,  according  to 
their  culture,  be  classed  under  three  different  heads: 

1.  Annuals. 

2.  Biennials  and  Perennials. 

3.  Greenhouse  Plants,  which  are  planted  out 
in   the   Garden   during   summer. 

Anmmls. —  The  Annuals  are  sown  in  spring, 
and  flower  and  decay  the  same  season.  It  is  well 
to  sow  some  kinds  in  the  hotbed,  in  early  spring, 
which  are  to  be  transplanted,  afterward,  into  the 
Garden.  Others  may  be  sown  in  March  and  April 
in  the  Garden,  in  the  beds  where  they  are  desired 
to  flourish.  It  is  well  to  cover  the  seed  with  fine 
leaf-mould,   when   sown   in   the   Garden. 

ANNUALS, 

BEST  ADAPTED  FOR  SOWING  IN  A  HOT-BED.^' 

Ageratvun  Mexicanum.    Blue  Flowering  Ageratum. 
Asclepias  curassavica.    Orange  Swallowwort. 
Aster  Chinensis.     China  Aster.     Queen  Margaret. 

*  Buist.     "  American  Flower-Garden  Directory." 


CULTURE    OF  FLOWEKP.  219 

Anagallis  Phillipsii.    Blue  Pimpernel. 

Balsamina  horteusis.     Balsam.    Ladies'  Slipper. 

Browallia  alata.     Blue  and  -white  Browallia. 

Caccalia  coccinea.    Scarlet  Cacalia.    Venus'  Paint-brush, 

"        sonchifolia.    Orange  Cacalia. 
Calandrinia  discolor, 
Celosia  cristata.    Coxcomb. 
Centaurea  Americana.    American  Sultan. 

"         Buaveolens.    Yellow  Sweet  Sultan, 
Olarkia  elegans.    Elegant  rose-colored  Clarkia. 

"      pulcbella.    Purple  Clarkia. 
Cleome  grandiflora.    Lilac  Spider-plant. 
Clintonia  elegans.    Elegant  blue  Clintonia, 
Collinsia  bicolor.     Two-colored  CoUinsia, 
"        heterophylla.    Lilac  and  white. 
Commelina  ccelestis.    Blue  Flowering  Commeline. 
Dianthus  Chinensis.     China  Pink. 

Gomphrena  globosa.    Globe  Amaranth.    Bachelor's  Button, 
Hibiscus  manihot.    Yellow  Hibiscus. 

"       Africanus  major, 
Helichrysum  bracteatum.    Yellow  Everlasting. 
Xeranthemum  lucidum.  "  " 

Lophospermum  erubescens.    Climber. 

"  scandens.  " 

Loasa  latericia.    Orange  Red,    " 
Malope  alba  and  grandiflora, 
Mathiola  annua.    Ten  weeks'  Stock. 
Maurandia  Barklayana.    Blue  Flowering  Climber, 


220  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GAEDENING. 

Maurandia  semperflorens.    Pink  Flowering  Climlber. 
Mesembrianthemtun  glaciale.    Frozen  Plant. 
"  crystallinum.    Ice  Plant. 

Mimosa  pudica.    Sensitive  Plant. 
Mimulus  Wlieeleri.     Monkey  Flower. 

"         Smitliii. 

"         variegatus. 

"         cardinalis. 

"        roseus.    The  Mimulus  grows  best  in  wet  places. 
Petunia.    An  endless  variety. 
Portulaca  splendens.    Purple  Purslane. 

"        Thellusonii.     Red  Purslane, 
Scabiosa  atropurpurea. 
Schizanthus  retusus  and  pinnatus. 
Shortia  Californica.    Yellow  Shortia. 
Tagetes.    Marygold. 

Tropseolum  atrosanguineum.    Nasturtium. 
Thunbergia  alata.      Climber. 
"  alba.  •• 

"  curantiaca. " 

Verbena  candidissima.    White. 

"        Mestonii.    Scarlet. 

'•        Algerii.    Rose,  and  other  varieties. 
Vinca  rosea.    Madagascar  Periwinkle. 

*'    alba.    White  Periwinkle. 
Zinnia  elegans. 

"      coccinea. 

"      alba. 


CULTURE   OF   FLOWERS.  221 

ANNUALS, 

WmCH  ARE  BEST   SOWN   IN   THE    GAEDEN, 

Adonis  moniata.     Pheasant's  Eye. 
Amaranthus  caudatus. 

"  hypocliondriacus.    Prince's  Feather. 

"  tricolor.     Three-colored. 

Brugmansia  Wagmeria. 
Centaurea  Moschata. 

"         cretica. 
Collinsia  grandiflora.    Blue  Collins-flower. 
Convolvulus  minor.    Blue  Bind-weed. 
Calliopsis  bicolor.    Fair  Eye. 
Collomia  coccinea.    Scarlet  Flowered  Collomia. 
Delphinium  Ajacis.    Rocket  Larkspur. 

"  consolida.    Branching  Larkspur 

Euphorbia  variegata. 
Eschscholtzia  crocea.    Orange. 
"        Californica.    Yellow. 
Erysimum  Peroffskyanum. 
Gilia  tricolor.      Blooming  all  Summer. 

capitata.  "  " 

Achillaefolia.     "  " 

Heliophila  Arahoides.     Blue  Sunlove. 
Hieraceum  mutabilis.    Changeable  Hawkweed. 
Helianthus  Californicus.    Dwarf  Sunflower. 
Iberis  amara.     Candytuft. 
"     umbellata. 


222  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Iberis  violacea. 

"      odorata. 

"      splendens. 
Ipomsea  quamoclit.    Cypress  Vine. 
Lathyrus  odoratus.    Sweet  Pea. 
Loasa  lateritia. 
Lupinus.    Many  varieties. 
Mirabilis  Jalapa.    Marvel  of  Peru. 
Nemophila  insignis  and  atomaria. 
(Enotliera.    Tree  Primrose. 
Papaver  Marseillii.    Double  wliite  Poppy. 
Reseda  odorata.    Mignonette. 
Tournefortia  heliotropoides.    Summer  Heliotrope. 
Viola  tricolor.    Pansy 

THE  BIENNIALS  AND  PERENNIALS, 
Are  sown  early  in  Spring,  "but  do  not  flower 
until  the  second  year.  The  Biennials  decay  after 
flowering.  The  Perennials,  once  well  established 
in  the  ground,  remain  for  many  years,  flowering 
every  year.  The  roots,  taken  up  in  the  Fall 
or  Spring,  can  he  divided ;  the  plants  heing  thus 
easily  propagated.  They  should  he  largely  used 
in  the  Flower  Garden,  being  of  great  beauty, 
and    requiring   but    little   attention. 


CULTURE   OV   FLOWERS.  223 

Wo   shall   name   a   few   of   the   choicest    kinds. 

Agrostemma  coroaaria.     Rose  Campion. 
Adonis  verualis.     Yellow  Aclouis. 

AUhcea  rosea.    Hollyhock.    Au  endless  variety  of  colors. 

Aconitum.  Wolfsbane.  A  great  many  ditferent  species  are  culti- 
vated in  Gardens.  Aconitum  album,  A.  bicolor,  A.  Naj)ellug, 
A.  ocliroleucum,  A.  lycoctonum,  A.  versicolor,  A.  sinense 
(Seiboldii),  are  very  desirable   kinds. 

Anemone.  Windflower.  In  Europe  this  genus  of  Flowers  is  highly 
esteemed;  in  this  country  it  does  not  flourish,  owing  to  the 
heat  of  the  climate. 

Antirrhinum.  Snapdragon.  There  arc  many  varieties,  of  diiferent 
colors ;  the  latest  of  which  in  the  market,  are  of  great 
beauty.     They  are  either  perennial  or  biennial. 

Aguilegia  Canadensis,  A.  glandulosa,  A.  leptoceras,  and  others. 

Alyssum  maritimum,  Alj'ssum  saxatile. 

Aster.  Perennial  Aster,  Aster  amelloides,  A.  bicolor,  A.  formosus, 
A.  grandiflorus,  A.  Novie-AngliiC,  A  Virginicus,  and  many 
other  species. 

Asclepias.  Many  of  the  iiuest  kinds  are  native  plants  of  Amer- 
ica. Asclepias  incarnata,  A.  nivea,  A.  tuberosa,  are  worthy 
a  place  in  the  Garden. 

Bellis  perennis  (hortensis).  Daisy.  There  are  many  double  and 
very  large  and  beautiful  varieties.  They  require  a  shady, 
retired  situation. 


224  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Caltha  palustris.  Flore  pleno.  A  well  known,  desirable  border 
plant. 

Campanula.  Contains  many  brilliant  species:  well  adapted  for 
Gardens.  Campanula  gi'andiflora,  C.  Alpina,  C.  grandis, 
C.  glomerata  plena,  C.  persicifolia,  alba  plena,  and  coerulea 
plena,  C.  urticaefolia,  and  others.  Campanula  media,  and 
its  varieties,  are  biennial. 

Chrysanthemum  indicum.  Winter  Aster.  Has  an  almost  endless 
variety .  of  size,  color  and  shape.  There  are  many  new 
varieties  of  remarkable  beauty. 

Chelone.  (Native  of  America.)  C.  barbata,  C.  pulchella,  C.  Mexi- 
cana,  and  others. 

Cheiranthus  Cheri.  The  Garden  Wallflower.  There  are  many 
fine  varieties;  they  are  not  hardy,  and  therefore  require 
protection  in  Winter.     Biennial. 

Convallaria  majalis.  The  red  and  double  varieties  are  of  peculiar 
beauty. 

Coreopsis  delphinifolia,  C.  grandiflora,  C.  tenuifolia,   C.  tripteris. 

Corydalis  nobilis,  C.  spectabilis,  C.  formosa. 

Dictamnus  fraxinella,  D.  albus. 

Dracocephalum  Louisianum,  D.  superbum,  D.  grandiflorum. 

Dianthus.  Pink.  Dianthus  Barbatus,  Sweet  William,  many  superb 
varieties  exist  of  this  species:  D.  plumarius,  Double  Pink, 
many  varieties ;  D.  cariophyllus ;  from  this  species  the  Carna- 
tion Pink  and  Picotee  have  been  obtained ;  D.  Alpinus,  D.  for- 


CULTURE    OF    FLOWERS.  225 

inosus  plena.  D.  grancliflorus,  D.  superbus,  D.  atropurpureus, 
and  others. 

Dd^hlnium.  Lai'kspur.  D.  grandiflorum,  D.  bicolor  plena,  D.  si- 
nense,  and  its  varieties,  D.  hybridum,  D.  siboricum  plena, 
etc.    They  are  very  showy  border-plants. 

Digitalis.    Foxglove.    D.  purpurea,  and  varieties,  are  the  best. 

Dodecatheon.     Cowslip.    D.  media,  D.  elegans,  D,  gigantea  striata. 
Galardia  picta.     G.  aristata. 

Gentiana  acaulis,  G.  macrophylla,  G.  asclepiadea,  G.  ochroleuca, 
etc.    Very  showy  plants. 

Oeum  coccineum,  G.  Japonicum. 

Glycine  Apios. 

Hibiscus  palustris,  H.  roseus,  H.  grandifiorus,  etc. 

Gypsophylla  paniculata.    G.  repens,  G.  saxifraga. 

Iris.  Fleur-de-lis.  I.  arenaria,  I.  Apollon,  I.  Germanica,  L  cris- 
tata,  I.  longiflora,  I.  pumila,  and  its  varieties. 

Linum  perenne,  Linum  flavum. 

Lychnis  Alpina,  L.  chalcedonica,  and  varieties,  L.  coronata,  L. 
Flos-cuculi,  L.  fulgens. 

Lythrum  roseum  superbum. 

Mimulus,  atrosanguineus,  M.  auranthiacus  superbus,  M.  pictus, 
M.  moschatus. 

Monarda  didyma,  M.  hybrida,  M.  purpurea,  M.  Russelliana. 


226  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

(Ehiothera  acanlis,  0.  fruticosa,  0.  Fraseri. 

Phlox.  One  of  the  finest  families  of  Garden  Flowers.  There  are 
many  species  and  sub-species  -worth  cultivation  ;  especially 
the  new  sorts,  which  are  of  exquisite  beauty. 

Pentstemon.  There  are  many  very  choice  varieties  cultivated ;  many 
of  them  are  not  hardy:  P.  ovatus,  P.  procerus,  P.  pubescens, 
and  others  are  hardy  ;  the  other  varieties  have  to  be  set 
under  glass  in  winter. 

Pmonia.  Is  not  surpassed  by  any  other  flower  for  showy  effect: 
P.  albiflora,  P.  amabilis  grandiflora,  P.  elegans,  P.  anemoni- 
flora,  P.  ligulata,  P.  prolifera  tricolor,  P.  triumphans,  P. 
edulis,  P.  officinalis. 

Pceonia  Moutan.    Tree  Pseonia. 

Potmtilla  atrosanguinea,  P.  decora  plena,  P.  Demayi,  P.  Gardner 
iana,  P.  Macnabina. 

Primula.  Primrose.  An  endless  variety  of  sub-species  have  been 
obtained.  The  Polianthes  have  been  grown  from  Primula 
elatior.  Primula  auricula  has  numerous  varieties,  generally 
called  Auricula.  In  this  country  the  Auricula  can  not  be 
grown  with  success,  as  a  hardy  perennial,  as  it  can  in 
Europe,  owing  to  the  great  heat  of  summer. 

Sedum  Kamstkaticum,  S.  purpuratum. 

Silene  viscosa,  S.  alpestris,  S.  maritima  plena. 

Saponaria  officinalis  fl.  pleno. 

Saxifraga  cordifolia,  S.  ligulata,  S.  granulata,  S.  sarmentosa. 


CULTUKE    OF    FLOWERS.  227 

SpiroM  filipendula  fl.  pleno,  S.  Japonica,  S.  ulmaria  fl.  pleno. 
Statice  Echinus,  S.  exiuiia,  S.  latifolia,  S.  Pseudo-Armeria. 
Trollius  EuroiJteus,  T.  Asiaticus. 

Veronica.    Speedwell.    V.  geutiaudldes,  V.  dioica,  V.  saxatilis. 
Valeriana  phu.,  V.  rubra,  (Centranthus  ruber.) 
Tucca.    Adam's   needle.     Y.  flaccida,  Y.  filamentosa,  Y.  gloriosa. 

THE    BULBOUS    PERENNIALS, 

Are  of  great  importance  in  tlie  formation  of  a 
Mower-garden.  They  contain  many  of  the  choicest 
species  of  Flowers,  as  Hyacinths,  Tulips,  etc.  Accord- 
ing to  their  culture  they  may  he  classed  into  Two 
families,  viz:  those  taken  up  every  year,  and  those 
which  may  remain  in  the  ground  for  years  with- 
out  transplanting. 

THE  TENDER  BULBOUS  FLOWERS, 

Are  generally  taken  up  every  year,  and  are 
as   follows : 

Amaryllis  formosissima.  Jacobea  Lily.  Planted  in  April ;  flowers 
end  of  May;  taken  up  in  fall,  and  preserved  over  winter  in 
dry  sand,  in  a  temperature  above  freezing. 

Polyanthus  tuberosa.  Tuberose.  Highly  fragrant ;  flowers  pure 
white.    The  roots  may  be  started  in  a  hotbed,  in  early  spring, 


228  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

or  planted  in  the  garden  in  April.    If  started  in  pots,  it  'will 
flower  sooner  and  more  luxuriantly. 

Tigridia  pavonia.  Tiger  Flower.  Several  varieties,  differing  in 
color  from  yellow  to  bright  crimson.  Planted  in  April ;  taken 
up  in  October. 

Gladiolus.  Sword  Lily.  There  are  many  varieties  cultivated,  of 
this  beautiful  family :  G.  alatus,  G.  blandus,  G.  Cardinalis,  G. 
communis,  G.  floribundus,  G.  Psittacinus,  are  some  of  the  choicest 
species.  The  bulbs  are  planted  in  the  garden  at  the  end  of 
March,  and  taken  up  in  the  fall, 

Lilium.  Lily.  Nearly  all  the  varieties  of  this  species  are  hardy, 
and  may  remain  in  the  ground  for  years.  A  few  of  the  choicest 
varieties  are  to  be  taken  up  in  the  fall,  and  kept  in  a  warm 
temperature  over  winter;  such  are  L.  eximeum,  L.  Brownii, 
L.  Japonicum,  L.  longifolium,  L.  lancifolium,  with  many  sub- 
varieties. 


THE  HAKDY  BULBOUS  FLOWERS. 

Are  generally  taken  np  every  three  or  four 
years,  to  be  divided  and  replanted ;  the  season  to 
plant   them   is   fall   or   early   winter. 

The  Crocus,  flowers  very  early  in  spring ;  there  are  many  varieties, 
differing  only  in  color ;  they  require  removal  every  three  or 
four  years.  They  should  be  planted  three  inches  deep,  and,  not 
growing  very  rankly,  may  be  set  closely  together. 


CULTURE    OF    FLOAVERS.  229 

Tulips.  The  tulip  has  long  held  an  impoi'tant  part  in  Floriculture. 
In  times  past  a  tulip  rage  existed  in  Europe,  and  enormous 
sums  were  paid  for  a  single  bulb  of  a  favorite  variety.  They  are 
of  great  beauty,  and  have  an  endless  variety  of  bright  tints. 
The  flowers  are  either  single  or  double.  The  bulbs  are  planted 
in  spaces  six  inches  square  by  three  or  four  inches  deep. 

Hyacinths.  A  most  delightful  flower,  very  fragrant,  and  displaying 
an  endless  variety  and  beauty  of  coloring.  They  should  be 
planted  four  or  five  inches  deep,  and  six  or  eight  inches  each 
way. 

Fritillaria  imperialis.  Crown  Imperial,  should  be  planted  five  or  sis 
inches  deep,  and  twelve  inches  square. 

Narcissus.     A  profusely  growing  bulb. 

Jonquilles.  Lilium  candidum  (White  Lily)  ;  L.  Tigrinum  (Tiger 
Lily),  L.  Martagon,  L.  chalcedonicum,  are  hardy  varieties  of 
this  beautiful  family.  They  should  be  transplanted  every  three 
or  four  years,  and  set  out  in  trenches  or  holes  four  or  five 
inches  deep  by  fifteen  inches  square. 

The  soil  Lest  adapted  for  tlie  cultivation  of 
Bulbs,  is  a  rich,  well-manured,  sandy  loam ;  it  should 
be  carefully  and  very  deeply  spaded ;  the  beds  must 
be  raised  in  the  middle,  to  turn  the  water ;  wet 
soil  is  not  suitable  for  bulbous  plants.  The  bulbs 
should  not  be  taken  out  of  the  ground  before  the 
leaves    are   fairly   dry.       "  No   imbricated   or   scaly 


230  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

bulb,  ought  to  be  retained  long  out  of  the  ground ; 
if  once  lifted,  tboy  should  be  immediately  re- 
planted."*' No  bulb  should  be  planted  with  its 
oflPsets ;  these  must  be  taken  oft",  and  planted  in  a 
bed  by  themselves. 

DAHLIAS. 

A  "well-known,  and  highly  esteemed  genus,  whose 
flowers  display  an  endless  variety  of  color,  shape 
and  size.  For  a  showy  flower,  the  Dahlia  is  un- 
surpassed ;  it  is  well  worthy  a  place  in  the  flower- 
garden,  though  the  droughts  of  our  summers  often 
interfere  with  its  growth.  A  moist  and  substan- 
tial, rich  soil  is  best  adapted  for  its  cultivation. 
As  it  grows  to  the  bight  of  from  three  to  eight 
feet  the  plants  must  be  supported  by  sticks  strong 
enough  to  resist  the  wind.  In  case  of  drought, 
it  requires  to  be  freely  watered.  The  roots  may 
be  planted  out  in  the  Garden  in  April ;  it  is  best 
to  sprout  them  in  a  temperate  bed,  under  glass, 
and  plant  them  out  in  May.  It  is  easily  pro- 
pagated  by  dividing   the  roots  ;   every  part   planted 

"  Buist's   "  Flower-Gar  den   Directory." 


CULTUKE    OF   FLOWEKS.  231 

must,  however,  have  at  least  one  eye.  It  is  also 
easily  propagated  hy  cuttings,  started  in  a  hothed ; 
the  sprouts  are  cut  off  when  one  or  two  inches  long. 
They  must  he  cut  very  close  to  the  old  stock  or 
root.  When  planted  in  a  moist,  well-shaded  hot- 
ted, they  strike  root  in  a  short  time.  In  the 
fall,  after  the  frost  has  killed  the  stems  and  leaves, 
the  root  is  taken  up,  and  stored  away  over  win- 
ter  in   a   dry  and   temperate   cellar  or  greenhouse. 

THE   ROSE, 

Is  SO  well  known  as  the  choicest  of  all  Flow- 
ers, that  it  is  useless  for  us  to  say  anything  in 
its  praise.  Owing  to  high  culture  and  continual 
crossing  of  different  species,  thousands  of  varieties 
and  suh-species  have  heen  obtained,  differing  greatly 
in   color,  shape,  and    size. 

The  various  kinds  of  Eoses  may  he  .  classed,  in 
regard  to  their  manner  of  growth,  as  either  Stand- 
ards, Bushes,  Eunners,  or  Climbing  Eoses ;  they 
may  he  classed  according  to  their  season  of  flow- 
ering, being  either  once-blooming,  or  ever-blooming : 

The  once-Uooming  varieties  are  generally  called  Garden  Roses.  A 
great  many  beautiful,  yet  older  varieties  are  found  among 
them,  as  the  Centi folia  Rose,  Provence   (of  the  French),  with 


232  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

us  generally  called  Cabbage-rose;  the  3Ioss-rose,  with  all  its 
beautiful  vai'ieties ;  the  clififerent  species  of  Wldte  Eoses,  and 
the  different  sorts  of  Yellow  Eoses,  as  Harrisonii,  Persian 
Yellow,  Sweet-Brier,  and  many  other  highly-esteemed  sorts 
are  also  once-blooming.  By  crossing  many  of  these  sorts 
■with  the  Tea-scented,  the  Bourbon  and  the  Noisette  roses,  a  class 
of  flowers  was  obtained  called  Hybrid  Garden  or  Hybrid 
Chinese  rose :  they  are  of  great  value  and  beauty.  A  few 
of  this  family  are:  George  the  Fourth  (Rivers),  Bnnnus, 
General  Lamarque,  Eoi  des  Hybrides,  Violet  de  Belyique,  etc. 
They  are  of  luxuriant  growth  and  foliage,  blooming,  how- 
ever, but  once   a  year. 

The  Climbing  Once-bloonmig  Eoses  are  of  great  value  in  garden- 
ing, being  very  showy,  and  fast-growing.  They  comprise 
the  family  of  the  French  Boursault  roses ;  the  Grevillia  or  Seven 
Sisters ;  the  llultiflora ;  the  Prairie  roses,  of  which  ive  only  men- 
tion the  Queen  of  the  prairies,  and  Baltimore  Belle;  and  the  Banksia 
roses  (better   adapted  to   the   greenhouse   than  the  garden). 

The  Ever-blooming  Eoses.  They  can  not  be  called  ever-blooming 
in  the  fullest  sense  of  the  word,  as  many  of  them  only 
bloom  in  spring  and  fall,  owing  to  the  heat  and  drought 
of  summer.  They  are  the  most  valuable  sorts  cultivated. 
They  are  classed  under  various   sub-families,  as: 

The  Bengal,  or  Chinese  Evefr-blocming  Eose,  R.  semperflorens.  They 
are  free-blooming  all  summer  and  fall,  and  of  great  beauty. 
With  a  protection  of  straw  or  leaves,  they  stand  the  win- 
ter out  of  doors.  We  mention,  of  their  endless  number  of 
varieties,  only  a  few: 


CULTURE   OP  FLOWERS.  233 

The  Fink  Daily,  and  White  Daily,  are  very  free-blooming  and 
hardy. 

The  Lawrcnicana,  smallest  rose  known,  Purple  Crown,  Agrippina, 
Louis  Philippe,  Ptoi  de  Crimoisis,  Sanguinea,  Fabler,  Le  Pac- 
tole,  Queen   of  Lombardy,  etc.,  etc. 

The  Tea-scented  Rose.  Rosa  odorata  Indica.  This  family  numbers 
many  varieties  of  great  beauty.  The  Tearscented  roses  are 
not  very  hardy,  and  require  a  good  protection  of  straw  or 
leaves,  in  winter.  They  flourish  best  under  glass.  Some 
of  the  choicest  sorts  are,  Comte  de  Paris,  Clara  Silvain, 
Belle  Marguerite,  Devoniensis,  Eliza  Sauvage,  Saphrano,  Mad- 
ame Jaqueminot,  Melville,  La  Sylphide,  Lyonnaise,  Triumph 
of  Luxemburg,  etc. 

Noisette  Rose.  Rosa  Noisettiana.  The  Noisette  roses  are  strong 
and  rapid-growers.  Mr.  Buist  says  of  them :  "  The  great 
profusion  and  perpetual  succession  of  flowers,  from  June  till 
November,  of  immense  clusters,  frequently  from  fifty  to  one 
hundred  in  each,  make  them  truly  ornamental  objects,  and 
are  well  calculated  for  covering  fences,  pillars,  or  trellis- 
work."  Aime  Vibert,  Bengal  Lee,  Cceur  .Jaune,  Cloth  of 
Gold,  Fellenburg,  Lamarque,  Solfatare,  etc.,  are  some  of  the 
choicest  sorts   of  this   family. 

Bourbon  Rose.  ( Isle  Bourbon. )  Rosa  Borbonica.  The  Bourbon 
roses  are  of  great  beauty,  and  value,  they  are  free-growing 
and  free-blooming  during  summer  and  fall.  The  flowers 
are  in  great  clusters ;  their  foliage  is  large  and  luxuriant. 
They  are  perfectly  hardy.  We  mention  a  few  of  the  choicest 
kinds:    Hermosa,  Marshal  de  Villars,  Bouquet  de  Flore,  Du 

20 


234  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

petit  Thouars,  Gloire  de  Paris,  Phoenix,  Paul  Joseph,  Piin- 
cesse  Adelaide,  Queen  of  the  Bourbons,  Souvenir  de  la  Mal- 
maison. 

Perpdudle  or  Remontant  Rose.  Portland  Rose,  Rosa  Bifera.  The 
Remontant  Roses  are  justly  called  the  finest  of  all  roses. 
They  are  perfectly  hardy,  fast-growing,  and  abundantly 
blooming.  They  frequently  stop  blooming  in  the  hottest 
months  of  summer.  In  early  summer  and  fall,  they  attain 
their  hight  of  beauty.  Du  Roi,  St.  Fiacre,  De  la  Reine, 
Comte  de  Paris,  Due  d'  Aumale,  Duchesse  de  Nemour,  Baron 
Brevost,  Madame  LafFay,  Giant  des  Battailles,  Cornet,  Mare- 
schal  Soult,  Prince  Albert,  and  Louis  Bonaparte,  etc.,  are 
some  of  the  most  desirable  varieties. 

The  Eose  can  be  raised  in  almost  any  kind  of 
soil;  a  deep,  and  substantial  loam  is  best  adapted 
to  its  growth.  The  choicest  ever-blooming  kinds 
should  be  x)lanted  in  rich  and  well-prepared  ground. 
The  Tea-scented  roses,  especially,  require  a  well- 
manured  and  deeply-dug  bed.  The  ground  should 
be  sufficiently  drained,  either  naturally  or  artifi- 
cially—  a  surplus  of  moisture  being  destruction  to 
the  plants,  especially  in  winter.  Those  kinds  re- 
quiring protection  in  winter,  may  either  be  bent 
down  to  the  ground,  and  thus  be  covered  with 
litter   or  leaves,   or   they   may   be   surrounded  with 


CULTURE    OF   FLOWERS.  235 

straw  or  matting.  Fall  or  spring  is  tlie  most 
favorable  season  to  transplant  tlie  hardy  kinds. 
To  Lave  the  Eose  bloom  in  early  spring,  it  is 
advisable  to  take  uj)  some  of  the  youngest  and 
healthiest  plants  in  October  or  November,  and  to 
transplant  them  in  pots  or  cases.  If  they  are  kept 
under  glass,  in  a  uniform  tem2)erature  above  freez- 
ing, they  will  generally  be  in  bloom  in  March  and 
April. 

The  ground  where  roses  are  growing,  should  be 
freely  manured;  this  is  most  conveniently  done  in 
the   fall   and   winter,    before   spading   the   ground. 

The  Eose  generally  requires  pruning  every  year; 
being  once  well  established  in  the  ground,  they  will 
soon  become  too  strong  and  irregular  for  the  neat 
borders  and  beds  of  the  Flower-Garden.  In  prun- 
ing, it  is  recommended  to  leave  a  good  supply  of 
young  wood,  which  will  produce  the  most  flowers. 
It  is  therefore  necessary  to  take  off  some  of  the 
oldest  stems,  in  whose  place  new  and  strong  shoots 
will  appear,  promising  an  abundance  of  flowers  for 
the  next  year.  It  is  also  necessary  to  shorten  the 
largest  shoots,  according  to  the  hight  and  space 
the   plant   is   desired  to   occupy.      In   this   way   the 


236  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

plants  can  be  trained  to  any  shape  and  size  de- 
sired. Pruning  may  be  done  in  winter,  and  early 
spring. 

The  Garden  Eoses  frequently  produce  many  suck- 
ers, round  the  main  plant ;  these  should  be  taken 
up  and  planted  by  themselves.  This  is  the  most 
common  way  of  propagation  for  the  hardy  kinds. 
Young  shoots  may  also  be  bent  to  the  ground, 
and  layered,  by  which  they  freely  strike  roots  and 
form  new  plants.  Many  of  the  Garden  and  run- 
ning roses  are  easily  propagated  by  cuttings,  se- 
lected from  thrifty,  well  seasoned  shoots,  of  one 
year's  growth,  which  are  set  in  the  ground  in 
early  winter;  it  is  well  to  protect  the  bed  where 
the  cuttings  are  to  grow,  from  the  severest  cold, 
by  a  covering  of  litter,  or  which  is  better,  by  a 
frame,  covered   with   boards. 

The  Ever-blooming  roses  are  propagated  in  vari- 
ous ways,  of  which  we  shall  mention  only  a  few, 
most  generally  followed  by  gardeners  They  may 
be  propagated  by  cuttings,  taken  from  the  old 
wood,  of  one  year's  growth,  and  by  cuttings  of 
the  young  and  tender  wood.  Cuttings  from  the 
old  wood  are  made  in  fall  and  early  winter.     They 


CULTUKE   OF  FLOWERS.  237 

may  be  cut  to  tlie  lengtli  of  from  one  to  three 
inches,  having  at  least  one  eye.  After  taking  off  the 
leaves,  the  cuttings  are  set  in  a  bed  of  sand,  or 
sandy  earth,  in  the  greenhouse,  or  in  a  cold  frame, 
not  exposed  to  the  frost.  The  bed  should  be 
kept  constantly  wet,  sufficient  air  being  also  ad- 
mitted. The  cuttings  will  very  soon  be  sufficiently 
prepared  to  strike  their  roots.  To  make  cuttings 
from  the  young  wood,  it  is  necessary  to  transplant 
some  of  the  old  plants  in  pots,  in  early  fall;  these 
plants  should  be  set  in  a  temperate  greenhouse, 
where  they  will  develop  their  new  shoots  in  Feb- 
ruary or  March.  About  this  time  a  hotbed  should 
be  made,  into  which  fine  earth,  to  the  depth  of 
four  inches,  is  to  be  placed.  The  earth  is  cov- 
ered with  fine  sand,  to  the  depth  of  two  inches, 
and  slightly  beaten  with  the  hand,  to  make  it 
solid.  When  the  bed  has  arrived  at  its  greatest 
heat,  the  young  and  tender  shoots  are  cut  off  from 
the  old  plants,  and  planted  in  the  sand.  They 
require  to  be  freely  watered,  sufficient  air  also 
being  constantly  admitted.  The  cuttings  are  sure 
to  strike  roots  in  from  six  to  fifteen  days.  This 
is   the   best   and  most   advisable    way   of    propagat- 


238  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

ing  tlie  rose;  by  proj)er  management,  scarcely  any 
of  tlie  cuttings  will  be  lost ;  we  have  propagated 
almost  all  sorts  of  roses,  except  tlie  Moss-rose,  in 
the  above  manner.  The  young  plants  are  set 
out  in  the  Garden  in  the  beginning  of  May ;  if 
possible   on   a   rainy   day. 

Budding  is  another  manner  of  propagating  the 
various  kinds  of  roses.  It  is  the  most  usual  way  of 
rearing  them  in  the  Gardens  of  Europe,  yet  little 
practiced  in  this  country.  Budded  roses  are  gen- 
erally short-lived,  and  but  little  admired  in  this 
section,  at  least  with  us,  in  the  west ;  they  are 
scarcely  salable  in  the  markets,  unless  a  new  and 
rare  variety.  The  Maiden's  blush,  the  Dog  Eose, 
(Kosa  canina)  and  the  French  Eglantine  (Eglantier), 
are   most   suitable   for   stock   to   bud   on. 


The  limits  of  this  volume  will  not  allow  us  to 
say  more  on  the  culture  of  the  Eose,  as  practiced 
to  its  greatest  perfection,  by  many  of  our  merchant 
gardeners  and  Florists.  We  can  mention  but  a  few 
of  such  flowers  as  properly  belong  to  the  Green- 
house, they  being  only  planted  out  during  summer,  to 
ornament   the   Flower-Garden   and   the   Parterre. 


CULTURE   OF  FLOWERS.  239 

It  is  to  be  rememborcd  tliat  this  class  of  flowers 
should  not  be  set  out  before  the  warm  weather  of 
early  summer  has  set  in,  and  the  ground  should 
be  prepared  and  enriched  with  rotten  manure,  pre- 
vious   to   their   removal   from   the   greenhouse. 

Abutilon  striatum,  A.  Venosum. 
Datura  (Brukmansia) ,  bicolor,  D.  arbuscula. 
Canna  indica,  C.  gigantea,  C.  rubra. 
Fudisia.    Many  varieties. 
Gardenia  raclicans. 

Heliotropium  Peruviauum,   Hel.  Voltarianum,   Hel.   Souvenir  de 
Liege. 

Hydrangea  hortensis. 
Lantana  aurantiaca. 

"        Sellowii,  L.  crocea,  L.  multiflora,  L.  nivea. 
Loasa  volubilis. 
Lobelia  erinoides. 

erinus  grandiflora,  L.  conipacta  alba. 
Nerium  oleander  fl.  plcuo. 

Pelargonium  (geranium) ,  many  varieties  of  the  Scarlet  geranium. 
Pentstemon.   ]\Iany  varieties. 
Plumbago  capensis,  P.  coerulea. 
Salvia  patens. 

"      aziirea,  S.  floribunda,  S.  splendens. 
Stem,  Mexicana. 


240  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

TropcBolum  atrosanguineum,  T.  Lobbianum, 

Verbena.    An  endless  variety  of  colors. 

Veronica  speciosa. 

Viburnum  Tinus. 

Volkameria  Japonica  fl.  pleno. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

FRUIT-TREES  —  THE     ORCHARD. 

In  no  department  of  HusLandiy  have  greater 
improvements  been  effected  within  the  last  ten 
years,  than  in  the  raising  of  Orchard  Fruits. 
And  thanks  to  the  interest  excited  in  the  public 
mind  by  numerous  publications  on  the  subject  of 
Fruit-growing,  from  the  pens  of  different  Gentle- 
men, Scientific  as  well  as  Practical  Experimenters, 
America  now  boasts,  and  justly  too,  of  having 
originated  varieties  of  our  most  common  Fruits, 
as  Apples,  Pears,  Peaches,  etc.,  equaling,  and 
surpassing  any  raised  in  the  older  Fruit-growing 
countries  of  Europe.  The  able,  and  justly  cele- 
brated work  of  Mr.  Daioning,  on  "  The  Fruit 
Trees  of  America,"  by  which  their  nomencla- 
ture and  knowledge  were  first  fairly  established, 
21  (2J:l) 


242  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

did  ver}^  mucli  toward  exciting,  among  Country 
Gentlemen  and  Farmers,  a  desire  for  a  higher  de- 
gree of  perfection  in  Orchard  Fruits;  and  this  has 
been  fostered  and  increased  hy  various  publications 
on  the  subject,  and  by  Periodicals  devoted  to 
this  branch  of  Agriculture,  among  .  the  ablest  of 
which  we  will  mention,  the  Horticulturist,  published 
by  Mr.  Barry,  at  Kochester,  N.  Y. ;  the  Ohio 
Cultivator,  by  Mr.  Bateham,  Columbus,  and  the 
late  Horticultural  Review,  by  Dr.  Warder,  at  Cin- 
cinnati. 

Fruit-growing  forms  already,  a  very  important 
and  highly  remunerative  branch  of  Agriculture, 
and  is  every  year  spreading  and  increasing.  In 
the  West,  particularly,  immense  quantities  of  choice 
Fruits  are  every  year  raised,  and  that  part  of 
the  United  States  bids  fair  soon  to  be  the  greatr 
est  Fruit-growing  country  the  world  has  ever  seen. 
It  is  not  the  object  of  the  writer  of  this  work 
to  give  lengthy  details  on  this  important  branch. 
Want  of  space  would  forbid  it,  were  it  even  in 
other  respects  desirable ;  but  the  number  and 
ability  of  works,   already  before  the  public,  treating 


FEUIT-TREES  —  THE   ORCHARD.  243 

exclusively  on  this  subject,  would  render  such  a 
proceeding  on  our  part  supererogatory.  We  shall 
therefore  be  content  with  giving  in  this  place,  a 
few  hints  for  the  'placing  of  Fruit-trees,  with 
the  view  of  combining,  so  far  as  possible,  the 
two  ends  of  Utility,  and  beauty  of  Appearance. 
The  ground  intended  for  an  Orchard,  should 
be  thoroughly,  and  deeply  broken  up,  to  make 
the  soil  as  mellow  as  possible  —  poor  soil  being 
at  the  same  time  well  manured  and  fertilized. 
The  situation  should  be  airy,  the  soil  dry.  Where 
the  ground  is  marshy,  or  wet,  it  can  be  improved 
by  drainage.  Inclined  situations,  high  and  airy, 
and  having  a  good  exposure  to  the  sun,  are  espe- 
cially preferable  for  Stone  Fruits.  The  general 
directions,  given  in  another  part  of  the  work,  for 
Planting  Trees,  apply  to  setting  out  Fruit-trees. 
The  holes  should  be  made  abundantly  large,  and 
the  trees  should  be  well  watered,  whenever  the 
weather  is  dry,  during  the  first  year  after  setting 
out. 

The    most    advantageous    mode    of    settins    out 
Orchard     Trees,     is,     doubtless,     in     straight    lines. 


244  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

But  to  connect  tlie  straight  lines  of  an  Orchard 
with  the  highly  improved  surface,  and  beautifully 
variegated  shapes  of  a  Pleasure-ground,  without  a 
line  of  demarkation,  would  not  he  harmonious  or 
congruous.  We  therefore  run  a  belt  of  Shrubbery 
between  the  two,  gradually  changing,  from  Forest 
Shrubbery  to  useful  Shrubs,  as  Peaches,  Quinces, 
Kaspberries,  Currants,  and  others;  these  being  in- 
termixed with  lower  Fruit-trees,  and  backed  by 
higher  Fruit-trees ;  the  entire  Plantation  forming 
a  natural,  easy  transition  from  the  Beautiful  to 
the  Useful — from  the  Pleasure-ground  to  the 
Orchard.  Or,  the  Orchard  may  be  planted  in 
groves,  or  natural  groups,  thus  substituting  Fruit- 
trees  for  Forest-trees;  thus  we  form  groves  of 
Apple,  Pear,  Cherry,  and  Peach  Trees,  interwoven 
with  thickets  of  Quinces,  Easpberries,  etc.  If  de- 
sirable, a  group  of  Forest-trees,  or  ornamental 
Shrubs,  might  be  planted  here  and  there,  in  the 
midst  of  such  a  scene,  adding  variety  to  the  picture, 
and  breaking'  the  stiff,  regular  top  lines  of  the 
Fruit-trees,  which  are  nearly  all  of  one  hight.  Such 
scenery  will  not,  of  course,  have  the  variety  of  hue 


FRUIT-TIIEES THE    OUCHARD.  245 

and  liiglit  and  form,  wliich  is  so  cliarming  in 
groves  of  Forest-trees ;  but  a  skillful  arrangement 
of  the  different  parts  will  make  quite  a  fine  scene. 
Suck  an  arrangement  of  Fruit-trees,  as  tlie  last 
mentioned,  lias  the  additional  advantage,  tliat  it 
does  not  interfere  at  all  witk  the  growth  of  the 
trees,  leaving  them  sufficient  room  and  light. 
Where  groves  of  Fruit-trees  are  planted,  they  may 
be  placed  at  convenient  distances.  Where  it  be- 
comes necessary,  for  the  preservation  of  harmony,  to 
plant  the  Trees  close  together  (in  thickets),  we  would 
advise  to  plant  Wild  Apples  and  Wild  Cherries, 
which  will  be  found  to  flourish  in  such  situations, 
and  whose  fruits  are  useful — -the  first  for  Cider, 
the  latter  to  make  excellent  Preserves.  We  have 
recommended  (by  plans),  these  Ornamental  Orchards 
to  several  gentlemen  about  to  improve  their  grounds, 
and  they  have  expressed  themselves  highly  gratified 
at   the   result. 

While  upon  this  subject,  we  desire  to  say  a 
few  words  upon  the  Grape  culture.  Several  va- 
rieties of  the  Native  Grape  have,  within  a  few 
years,   been   found    to    make   most   excellent   Wine. 


246  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

Wine-culture  has  already  attained  a  higUy  important 
stand  in  the  great  Valley  of  the  Ohio,  and  is 
rapidly  progressing.  As  an  investment  of  capital, 
the  culture  of  the  Vine,  when  followed  upon 
Scientific  Principles,  as  it  must  be  to  succeed  at 
all,  yields  larger  returns  than  almost  any  other 
Agricultural    Product. 


CHAPTER    XXVI. 

THE     FARM. 

A  FEW  words  on  improyement,  addressed  more 
especially  to  Farmers,  will  not  be  out  of  place  in 
this  volume.  The  great  majority  of  our  farmers 
are  comparatively  wealthy  men  —  that  is  to  say, 
they  are  not  engaged  in  that  struggle  for  day- 
to-day  existence,  which  is  the  lot  of  the  chief  ]iart 
of  our  laboring  population.  Themselves  employed 
in  the  production  of  the  most  important  of  the 
necessaries  of  life,  they  may  with  truth  be  said  to 
be,  if  not  wealthy,  still  as  a  class,  independent. 
Yet  viewed  as  a  class,  there  are  no  stricter  utili- 
tarians   than    American    farmers. 

The  greater  portion  of  our  agricultural  popu- 
lation pass  through  life,  knowing  but  little  of  those 
peaceful   rural    enjoyments  which    are  placed,  almost 

without    charge,    at    their   command,    and   which   so 

(  ^'7) 


248  PEACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GAEDENING. 

much  tend  to  calm  the  spirit,  elevate  the  mind, 
purify  the  heart,  and  ennoble  the  desires  and  aspi- 
rations of  man.  How  often  do  we  find  the  owner 
of  hundreds  of  acres  living  contentedly  all  his  days 
in  the  midst  of  a  barren  "  clearing,"  without  making, 
in  all  that  time,  a  well-directed  effort  to  assem- 
ble around  his  homestead,  those  homely,  rural 
charms  —  Flowers,  Shrubs  and  Trees  —  which,  with 
little  labor,  and  less  cost,  would  make  of  his  home 
a  paradise  instead  of  a  desert  waste,  and  the  power 
of  tlieir  associations,  of  himself  and  his  progeny, 
thinking,  feeling,  human  beings,  instead  of  mere 
producers    of  certain  quantities  of  corn    and   pork! 

To  disseminate  among  such,  the  principles  of 
correct  taste,  and  excite  in  them  a  love  of  the 
beautiful,  seems  to  us  highly  desirable;  and  if  the 
present  volume  should  be,  in  the  slightest  degree, 
instrumental  in  effecting  this  object,  the  author's 
fervent  wishes   would   be   fulfilled. 

As  we  have  said,  in  another  part  of  this  vol- 
ume, much  more  is  to  be  done  in  this  country, 
and  particularly  in  the  West,  in  preserving  the 
natural  beauties  of  the  forest,  than  in  creating 
new   and   artificial   charms. 


THE    FARM.  249 

Beauty  of  scenery,  and  utility  are  not  so  oppo- 
site that  the  two  can  not  be  united  on  a  farm. 
How  many  corners  and  nooks  are  there  ahout  a 
farm-yard,  which,  now  left  year  after  year  to  bar- 
renness, might,  with  a  very  little  labor  in  winter, 
be  stocked  with  young  Maples,  Elms,  and  other 
forest  trees,  which  would  make  shade  for  man  and 
beast,  and  add  infinitely  to  the  beauty  of  the  scene! 
How  often  do  we  see  the  picturesque  bank  of  a 
creek  stripped  of  all  its  beauty  by  cutting  down 
the  overhanging  trees ;  or  the  noblest  forest  trees 
destroyed  to  make  a  "clearing,"  in  the  midst  of 
which  to  set  a  house,  and  their  place  supplied  by 
some  ragged  Locusts,  whose  innumerable  sprouts 
break  up  the  ground  all  round,  and  render  it 
impossible  to  make  even  a  respectable-looking  lawn? 

There  is  no  good  reason  why  the  farmer's  resi- 
dence should  not  look  as  neat,  and  clean,  and  sim- 
ply beautiful,  as  the  country  gentleman's!  Instead 
of  ash-heaps,  chips,  etc.,  scattered  round  the  house, 
we  would  see  a  smooth  and  beautiful  Lawn  trav- 
ersed by  regular  walks.  His  dwelling  and  the  out- 
houses should  be  shaded  by  forest  trees,  propor- 
tioned to  the  buildings.      His  spring  or  well,  instead 


250  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

of'  standing  naked  and  exposed  to  the  burning  sun, 
as  is  but  too  often  tlie  case,  might  be  surrounded 
by  a  little  grove.  His  doors  and  windows  should 
be  festooned  with  Running  Eoses  and  Grape-vines, 
while  other  hardy  flowers  are  disposed  in  beds,  in 
front.  His  springhouse  might  be  shaded  by  Creep- 
ing plants ;  his  smokehouse  overrun  with  Ivy  or 
Honeysuckle;  and  the  whole  would,  with  a  little 
trouble,  and  at  a  very  small  outlay,  be  turned 
into  a  charming  country  scene,  attracting  the  eye 
of  even  the  most  tasteless  by  its  simple  beauty, 
and  affording  a  constant  pleasure  to  the  inmates. 
This  might  be  done,  we  say.  We  are  glad  to  say 
that  many  just  such  scenes  are  to  be  found  through 
the  country,  but  as  yet  these  are  so  small,  in 
point  of  numbers,  as  to  form  the  exception,  rather 
than  the  rule.  With  but  too  large  a  class  of 
our  farmers,  the  ash-heap  is  yet  a  permanent  insti- 
tution, trees  (except  Locusts)  are  considered  nui- 
sances, which  it  is  a  meritorious  act,  under  all 
circumstances,  to  abate,  and  flowers  and  shrubs  are 
unthought   of. 

But   we   desire    to    go    beyond    the    mere   orna- 
mentation  of  the    grounds    more    immediately    sur- 


THE    FARM. 


251 


Fig.   Li. 

GKOUND-PLAN    OF    AN    ORNAMENTAL    FARM,    DEVOTED   TO   CATTLE- 

GRAZINa   AND   TILLAGE. 


ifKE  House  is 
surrounded  by  a 
Pleasuroground, 
ornamented  by 
Shrubbery  and 
Flowers.  The 
Pleasure-ground 
is  divided  from 
the  Park  by  a 
AVire  Fence,  to 
li^eep  the  cattle 
off.  The  various 
groves  of  Forest 
ti-ees  in  thePark, 
will  add  much 
to  the  beauty  of 
the  place.  The 
shores  of  the 
Lake  should  be 
planted,  in  some 
places.with  close 
groups,  \^•hich 
should  be  made 
to  deceive  the 
eye  as  to  extent. 
The  Farm-build- 
ings are  placed 
in  the  middle  of 
the  grounds,  sui'- 
rounded  by  a 
grove  of  Forest- 
trees.  Behind 
the  buildings  va- 
rious subdivis- 
ions are  made 
where  cattle  are 
fed. 


A,  Front  Lawn.    Pleasure-grormd. 

B,  Park.    Undivided  range  of  Pas- 

ture, and  groves  of  Trees. 

C,  Tilled  Fields. 

D,  Kitchen  Garden. 


E,  Lake. 

F,  Residence. 

G,  Stable. 

H,  Farm-house  and  Farm-buildings. 


THE   FARM.  253 

rounding  the  house.  We  wish  to  see  all  parts 
of  the  farm  heautified,  when  it  can  he  done  with- 
out injury  to  profit,  naturally  the  first  consideration. 
And  no  portion  of  th«r  farm  is  more  benefited,  as 
well  as  beautified  by  the  improving  hand  of  the 
gardener,  than  the  cattle-pastures.  The  cattle-grazer, 
with  his  vast  domain  "his  broad  acres  of  Blue- 
grass,"  to  use  a  Kentucky  phrase,  dotted  with  cattle 
and  sheep,  occupies  the  place  among  us,  held  in 
England  by  the  nobleman,  as  the  owner  of  parks 
stocked  there  with  deer  and  game.  Stock-raising 
is  becoming  the  most  extensive  and  remunerating 
part  of  farming,  in  the  West.  It  needs  large 
tracts  of  laud,  and  when  stocked  with  groves  of 
forest  trees,  either  of  natural  growth,  or  placed 
there  by  the  proprietor,  these  tracts  form  the  Amer- 
ican Parks.  IMuch  of  the  woodland  now  left  unem- 
ployed on  large  farms,  might,  by  a  judicious  use 
of  the  ax,  in  thinning  the  heavier  wood,  and  erad- 
icating underbrush,  giving  room  to  Bluegrass,  be 
made  the  best  of  pastures  for  catttle,  thus  adding 
wealth  to  the  farmer's  store,  while  beautifying  the 
country. 


254  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Our  farmers  sliould  read  more.  Eead  to  form 
a  taste  for  tlie  beautiful,  Avherever  it  may  come  to 
light,  aud  tlien  read,  to  learn  how  to  satisfy  that 
taste; — read  to  learn  how  they  may  combine  util- 
ity and  beauty  —  how  they  may  benefit  themselves, 
while  beautifying  the  country  —  how  they  may  cul- 
tivate in  themselves  and  their  children,  a  taste  for 
the  refined  and  elegant  in  nature  and  art  —  which, 
and  which  alone  will  elevate  the  farmer  to  his 
proper   place   in  the  social  ranks. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

PUBLIC  SQUARES  AND  PARKS. 

Nearly  every  city,  town,  and  village,  in  this 
30untry,  lias  surrounding  its  public  buildings,  a 
Square,  of  greater  or  less  area.  This  Square  is 
generally  left  barren,  and  intersected  by  random 
paths  and  walks,  or  it  is  put  in  grass.  In  neither 
case  does  it  present  as  beautiful  an  appearance  as 
it  might  be  made  to  assume,  if  laid  out  in  the 
Geometric  style.  This  would  bo  in  keeping,  too, 
with  its  position,  surrounded  as  it  is  on  all  sides 
by  houses.  If  intersected  by  walks,  flower-beds 
would  add  a  grace  and  charm  to  the  busy  scene 
of  the    town's   center. 

The  grounds  surrounding  a  building  of  large 
dimensions,  and  of  more  importance,  as  a  State- 
House,  should   be  laid  out  strictly  in    harmony  with 

the    style    of   the  building,    either    plain,    or    highly 

(255) 


256  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

ornamental.  A  principal  requisite  about  such  places 
is,  that  they  be  kept  clean  and  neat,  the  grass 
short,  and   all   in   perfect   order. 

Our  large  cities  are  lamentably  deficient  in 
Parks,  those  ''lungs  of  cities,"  as  they  have  been 
appropriately  styled.  In  some,  however,  the  evil  is 
being  remedied,  and  we  are  glad  to  see  public 
attention  looking  that  way  in  every  large  city 
through  the  land.  The  public  Park  is  a  delight- 
ful place  of  recreation  for  all  classes  of  citizens, 
from  the  poorest  to  the  richest.  At  the  close  of 
the  labors  of  a  day  or  week,  the  artisan  or  trades- 
man repairs  here  to  enjoy  a  breath  of  free,  pure, 
unadulterated  air  —  to  imbibe  the  fragrance  of  beau- 
tiful flowers,  and  refresh  his  toil-worn  senses  with 
a  glance  at  the  bright  colors  of  Nature,  and  the 
gay  carols    of  her   feathered  songsters. 

The  scenery  of  a  public  Park,  should  be  com- 
posed of  grand  and  impressive  masses  and  groups, 
and  pleasant  groves  of  forest  trees,  smiling  lawns, 
occasional  groups  of  flowers,  and  beautiful  shrub- 
bery, the  whole  intersected  and  variegated  by 
])road  and  smooth  walks  and  roads.  Natural  scenes 
should   be    imitated    as    closely    as    possible,    as    the? 


PUBLIC    SQUARES    AND    PARKS.  257 

more  natural  and  unrestrained  the  appearance  of 
the  scene,  the  greater  the  pleasure  it  will  give  to 
those  who  have  come  forth  from  the  restraints  of 
the   city  to    enjoy  it. 

It  is  much  to  be  hoped  that,  before  it  is  too 
late,  every  American  city  will  provide  for  a  public 
Park,  and  in  the  laying  out  of  future  cities  in 
the  far  West,  this  subject  should  be  taken  into 
consideration   from    the    first. 


22 


CHAPTER    XXVIIl. 

THE    CEMETERY. 

Among  all  civilized  nations,  from  the  earliest  ages 
to  the  present  day,  the  Burial-place  of  the  dead 
has  received  much  care  and  attention  from  the 
living.  The  amount  of  care  and  pains  bestowed 
upon  the  decorations  of  the  graves  of  deceased 
friends  and  great  men,  in  ancient  times,  was  very 
great,  and  was  always  in  precise  ratio  to  the 
degree  of  civilization  enjoyed  by  the  living.  It  is 
a  great,  though  melancholy  pleasure,  to  muse  over 
the  resting-place  of  the  loved  one  lost,  to  pay  those 
attentions  to  their  graves  which  are  dictated  by 
the  highest  and  purest  feelings  of  affection  and 
love,   of  which   the   human   heart   is   capable. 

In  many  countries  of  Europe,  and  particularly  in 
France,   much   attention  is  paid  to   the  tasteful  lay- 
ing-out and  decorating  of  Burial-grounds.     But  from 
(  258  > 


260 


PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 
Fig.  15. 


A,  Main  Entrance  Portal. 

B,  Eecei\ing-vault. 

C,  Public  Monuments. 


D.  Main  Carriage-way. 

E.  Exit  Carriago-road. 


The  scone  around  the  Entrance  Portal  and  the  Main  Eeccinng-vault,  is 
set  apart  for  Ornamental  Improvement  only,  no  graves  being  admitted  there. 
The  front  Lawn  is  ornamented    with    groups   of    fine    Flowering  Shrubbery 


THE    CEMETERY. 
Fi-    15. 


261 


and  Flower? ;  arouuJ  the  Main  Vault,  the  scene  should  be  solemn  and 
earnest;  many  Evergreen-trees  are  planted  around.  The  junctions  of  the 
Carriage-roads  are  planted  with  solid  masses  of  Trees  and  Shrubbery. 
The  graves  are  made  on  the  open  Jawns,  each  grave  and  monument  re- 
ceiving its  own  embellishment  with  Evergreens  and  Shrubbery. 


THE   CEMETERY.  263 

present  indications  of  tlie  American  taste,  this  coun- 
try will  soon,  if  she  does  not  already,  excel  all 
others,  in  the  beauty  of  her  Cemeteries.  And,  in 
the  absence  of  public  parks,  such  as  we  find  in 
the  great  cities  of  Europe,  our  Cemeteries,  aside 
from  their  appropriateness,  as  beautiful  resting-places 
for  those  we  have  loved  on  earth,  are  calculated  to, 
and  do  already,  exercise  a  powerful  influence  upon  the 
public  taste  for  rural  improvement.  Laid  out  in 
accordance  with  the  most  approved  rules  of  the  Art 
of  Landscape  Gardening,  as  most  of  them  are,  and 
all  should  be,  and  chastely  and  tastefully  decorated, 
they  are  the  schools  in  which  the  eyes  of  our  peo- 
ple will  be  trained  to  perceive  the  truly  beautiful, 
and  their  minds  to  appreciate  it,  and  to  distinguish 
between   it   and   a   false   and   unnatural   taste. 

We  design  giving  a  few  remarks  upon  the  situa- 
tion and  planning-out  of  Cemeteries,  and  the  style 
of  ornamentation  proper  to  be  adopted  in  them, 
hoping  that  such  may  prove  both  interesting  and 
useful.  And,  first,  the  situation  should  be  one 
commanding  fine  prospects,  either  seaward,  if  situ- 
ated  upon   the   sea-coast,   or  extending   over  a  wide 


264  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

and  pleasant  range  of  country,  if  inland.  It  should 
be  of  convenient  access  from  the  city,  and  should 
contain,  naturally,  within  itself,  the  elements  out 
of  which  may  he  formed  a  fine  Landscape.  Mt. 
Auburn,  near  Boston,  and  Greenwood,  near  New 
York,  are  specimens  of  finely  chosen  situations  for 
Cemeteries.  That  near  Frankfort,  Ky.,  is  also  placed 
in   a   highly   picturesque   spot. 

In  the  first  laying  out  of  the  place,  the  entire 
plan  should  be  formed  and  firmly  settled  upon  by 
men  of  experience,  correct  taste,  and  sound  judg- 
ment. The  surveyor  is  then  empowered  to  make 
his  subdivisions  into  grave-lots,  in  accordance  with 
this  plan.  Where  the  surveyor  is  allowed  to  divide 
and  subdivide,  as  he  sees  fit,  unless  he  is  also  a 
Landscape  Gardener,  which  is  not  always  the  case, 
he  will  inevitably  spoil  many  beautiful  scenes,  and 
render  the   whole   grounds   a   simple   patchwork. 

A  substantial  fence,  or  better  yet,  a  hedge, 
must  surround  the  entire  grounds.  The  style  of 
the  principal  buildings,  as  the  Keeper's  Lodge,  the 
Entrance  Portal,  the  Receiving-vaults,  etc.,  should  be 
strictly   in    accordance    with    the    character    of    the 


THE   CEMETERY.  265 

place.  Light,  fantastic  shapes,  or  fanciful  designs, 
are,  of  course,  entirely  out  of  place.  The  scenery 
ahout  the  principal  or  receiving-vaults,  in  particu- 
lar, should  be  earnest  and  solemnly  impressive. 
The  different  carriage-roads  should  meet  near  these 
vaults.  The  entire  grounds  must  be  intersected  in 
various  directions  by  carriage-roads.  Grass-walks, 
or  sweeping  gravel-walks  should  lead  from  these 
to  each  individual  grave-lot,  giving  free,  unre- 
strained access  to  all.  In  the  general  plan,  the 
best  and  most  level  parts  of  the  grounds  are,  of 
course,  reserved  for  grave-lots,  the  lower  and  broken 
parts  giving  a  spot  for  plantation.  Here  powerful 
masses  of  trees  should  be  formed  into  shady  groves, 
adding  variety  and  beauty  to  the  scene,  and  bring- 
into  bolder  relief  the  smooth  lawns  devoted  to  graves. 
Plantation  should  be  carefully  and  skillfully  arranged, 
with  a  view  to  the  prospects  attainable,  both  to 
within  and  without,  from  different  points  on  the 
grounds.  Conspicuous  objects  in  the  scenery,  should 
receive  additional  effect  from  the  manner  in  which 
they  are  brought  to  the  eye.  Interest  should  be 
maintained  by  partial  disclosures,  in  the  views  mthin, 
23 


266  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GAPvDENING. 

too  many  fine  monuments,  or  other  objects  not  being 
allowed  to  appear  to  the  sight  at  once.     The  entire 
arrangement   of    the   plantation   having   been  previ- 
ously  fixed    upon,    lot-holders    should    be   forced   to 
pay   regard   to   the   rules   of   the  grounds,    and    not 
arbitrarily   spoil,  by  their  lack  of   taste,  the  appear- 
ance of  the  whole  grounds.     The  graves  should  not 
be   allowed  to  be  surrounded  with  high,  conspicuous 
railings    or   fences,   iron   or   otherwise,    as   such   are 
entirely    out   of  keeping   with    natural    scenery.     If 
especially   designed    to    have   a   fence,   (which,    how- 
ever,  is  not   at   all   necessary)  it  should   be   a  low, 
unobtrusive   railing,   of  a   chaste   design.      An    able 
and   tasteful  Superintendent  should  have  charge  of 
the   grounds,  and  it  should  be  his  duty  to  see  that 
private  fancy   or    caprice    does    not,    in    any   place, 
interfere   with   the  harmonious  beauty  of  the  entire 
landscape.     He  should    be  able   to   furnish   to   such 
as    desired    it,    plans    for    tasteful    decorations    of 
graves.      It   should   be   the   aim   to   divest   grounds 
of    this    character    entirely   of    the    forlorn   appear- 
ance,  common   to   Graveyards    and   Cemeteries,   and 
to   form   as   natural   and   variegated   a   scene   as   is 


THE   CEMETERY,  267 

possible,    to    unite    with    tlie  solemnity  necessary  for 
sucli   a   place. 

The  ideas  detailed  above,  are  applicable,  not 
only  to  the  magnificent  and  expensive  Cemeteries 
attached  to  larger  cities,  but  also  to  the  more 
confined  village  Burying-Ground,  which,  by  a  taste- 
ful arrangement  of  a  few  flowers,  shrubs  and 
trees,   may   be   made   a   most   beautiful   place. 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN. 


REMAEKS. 

The  Vegetable-Garden  is  generally  laid  out  in 
regular  forms,  as  squares  or  oblongs ;  and  straight 
walks  are  required  to  divide  its  different  parts 
from  one  another.  Every  square  may  again  be 
subdivided  into  beds  of  from  four  to  five  feet  in 
breadtb,  or  it  may  be  used  for  the  cultivation  of 
but  one  kind  of  Vegetable.  The  outside  of  the 
square  is  frequently  formed  into  a  border,  in  which 
the  smaller  fruit-trees,  as  dwarf  AjDples,  Pears,  etc., 
are  planted  at  regular  distances.  Between  such 
fruit-trees  Vegetables  may  be  raised,  or  flowers  may 
be   planted   to   ornament   the   Garden. 

In  Gardens  of  great  extent  there  should  be  one 

main  road,  wide  enough   to  admit  a  cart  or  wagon, 
(268) 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  269 

as  tlicre  is  coustaiitly  ueecl  of  fresli  manure.  In 
smaller  patches,  sufficient  manure  is  easily  brought 
on   wheelbarrows. 

In  dividing  the  different  parts  of  a  Kitchen- 
garden,  care  must  be  taken  to  allow  each  kind  of 
vegetable  sufficient  room  to  grow,  so  that  it  may 
arrive   at   full   perfection. 

For  the  operations  of  planting,  hoeing,  and  clean- 
ing, free  access  must  be  had  to  the  different  squares 
or  beds,  without  being  obliged  to  cross  one  bed 
to  get  to  the  next.  Tlie  various  kinds  of  Vege- 
tables should  not  be  planted  as  accident  may  place 
them ;  they  generally  vary  in  regard  to  the  season 
when  used,  as  well  as  in  the  time  required  to 
bring  them  to  perfection,  and  strict  regard  must 
be  paid  to  these  considerations,  when  laying  out 
and  planting.  Thus,  the  earliest  kinds,  as  Eadishes, 
and  Lettuce,  and  Peas,  Beans,  Early  Cabbage,  etc., 
for  midsummer,  should  go  together,  while  Carrots, 
Parsnips,  etc.,  for  winter  use,  should  form  another 
department.  It  is  only  by  thus  systematically  divid- 
ing the  ground,  that  an  orderly  management  of 
the   whole   can   be   kept   up. 


270  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

ASPECT. 

One  of  tlie  first  requisites  of  a  suitable  Kitclien- 
garden,  is,  that  it  should  bring  forth  its  crops  as 
early  as  possible,  especially  in  spring,  when  new 
and  tender  Vegetables  are  in  greater  requisition 
than  at  other  seasons.  The  garden  is,  therefore, 
to  be  placed  in  a  warm  situation,  facing  the  south 
or  southeast.  Southwest  is  not  so  favorable  as 
southeast,  yet  highly  preferable  to  a  northern  aspect. 
Ground  slightly  inclining  toward  the  south  and  east 
is  undoubtedly  the  most  suitable,  as  the  sun's  rays 
naturally  strike  such  ground  more  directly  than  if 
perfectly   flat. 

The  ground  intended  for  a  Vegetable-garden, 
must  be  so  situated  as  to  receive  the  greatest 
possible  benefit  from  the  enlivening,  life-giving  rays 
of  the  sun.  There  should  be  no  shade-trees  in 
its  neighborhood,  sufficiently  near  to  affect  the  Gar- 
den. The  situation  must  be  airy,  yet  not  exposed 
to  north  and  northwest  winds.  Such  an  exposure 
will  retard,  and  oftentimes  destroy,  the  growth  of 
all  the  vegetables.  A  northern  and  western  ex- 
posure   may   be   guarded    against    by   tight    fences, 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  271 

or  thick  plantations  of  slirubloery  along  those  sides 
of  the   Garden. 


SHAPE     OF     THE     GROUND. 

It  was  remarked  above,  that  an  easy  inclina- 
tion of  the  surface  toward  the  south  is  to  be  pre- 
ferred for  a  Vep'etable-o-ardcn.  If  the  o;round  is 
too  steep,  and  thus  likely  to  be  washed  away  by 
heavy  rains,  it  becomes  necessary  to  improve  it,  by 
forming  it  into  terraces,  cither  with  stone  walls  or 
grass-banks.  The  beds,  or  squares,  on  such  ter- 
races, are  choice  spots  whereon  to  raise  the  earliest 
Vegetables ;  they  are  preferable  to  all  level  situa- 
tions. If  the  ground  is  nearly  level,  yet  broken 
by  small  eminences,  it  is  only  necessary  to  bring 
it  to  such  a  level  as  will  conveniently  admit  till- 
age. 

Where  a  Vegetable-garden  is  laid  out  accord- 
ing to  the  Geometrical  style,  in  squares,  circles, 
borders  and  beds,  the  ground,  if  not  terraced  up, 
should  be  made  as  nearly  level  as  possible  —  the 
Geometrical  style,  wherever  introduced,  requires  level 
ground. 


272  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

THE     SOIL, 

Must  be  dry,  loose  and  ricli.  Sandy  soil  is 
generally  preferable  for  tlie  growth  of  early  vege- 
tables, but  being  rather  light  and  loose,  it  is  not 
calculated  to  resist  the  effects  of  drought  and  sum- 
mer heat,  as  well  as  soils  of  a  heavier  and  more 
substantial  nature.  A  rich  loam  is  undoubtedly 
the  best  for  a  Vegetable-garden.  It  forms  the 
just  medium  between  light  and  sandy  soil,  and 
stiflp,  heavy  clay  soil.  It  brings  forth  Vegetables 
at  a  very  early  period  in  spring,  and  will  also 
resist   the   effects   of  drought. 

Clay  soil  is,  in  most  cases,  too  stiff  and  heavy ; 
it  is  extremely  hard  to  work,  and  is  apt  to  bake 
hard  on  the  surface,  after  every  rain,  in  sum- 
mer. It  has  also  a  disagreeable  subsoil,  making 
it  wet  and  unfit  to  work  at  an  early  day  in  spring. 
Clay  is  the  most  troublesome  of  all  soils  for  vege- 
table-gardening. To  make  it  suitable  for  a  Gar- 
den, it  must  be  thoroughly  drained,  and  highly 
manured,  in  order  to  change,  if  possible,  its  nature, 
that  it  may  become  gradually  loose  and  rich.  Some 
clay  soils  will  never  make  ground  fit  for  a  Kitchen- 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  273 

garden,  and  such  places  should  bo  carefully  avoided, 
when  selecting  a  garden-spot.  Where  no  other  soil 
is  to  be  got,  it  will  be  found  necessary  to  take 
the  original  ground  out  of  the  beds,  to  the  depth 
of  one  or  two  feet,  and  replace  it  with  better  soil. 


MANURE. 

Whatever  be  the  quality  of  the  soil,  it  can  not 
be  expected  to  yield  Vegetables  for  a  succession  of 
years,  without  being  frequently  manured,  to  renew  its 
strength.  Eich,  sandy  loam,  requires  less  manure 
than  the  poorer  clay  soil.  The  gardener  should 
never  be  afraid  of  making  his  ground  too  rich ; 
he  may  put  on  it,  perhaps,  too  much  manure  at  one 
time,  yet  he  can  not  give  too  much  strength  to 
his  ground.  The  manure,  when  it  is  put  on  the 
land,  should  be  well  rotted,  especially  in  spring, 
when  the  operation  of  planting  or  sowing  follows 
immediately  after  manuring  and  tilling.  In  fall 
or  early  winter,  almost  any  kind  of  manure  will 
do,  as  it  will  rot  during  winter,  when  under  ground. 
To  manure  the  land  in  fall,  after  the  crops  are 
taken  off,  and  to  work  the  manure  under  by  a  deep 


274  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

tillage,  is  undoubtedly  the  best  plan  to  prepare  the 
ground  for  raising  Vegetables.  Cow  manure  is  con- 
sidered the  richest,  yet  well-rotted  horse  manure, 
when  applied  in  sufficient  quantity,  will  answer  as 
well.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  set  up  piles  of  manure 
and  earth,  in  alternate  layers  of  nine  to  twelve 
inches  deep,  each,  working  these  over  after  laying 
for  three  or  four  months,  and  taking  pains  to 
thoroughly  mix  the  ground  and  manure.  Let  them 
then  remain  for  a  space  of  time  again,  and  the 
whole  heap  will  be  found  a  most  excellent  fer- 
tilizer. Such  piles  of  compost  should  be  found 
in  every   Kitchen-garden. 


TILLAGE. 

It  is  necessary  to  work  the  ground  of  the  Kitchen- 
garden  with  much  precaution  and  care  ;  the  suc- 
cess of  the  crops  depends,  in  great  measure,  on 
proper  tillage  in  spring.  The  ground  should  on 
no  account  whatever,  be  touched  in  spring,  before 
it  is  sufficiently  dry  to  be  worked  with  advantage. 
Sandy  and  loamy  soils  arrive  at  this  state  much 
earlier   than   clay  soil,  which   generally  can  not   be 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  275 

worked  under  a  fortnight  later.  If  clay  soil  is 
worked  wet,  in  spring,  it  may  be  considered  spoiled, 
often  being  almost  useless  for  tlie  whole  season. 
The  ground,  when  taken  up  with  the  spade,  should 
break  and  divide  freely,  and  while  it  has  any  ten- 
dency  to   stiffness,  it   is   not   fit   to   be   worked. 

Gardens  of  smaller  extent  are  best  tilled  with 
the  spade ;  the  ground  must  receive  a  deej)  and 
careful  spading,  and  must  be  made  sufficiently  fine 
on  the  surface,  with  the  rake,  to  receive  either 
seed  or  plants.  Larger  gardens,  affording  suffi- 
cient room  for  operation  with  the  plow  and  har- 
row, are  cheapest  worked  in  this  way.  In  plow- 
ing ground  for  the  Vegetable-garden,  it  is  impor- 
tant, to  run  the  furrows  as  narrow  as  possible,  to 
make  the  ground  finer.  In  heavier  soils,  where 
the  ground  breaks  in  large  lumps,  it  is  necessary 
to  run  the  plow  twice,  and  even  three  times,  till 
the  earth  is  made  fine  enough  for  garden  purposes. 
The  harrow  must  then  pulverize  the  lumps  and 
clods.  After  harrowing,  a  heavy  plank,  four  feet 
in  length  and  two  or  three  feet  broad,  should  be 
used.  The  horses  are  hitched  to  this,  and,  the 
driver    standing   on    the    plank,    it   is   carried    over 


276  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

the  field,  leveling  all  inequalities,  and  completely 
pulverizing  the  soil  wherever  it  goes  over  it.  Where 
the  process  of  plowing,  harrowing,  and  afterward 
smoothing,  as  above  described,  is  carefully  performed, 
the  ground  will  be  found  in  every  respect  suited 
to  the  wants  of  the  gardener,  and  at  much  less 
cost  than  if  it  had  been  worked  with  spade  and  rake. 
A  common  field  or  pasture,  when  about  to  be 
turned  into  a  Vegetable-garden,  should  be  dug 
with  a  spade,  two  spades  deep;  or,  where  the  plow 
is  used,  a  heavy  subsoil  plow  must  follow  the  com- 
mon plow,  to  deepen  the  furrows  and  break  up  the 
lower  stratum  of  soil.  Deep  plowing  and  spading 
are  much  opposed  by  some  practical  men,  but  there 
is  nothing  more  certain  than  the  fact,  that  they 
form  the  most  important  item  in  the  cultivation 
of  ground,  for  purposes  either  of  agriculture  or 
horticulture. 


WEEDING     AND     CLEANING. 

No  Vegetable-garden  can  be  expected  to  be 
successful,  if  the  plants,  while  young  and  tender, 
are  left   to   shift   for   themselves.      They   must,   by 


THE   VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  277 

all  means,  be  kept  entirely  clear  of  weeds,  and 
the  ground  around  tlieni  should  be  frequently  well 
stirred  and  loosened  round  the  roots,  during  the 
time  they  are  growing.  Only  a  few  fast-growing 
species  of  Vegetables,  as  Eadishes,  Turnips  and 
Wintergreens,  are  sown  broad-cast.  All  the  more 
important  kinds  must  be  sown  or  planted  in  rows 
or  drills,  that  they  may  be  more  easily  tended. 
In  eradicating  weeds  from  the  soil,  it  is  worth 
while  to  remember,  that  much  wearisome  labor  will 
be  saved  if  weeds  are  carefully  destroyed  when  they 
first  appear  above  ground.  If  neglected  at  that 
time,  and  allowed  to  shoot  up  with  the  Vegetables, 
they  will  not  only  take  from  the  latter  a  portion 
of  the  juice  which  should  properly  go  to  nourish 
them,  but  it  will  bo  found  a  matter  involving  much 
labor  to  destroy  them  afterward,  without  injury  to 
the  crops.  It  should  be  made  a  rule,  that  on  the 
first  appearance  of  weeds,  the  entire  Garden  should 
be  gone  over  thoroughly  to  destroy  them;  and  this 
will  be  found  the  cheapest,  in  the  end,  even  where 
a  large  force  has  to  be  engaged  for  the  purpose. 
It  is  certain  that  this  is  the  only  way  in  which  a 
satisfactory   crop   can   be   obtained. 


278  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

The  ground  between  tlie  rows  should  he  deeply 
and  thoroughly  hoed  after  the  weeds  are  destroyed, 
thus  giving  the  young  plants  a  chance  to  spread 
their  roots,  and  rapidly  gain  strength.  If  these 
directions  concerning  hoeing  and  weeding  are  strictly 
followed  up,  there  will  be  but  little  after  trouble 
about  weeds,  or  loosening  the  ground.  If,  on  the 
contrary,  through  unwise  haste,  the  work  is  done 
but  imperfectly  at  first,  all  future  operations  will 
involve  much  more  labor,  and  after  all,  the  crops 
will  be  retarded,  and  yield  returns  not  at  all  equal 
to  those  of  ground  carefully  tended  from  the  be- 
ginning. 

In  small  Gardens,  for  family  use,  hoeing  and 
cleaning  is  done  by  hand.  On  more  extensive 
tracts,  the  Hoe-Tiarrow  or  Cultivator  is  used.  The 
best  pattern  of  Cultivators  now  made,  is  manufac- 
tured in  Louisville,  Ky.,  by  the  inventor,  Mr. 
Briscoe.  His  machines  are  by  far  the  best  ever 
offered   for   sale   in   the   West. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  in  Kitchen-Gard- 
ening, to  use  none  but  the  very  best  of  seed.  But 
unfortunately,  it  is  a  matter  of  much  difficulty, 
sometimes,  to   obtain    seed    in    such    perfection    as  is 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  279 

to  be  wislied.  Tlie  seed  sold  in  seedstores  is  not 
always  found  to  be  what  it  is  sold  for,  and  in 
fact  no  man  can  be  sure  of  wbat  he  purchases 
in  this  line,  unless  he  deals  with  a  man,  either 
grower  or  seller,  of  known  probity.  The  estab- 
lishment of  David  Landreth  &  Co.,  Philadelphia,  is 
one  of  the  best  known  and  most  trustworthy  in  the 
country,  and  seeds  obtained  there,  are  perfectly 
reliable. 

The  cheapest,  and  by  long  odds  the  surest  way  of 
obtaining  seed,  is  to  raise  it  on  the  grounds,  or  by 
the  persons  intending  to  use  it.  Of  the  method  of 
doing  this,  in  various  plants,  we  shall  speak  far- 
ther on. 

Most  of  the  ordinary  vegetables  must  be  sown 
or  planted  every  year.  A  few,  however,  if  once  well 
established  in  the  ground,  will  last  for  years.  The 
most  important  of  these  are  Asparagus,  Ehubarb 
and  Artichokes. 


ASPARAGUS. 
Asparagus    is  a    quite    well  known    and   highly 
esteemed  Vegetable.      It  varies  much  in  strength  of 
growth,  according  to  the  soil   in  which  it   is    grown. 


280  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE  GARDENENG. 

Substantial,  loamy  soil  is  the  best  adapted  for  it. 
It  can  not  he  too  ricJily  manured.  To  raise  a  bed 
of  Asparagus,  tbe  seed  should  be  sown  thinly,  in 
drills,  after  being  soaked  for  a  few  days  in  water. 
If  the  young  plants  are  afterward  kept  clear  of 
weeds,  and  the  ground  well  hoed  about  them,  they 
will  obtain  sufficient  strength  during  the  first  year 
to  bear  setting  out,  the  second  spring,  into  the 
beds  in  which  they  are  to  remain.  Plants  of  one 
or  two  year's  old  are,  however,  generally  to  be 
found  for  sale  in  the  seedstores;  and  in  raising 
Asparagus  for  table  use,  it  is  best  to  purchase  of 
these,  thus  saving  a  year's  growth  and  attention, 
which  would  otherwise  be  lost.  The  patch  or  bed 
into  which  Asparagus  is  to  be  transplanted,  should 
be  prepared  with  great  care.  The  most  conveni- 
ent size  for  beds  is,  from  four  to  five  feet  wide, 
and  as  long  as  desired.  In  these  beds,  the  ground 
should  be  very  deeply  dug  (trenched),  and  profusely 
manured.  To  throw  rotten  wood  and  decayed  vege- 
table matter  of  any  kind  as  a  bottom  layer,  into 
the  bed,  will  be  found  useful.  In  short,  the  richer, 
deeper  and  mellower  the  ground  is  made,  the  more 
luxuriant    and    tender  will  the  Asparagus    be.      The 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  281 

plants  should  not  be  set  out  until  just  as  they 
begin  to  push  or  give  evidence  of  returning  life, 
in  spring.  This  should  be  carefully  attended  to, 
in  order  to  make  them  uniform  in  coming  up.  They 
are  set  four  or  five  inches  deep  iu  the  ground,  in 
rows  twelve  inches  apart  both  ways.  The  beds  must 
be  filled  every  winter  anew,  with  manure  and  earth, 
that  the  roots  may  be  always  six  inches  below  the 
surface.  In  the  spring,  the  beds  should  be  well 
dug  with  a  fork,  not  with  a  spade.  A  layer  of 
salt  applied  to  the  surface  of  the  beds,  in  spring, 
is   highly   beneficial   to   the   plants. 


RHUBARB,     OR     PIE-PLANT. 

The  foot-stalk  of  the  leaf  of  Ehubarb,  or  Pie- 
plant, is  used  in  the  kitchen,  and  is  highly  esteemed 
as  an  esculent.  There  are  several  varieties,  which 
bear  different  names  in  various  places.  A  small 
variety,  with  purple  tinted  foot-stalks,  is  the  earliest 
in  spring.  The  Victoria,  a  variety  lately  intro- 
duced, is  the  largest  and  most  esteemed  of  all. 
The  root  of  the  Ehubarb  may  be  divided  into  as 
many  diiferent  parts  as  there  are  eyes,  each  of 
which  will  grow,  if  planted  out.     When  it  is  desired 


282  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

to  raise  tliem  from  seed,  this  sliould  be  sown  in 
good  ground  in  tlie  garden,  or  better  yet,  early  in 
the  spring,  in  hotbeds.  They  may  then  be  trans- 
planted or  set  out  during  the  summer.  Beds  for 
Ehubarb  may  be  placed  in  any  part  of  the  Gar- 
den, where  the  soil  is  not  so  wet  as  to  rot  the  roots 
in  winter.  The  beds  should  be  well  manured,  when 
first  used,  and  afterward  every  winter.  The  richer 
the  ground  is  made,  the  finer  will  be  the  plants. 


ARTICHOKE. 

The  Artichoke  is  a  vegetable  but  little  sought  for 
or  even  known  in  this  country.  It  is  not  quite  hardy 
with  us,  and  requires  to  be  well  protected  from 
the  frosts  and  moisture  of  winter,  which  are  apt 
to  destroy  the  plants.  The  part  mostly  used,  is 
the  pulpy  receptacle  in  the  fiower-heads,  termed  the 
bottom,  which  must  be  freed  from  the  pistils  or 
seed-down. 


ANNUAL    VEGETABLES, 

Or  those  which  may  be  sown  every  spring,  we 
have  arranged  below,  in  regard  to  their  uses,  in 
three  classes.      First,  those  of  which  the  fruits  are 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  283 

used;  Second,  those  of  which  the  leaves  and  stems 
are  used ;  and  third,  those  of  which  the  roots  are 
used. 

Under  the  first  division  come  Peas,  Beans,  Mel- 
ons, Cucumbers,  Squashes,  Tomato,  Okra,  Egg-plant, 
Pepper   and    Sugar-Corn. 

In  the  second  division  we  have  Cabbage,  Cau- 
liflower, Winter-greens  (Kale,  Spinach  and  Turnip- 
greens),  Sorrel,  Parsley,  Celery,  Lettuce,  Chervil, 
Endive   and    Cresses. 

The  third  division  comprises  the  Eadish,  Beet, 
Parsnip,  Turnip,  Salsify,  Carrot,  Onion  and  common 
and   Sweet  Potatoe. 


BEANS. 

Of  these  there  are  two  distinct  varieties ;  the 
Dwarf  or  ^us7i-Beans,  and  the  Running  or  Pole 
Beans.  The  best  varieties  of  Bush-Beans  are  the 
Early  Six-Weelcs  Bean  —  the  earliest  variety  known  ; 
the  Speckled  Valentine  Bean,  the  most  productive ; 
and  the    China   Red-Eye,   a   very   good  variety. 

It  is  not  well  to  plant  Beans  too  early  in 
spring,  as  they  are  tender  when  young,  and  liable 
to    be    killed    by    frost.      In     planting,    they    arc 


284  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENINa. 

dropped  in  drills,  two  or  three  Beans  together, 
and  ten  or  twelve  inches  apart.  The  drills  should 
be  twenty-four  inches  apart.  The  seed  is  covered 
with  ground  to  the  depth  of  an  inch.  When  they 
come  up,  it  is  generally  necessary  to  thin  them 
out,  in  order  to  give  those  that  are  left,  more 
room  to  grow.  The  space  allotted  to  them  in  the 
Garden  should  not  all  be  planted  at  the  same 
time,  but  at  intervals  of  a  week,  or  two  weeks, 
whereby  there  will  be  provided  a  constant  succes- 
sion of  green  Beans.  The  Snap-Bean  (Valentine), 
may  be  planted  at  difterent  times  during  the  sum- 
mer, as  it  stands  the  heat  better  than  any  other 
kind.  The  soil,  for  Beans,  should  be  well  manured, 
in  order  to  bring  them  to  perfection  in  the  least 
possible   time. 

Pole  Beans  are  used  either  shelled,  as  the  Lima 
Bean,  or  green,  as  the  White  Dutch,  the  Wren's- 
Egg  Bean,  and  other  varieties.  The  Lima  Bean  is 
planted  in  hills,  five  feet  apart,  each  way.  It  is 
a  rapid,  strong  grower,  and  requires  strong  poles. 
The  soil  should  not  be  too  rich,  as,  if  so,  it  has 
a  tendency  to  run  to  vines  instead  of  pods.  The 
other    varieties    of    pole    Beans,    used    green,  ..may 


THE   VEGtETABLE-GARKEN.  285 

be  planted  in  hills,  three  feet  apart  each  way. 
They  are  not  of  so  strong  growth  as  the  Lima 
Beans ;  are  often  planted  with  corn,  and  when 
raised  alone,  do  not  need  such  stout  poles  as  the 
Lima  Bean. 


PEAS. 

There  is  an  endless  variety  of  this  family.  The 
earliest,  and  those  producing  the  largest  seeds,  are 
the  most  esteemed.  The  Landreth's  Extra  Early, 
is  known  everywhere  to  be  the  earliest  of  all 
Peas.  Early  Frames  are  from  eight  to  ten  days 
later  than  the  Extra  Early.  For  a  later  supply 
than  these  afford,  it  is  best  to  plant  the  very 
largest  varieties,  called  the  Marrmvfat.  These  are 
either  dwarf  or  higher  growing.  TJie  Blue  Impe- 
rial Dwarf  is    an   extremely  sweet   variety. 

Peas  are  sown  in  rows,  which  are  laid  off,  two 
together,  and  three  feet  apart.  The  peas  are  sown 
tolerably  thick  in  the  drills,  and  should  be  covered 
with  well-rotted  manure,  finely  pulverized,  to  pro- 
tect them  from  severe  frost.  They  are  supported 
by  brush,  firmly  sunk  in  the  ground,  along  the 
rows.       They    may   be    sown    as    early  in    spring    as 


286  PKACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GAKDENING. 

the  ground  can  be  worked,  as  they  are  hardy  when 
once  out  of  the  ground.  When  hoeing  them,  it 
is  best  to  hill  the  ground  along  the  roots  and 
stems.  The  early  and  late  varieties  are  sown  at 
the  same  time,  and  form  a  natural  succession.  The 
Uarly  Frame  may  be  sown  at  different  intervals, 
in  smaller  quantities,  to  have  a  continuous  succes- 
sion. The  ground  for  the  early  varieties  should 
be  rich;  the  Marrowfat  peas  being  strong  growers, 
do   not   bear   well   if  planted   in   too   rich   soil. 


0  K  K  A, 

Is  a  vegetable  highly  esteemed  by  many  per- 
sons, as  an  ingredient  in  soups  and  stews.  The 
seed  is  planted  in  drills,  the  plants  ten  or  twelve 
inches  apart  in  the  row.  The  drills  should  be 
two  or  three  feet  apart.  The  beginning  of  May 
is  the  best  time  to  sow  the  seed,  which  should  be 
put  thickly  in  the  ground,  as  only  part  of  it  is 
likely  to  come  up.  It  requires,  like  all  other 
vegetables,  careful  tending,  while  growing.  The 
soil   can    not   be   made   too   rich   for   it. 


THE   VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  287 


TOMATO. 


This  is  one  of  the  most  liiglily-esteemed  Vege- 
tables to  Le  found  in  the  American  Kitchen-garden. 
There  are  several  varieties :  The  Large  Red,  bear- 
ing the  finest  fruit,  the  Large  Yellow,  and  the 
small  Pear  or  Cherry-shaped  variety.  It  grows 
without  difficulty  in  almost  any  soil.  For  an  early 
supply,  as  soon  as  warm  weather  has  set  in  (about 
the  first  of  May,  in  an  average  season),  the  plants 
may  be  set  out  in  the  open  air,  from  hotbeds, 
where  they  may  be  raised  to  great  size.  They 
are  transplanted  without  diflBculty,  and  should  be 
five  or  six  feet  apart  each  way.  A  warm,  shel- 
tered spot,  should  be  picked  out  for  early  Tomatoes. 
For  a  late  supply,  seed  is  sown  in  the  beginning 
of  May,  and  the  plants  are  afterward  set  out  in 
beds.  The  Tomato  bears  best  in  rather  poor  soil; 
in  rich  ground  it  is  apt  to  run  to  vines.  The 
vines  are  commonly  allowed  to  run  along  the  sur- 
face of  the  gi'ound,  although  some  gardeners  think 
best  to  train  them  on  brushwood  —  either  Avay  will 
do  well. 


288  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

EGG-PLANT. 

With  many  this  vegetahle  is  a  great  favorite. 
It  is  no  rarity  in  our  markets.  The  seed  should 
be  sown  in  a  hotbed,  and  started  there  to  the 
hight  of  ten  or  twelve  inches.  The  plants,  when 
young,  require  considerable  heat  to  bring  them  on. 
They  should  not  therefore  be  planted  out  before 
the  middle  or  end  of  May.  They  will  only  come 
to  perfection  in  the  very  richest  ground.  Planted 
out,  they  should  stand  in  rows  two  feet  apart  each 
way. 

PEPPERS. 

These  are  principally  used  for  pickling.  The 
different  varieties  bear  fruits  varying  in  size.  The 
Large  Sweet  is  the  most  highly  thought  of.  There 
is  another  species  much  resembling  this,  but  of 
inferior  quality,  called  the  Bullnose  Pepper.  The 
variety  bearing  long  pods  is  called  the  Cayenne. 
The  plants  should  be  started  from  the  seeds,  in  a 
hotbed,  and  planted  out  in  the  garden  in  the 
beginning  of  May.  The  seed  may  also  be  sown,  in 
a  warm  border,  in  the  open  air,  late  in  spring,  and 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  289 

when  they  sprout,  tlie  plants  are  thinned  out  to 
the  proper  quantity.  Peppers  require  a  rich  soil 
to   attain   perfection. 


MELONS. 


The  Citron  and  Nutmeg,  are  the  two  favorite 
varieties  of  the  Sugar  or  Muskraelon ;  the  Caro- 
lina and  Mountain  Sprout,  the  two  choicest  kinds 
of  Watermelons.  In  planting,  the  seeds  are  laid 
in  hills,  from  six  to  twelve  in  a  hill,  these  being 
laid  off  in  squares  of  four  feet.  When  the  plants 
have  got  fairly  started,  they  should  be  thinned  out 
to  four  in  each  hill.  The  beginning  of  May  is 
the  time  to  plant  Melons.  The  roots  of  this  plant 
run  near  the  surface,  and  it  is  therefore  an  advan- 
tage to  surround  the  stems  with  fine  ""round,  that 
the  roots  may  have  an  opportunity  to  spread.  Care 
must  be  taken,  in  hoeing,  that  none  of  the  roots 
are  cut  or  destroyed.  Early  plants  may  be  started 
in  a  hotbed,  where  the  seed  may  be  planted  in 
small  flower-pots,  or  on  little  pieces  of  sod,  and 
set  out  in  the    garden,  in   a  warm    place,  about  the 

middle  of  May.      The   Melon  tribe  requires   a  well- 
25 


290  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

manured,  rich,  but  liglit  soil  —  sandy  loam  is  pecu- 
liarly suitable   to  tbem. 


CUCUMBER. 


There  is  but  one  kind  worth  growing,  the  Long 
Green.  The  Early  Frame  may  be  some  little  earlier 
than  the  Long  Green,  yet  the  fruit  is  not  near  so 
large.  The  mode  of  raising  the  Cucumber  is  similar 
to  that  stated  for  Melons.  It  is  to  be  remarked, 
that  in  many  parts  of  the  country  the  young  plants 
of  Cucumbers,  Muskmelons,  and  Squashes,  are  fre- 
quently destroyed  by  swarms  of  small  yellow  bugs, 
called  by  gardeners  the  Cucumber  Bug.  Whore 
these  bugs  prevail,  the  only  way  to  save  the  plants 
from  destruction,  is  to  set  a  box,  made  of  rough 
boards,  twelve  inches  square,  over  every  hill,  before 
the  seed  has  sprouted.  A  piece  of  fine  musquito- 
bar  muslin  is  lightly  nailed  over  the  box  :  the 
four  sides  of  the  box  are  then  well  surrounded 
with  fine  earth.  Thus  the  plants  are  protected, 
till  strong  enough  to  resist  the  enemy.  For  pick- 
ling. Cucumbers  are  planted  in  the  middle  of 
summer. 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  291 

SQUASH, 

The  best  variety  of  the  Squash  is  the  Early 
Bush.  Its  culture  is  similar  to  that  of  the  cucum- 
ber. The  Squash  and  Pumpkin  should  be  at  a 
distance  from  the  Muskmelon  beds,  as  they  are 
apt   to   deteriorate   the   choicer   sorts   of  melons. 


THE    PUMPKIN. 

The  culture  of  the  Pumpkin  is  extremely  simple. 
Lay  the  seed  in  hills,  in  the  month  of  May,  in 
rich  ground,  and  keep  the  weeds  down  for  some 
time,  till  the  plants  are  fairly  started ;  the  balance 
they  will  accomplish  themselves.  Pumpkins  are 
very   frequently   raised   with   corn. 


SWEET    CORN. 


The  Evergreeii  Sugar,  and  Sweet  Sugar,  are  the 
earliest  kinds,  and  most  valuable  for  table  use. 
It  is  planted  in  hills,  two  and  a  half  feet  apart, 
each  way,  and  must  be  frequently  worked.  Three 
or    four    plants    in    one    hill    are    sufficient.       It    is 


292  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

a  fact  well   known   among   farmers,  that  the   richer 
the   land,  the   better    the   corn. 


CABBAGE. 

Early  York,  is  the  earliest  kind  known.  The 
Large  York  and  Early  Sugai^-loaf  are  some  later, 
but  of  larger  size.  The  Large  Drumhead,  and  Flat 
Butch,  are  the  choicest  later  kinds,  generally  raised 
for  winter  use.  The  Ch^een  Curled  Savoy,  and  Red 
Dutch,  are  very  good  late  varieties  also.  The  seed 
of  the  earlier  kinds  should  be  sown  under  glass, 
after  New  Year,  or  under  some  kind  of  shelter, 
at  the  end  of  February.  It  is  necessary  to  sow 
at  the  same  time  some  of  the  late  Drumhead  also, 
to  have  an  uninterrupted  succession.  The  plants, 
raised  under  glass  to  a  strong  size,  are  planted 
out  at  the  end  of  IMarcli  or  beginning  of  April. 
The  earlier  kinds  may  be  set  two  feet  apart  in 
the  row,  the  rows  being  two  and  a  half  feet  from 
each  other.  The  late  Drumhead  should  be  planted 
three  feet  apart  each  way.  For  later  use  the  seed 
of  the  Flat  Dutch  and  Drumhead  is  sown,  early 
in    the    spring,    in    a    warm    spot    in    the    Garden. 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  293 

This  later  sowing  may  be  repeated  during  spring, 
to  liave  a  good  supply  of  plants  for  winter  use. 
It  is  better  to  proyide,  early  in  the  spring,  for  a 
great  quantity  of  plants,  as  further  on  the  young 
plants  are  often  destroyed  by  the  Cabhage-Jiy.  There 
is   no    sure   preyention    of   this    plague. 

Cabbage  requires  a  well-tilled  and  very  heavily- 
manured  soil,  to  come  to  satisfactory  perfection,  espe- 
cially the  earlier  kinds.  It  should  be  well  hoed 
and    weeded. 

The  Turnip-rooted  Cabbage,  a  favorite  Vegetable 
with  many  persons,  is  treated  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  common  Cabbage ;  it  may  also  be  planted 
for   early,  as    well    as    for   winter   use. 


CAULIFLOWER, 

Is  one  of  the  choicest  Vegetables  known.  Its 
success  in  open  air  is  very  uncertain  in  the  western 
and  middle  states,  owing  to  the  dry  heats  of  early 
summer.  In  the  eastern  states  the  climate  is  more 
favorable  to  it.  It  requires  a  moist,  temperate 
atmosphere  to  come  to  perfection.  Burning  heat 
or  drought   is  sure  destruction   to   it.       The  plants 


294  PRACTICAL    LAjS'DSCAPE   GARDENING. 

sliould  be  raised  over  winter  in  cold-beds,  yet  under 
protection  from  the  severe  cold  of  tlie  season.  Good 
sized  plants  should  be  planted  out  at  an  early 
period  in  the  spring ;  in  case  of  severe  frost  they 
must  be  protected  with  litter  or  boxes.  Cauliflower 
can  only  be  raised  in  the  best  and  richest  ground. 
The  plants,  set  out  in  cold-beds,  and  under  glass, 
in  February,  being  fairly  started  till  spring,  and 
freely  watered,  are  much  more  apt  to  form  fine 
heads,  than  those  planted  in  the  Garden.  There 
are  two  varieties :  the  early  Asiatic  Caulifloiver,  gen- 
erally used  for  an  early  crop,  and  the  Late  Butch, 
best  adapted  for  fall  use.  For  fall  use  the  seed 
is  sown  in  spring,  in  the  Garden,  and  transplanted 
like  late  cabbage.  If  the  heads  are  not  formed 
in  fall,  the  plants  are  interred  like  cabbage,  and 
frequently  form   fine   heads   during   winter. 


BROCCOLI, 

Is  a  vegetable  similar  to  the  cauliflower,  and 
grown  in  the  same  manner.  It  is  a  more  certain 
crop  than  cauliflower,  when  planted  in  summer  for 
winter   use. 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  295 


GREENS, 


German  Dtvarf- Greens,  or  Kale,  Turnip  Greens, 
and  Spinac-h,  are  sown  broadcast,  on  rich  ground, 
in  the  latter  part  of  summer  and  early  fall.  They 
should  attain  strength  enough,  before  frost,  to  resist 
the  cold  of  winter.  They  are  used  in  winter  and 
spring  for  Greens.  The  Cabbage-fly  frequently  de- 
stroys the  young  plants  when  coming  up,  in  con- 
sequence of  which  it  is  often  necessary  to  sow  the 
ground  over  again.  In  early  spring,  Kale  and 
Spinach  are  sown,  to  have  a  fair  supply  of  Greens 
till   the   early   Cabbage   comes   on. 


LETTUCE, 

Is  the  most  esteemed  Vegetable  for  Salad.  There 
are  many  varieties  cultivated.  The  Early  Curled 
Indian,  and  Royal  Cabbage  are  the  most  valuable 
sorts.  It  is  sown  in  hotbeds  during  winter,  where 
good  sized  plants  are  raised.  In  IMarch  it  may  be 
transplanted  into  a  warm,  well-manured  border  of 
the  Garden ;  for  a  later  crop,  some  seed  should  be 
sown    in    the    Garden,    and    when    strong    enough. 


296  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

transplanted.  The  plants  are  set  twelve  inches 
apart,  each  way.  Spring  is  the  only  season  for 
Lettuce;  as  soon  as  hot  weather  sets  in,  it  goes 
to  seed,  and  becomes  very  hitter  and  unwholesome. 
For  a  late  supply,  some  little  seed  may  he  sown 
in  early  fall.  Lettuce  is  a  good  plant  to  raise 
under   glass,  to  have  a  fair   supply  in  early  spring. 


ENDIVE, 

Is  raised  for  Salad,  for  fall  and  winter  use. 
The  curled  white  and  green  kinds  are  generally  used. 
The  hroad-leaved  Scarolle  is  a  very  good  variety, 
but  is  little  known  in  this  country.  The  Endive 
is  sown  in  spring  and  midsummer,  in  drills  ;  when 
an  inch  or  two  high,  it  is  thinned  out  to  stand 
a  foot  apart.  Its  leaves  naturally  lie  flat  on  the 
ground,  and  it  must  therefore  he  tied  up  to  bleach. 
It  can  be  preserved  a  long  time  in  water,  in  a 
cellar,  under  the  staging  of  a  greenhouse,  or  in 
a  cold   frame   under   glass. 

Cress  is  an  herb  of  little  value,  generally  used 
for  small  Salad.  The  seed  is  sown  thickly,  in 
drills;  when  two  or  three  inches  high,  it  is  cut 
off  close    to    the    ground. 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  .  297 

SORREL, 

Is  used  for  Salad,  or  as  greens.  The  seed  may 
be  sown  in  drills,  and  when  sprouted,  thinned  out. 
Full-grown  roots  may  he  taken  up  in  the  fall  and 
spring,  and  divided,  thus  propagating  it.  It  stands 
over   winter,    and    endures    for    many    years. 

Ohervil  is,  like  the  Cress,  of  little  value,  ex- 
cept  for   Salad.      It  is   sown    in    spring,    in    drills. 


PARSLEY, 

Is  sown  in  spring,  in  drills.  The  Double  Curled 
is  far  preferable  to  the  single-leafed  variety.  Roots 
of  Parsley  are  often  taken  up  in  the  fall  and  planted 
in  a  frame,  under  glass,  where  they  furnish  a  sup- 
ply  of  green   leaves   during   winter. 


CELERY, 

Should  be  sown  early  in  spring,  in  shallow 
drills ;  the  seed,  being  very  fine,  is  to  be  covered 
but  slightly.  The  young  plants,  also  being  small, 
must  be  carefully  Aveeded  and  otherwise  tended.  As 
they    grow    up,    they    should    be    frequently    hoed. 


298  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

Moisture  is  the  life  of  Celery ;  if  tlie  ground  is 
dry,  tlie  plant  must  be  frequently  watered.  In 
midsummer  tliey  should  be  transplanted  in  single 
or  double  rows,  ten  inches  from  each  other.  The 
rows  should  be  seven  feet  apart.  Some  gardeners 
make  ditches,  six  or  eight  inches  deep,  manuring 
the  bottom,  and  plant  the  Celery  in ;  as  it  grows 
up,  the  ditch  is  gradually  filled  up.  Others  make 
the  ditch  but  three  inches  deep,  hilling  the  ground 
around  the  plants  with  the  spade ;  the  latter  way 
is  preferable.  K  the  weather  is  very  hot  and  dry, 
the  plants  should  be  often  watered  and  shaded,  in 
the  hottest  hours  of  the  day,  else  they  are  likely 
to  burn  out.  In  the  hottest  time,  the  ground  should 
not  be  hilled  around  the  stalks ;  this  is  best  done 
after  a  shower,  yet  never,  as  long  as  the  leaves  or 
stalks  are  wet  from  rain  or  dew.  Neglect  of  this, 
causes  rust  on  the  stalks,  which  should  be  white  and 
clean.  In  October,  the  weather  is  generally  favor- 
able for  the  growth  of  Celery,  the  nights  being  cool 
and  moist.  The  ground  is  gradually  hilled  around 
the  plants  as  they  advance.  For  winter  use,  Celery 
must  be  well  secured  from  too  severe  frosts.  A 
substantial  dam    should   be  raised   on   both    sides  of 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  299 

tlie  row,  fully  as  liigli  as  the  outside  leaves;  the 
leaves,  however,  should  not  be  entirely  hilled  in  by 
the  ground.  The  top  of  the  ridge,  thus  formed,  is 
then  covered  with  straw  or  litter,  over  which  a  board 
is  laid,  to  turn  the  water  off  from  the  center  of  the 
stalks.  Secured  in  this  way,  the  stalks  stand  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  cold  without  being  injured.  A 
very  rich  and  substantial  soil  is  required  to  bring 
Celery  to  perfection.  A  moist  situation  is  far  pref- 
erable  to    a    dry    one. 


RADISH. 

The  best  varieties  for  spring  use,  are  the  Turnip- 
rooted  Bed  and  White,  the  Long  Scarlet,  and  Yel- 
low Turnip-rooted.  For  summer  and  fall,  the  White 
and  Black  Spanish  are  preferable.  The  early  kinds 
are  sown  broadcast,  in  the  very  beginning  of  spring. 
They  are  quick,  hardy,  and  easily  withstand  the 
later  frosts,  if  not  too  severe.  A  fine,  loose,  and 
very  rich  soil  is  required  to  bring  them  on,  at  an 
early  day  of  spring. 

The  Long  Scarlet,  the  best  kind  for  table  use, 
is  sown   at   intervals  of  a  week,  during   spring.     It 


300  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

does  not  stand  long  in  the  hot  days  of  summer, 
without  going  to  seed;  and  consequently,  being  unfit 
for  use. 

The  Yellow  Turnip-i'ooted  is  sown  as  early  as 
possible  in  the  spring,  and  follows  the  Red  Scarlet. 
It  is  the  best  Eadish  for  late  spring  use.  For  fall 
and  winter  use,  sow  the  White  Summer,  or  White 
Spanish,   at   any  time  during  summer. 


BE  ET. 

There  is  a  quite  early  variety  —  Landreth's  Extra 
Early.  The  color  of  the  root  varies  from  yellow 
to  red.  The  Early  Tiiryiip-rooted  Red,  is  of  a  dark, 
purplish    color ;    this    is    quite    early,    also. 

The  Long  Blood-Red,  is  most  preferred  for  win- 
ter use.  Good  seed  is  very  important,  for  success 
in  growing  Beets.  There  is  much  bad  seed  sold. 
The  early  kinds  are  sown  early  in  spring,  at  inter- 
vals of  a  week,  as  the  young  plants  frequently  suffer 
from  later  frost.  For  winter  supply,  the  seed  is 
sown  some  time  during  May.  The  seed  should  be 
sown  in  drills,  thick  enough  to  secure  a  full 
crop.      The  drills  should  be  twelve  inches  apart,  for 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  301 

culture  witli  the  lioe;  for  culture  witli  the  Cultiva- 
tor, the  drills  require  to  he  two  feet  apart.  As  the 
plants  grow  up,  they  are  thinned  out,  to  stand  six 
inches  apart  in  the  row.  Careful  hoeing  is  required 
for  the  early  crop.  The  ground  must  he  constantly 
loose  around  the  roots.  Eich  ground  is  necessary 
to  ohtain  a  satisfactory  crop. 


TURNIP. 

For  table  use  there  are  hut  two  varieties  worth 
growing  —  the  Flat  Butch  and  the  Red-topped.  For 
spring  use,  the  seed  should  he  sown  as  early  as 
possible  in  spring,  in  drills.  When  an  inch  high, 
they  should  he  thinned  out.  The  spring  crop  is 
very  uncertain,  owing  to  heat  and  drought,  as  well 
as  to  the  cahhage-fly.  For  fall  and  winter  use, 
sow  broadcast,  at  different  times,  late  in  summer, 
in  good  and  loose  ground.  Care  should  be  taken 
not  to  sow  too  thickly. 


CARROT. 

There  are  two  varieties    grown    in    gardens :    the 
Early    Horn    and    Long   Orange.       The    Early    Horn 


302  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

is  quite  early,  wlien  well  attended  and  in  rich 
ground. 

Parsnip.       Sugar   Parsnip. 

Salsify.       Oyster-plant.       Scorz&nere. 

These  three  species  of  Vegetahles  are  similar 
in  culture  and  use.  They  are  sown  early  in 
spring,  in  drills,  the  drills  twelve  inches  apart. 
When  up,  they  are  thinned  out,  to  have  sufficient 
room.  When  well  worked  during  summer,  they 
form  a  certain  crop.  They  are  quite  hardy  and 
stand  winter  without  protection.  The  leaves  of  the 
parsnip  should  never  he  touched  when  wet  from 
rain  or  dew,  as  they  cause  painful  hlisters  on  the 
hand  or  arms,  when  coming   in   contact  with  them. 


ONION. 

The  White  SilversTdn  is  a  good  variety  for  sum- 
mer and  fall  use,  but  does  not  keep  well  over 
winter.  The  Large  Yellow,  is  the  hest  variety  of 
onion  raised.  The  Top  Onion  is  a  larger  kind, 
but  coarser  and  less  finely  flowered  than  the  two 
former   kinds.       It   bears   on   the   top   of  the  stem 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  303 

a  Tauncli  of  small  sets,  wliicli  are  gathered  and 
planted  again.  The  sets  of  the  two  first  kinds 
are  raised  from  seed ;  in  early  sjiring  the  seed  is 
sown  very  thickly  in  drills.  These  seeds  produce 
small  onions,  from  the  size  of  a  pea  to  a  hazel- 
nut. These  sets  are  planted  out,  in  the  spring, 
(by  some  as  early  as  the  preceding  fall,)  in  drills 
an  inch  deep,  four  inches  apart  in  the  drill.  The 
sets  need  not  be  covered  up  with  earth.  While 
growing  they  must  be  frequently  cleaned  and  hoed. 
When  the  tops  are  nearly  dry,  'the  Onion  is  ripe, 
w^hen  it  may  be  taken  up  and  stored  away.  Onions 
are  very  hardy,  and  well  able  to  resist  frost.  When 
in  a  frozen  state,  they  should  never  be  touched, 
and  all  animals,  as  chickens,  rats,  etc.,  should  be 
carefully  kept  from  them.  To  have  green  onions 
in  winter  and  early  spring,  plant  onions  of  any 
size,  in  furrows  six  inches  deep,  in  August  or  Sep- 
tember. They  sprout  the  same  fall,  and  keep  green 
all  winter. 

Leek  is,  like  Parsley,  a  Vegetable  to  be  used 
in  soup.  It  belongs  to  the  onion  tribe.  Sow  the 
seed    in    drills,    in    spring ;    when    grown    up,    trans- 


304  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

plant  the  plants  in  rows,  or  thin  out  the  seed-bed, 
to  give  room  for  further  growth.  It  is  quite 
hardy,  and   stands   frost. 


POTATO     (IRISH). 

The  mode  of  cultivating  the  Potato  is  so  gen- 
erally known  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  take  up 
space  here  with  its  details.  There  are  many  early 
varieties,  bearing  different  local  names.  Of  these 
the  kinds,  called,  in  Ohio,  the  White  and  Blue 
MeshannicJcs,  are  far  superior  to  all  others,  either 
as   early   Potatoes,  or   for   winter   use. 

Sweet  Potatoes. — There  are  several  varieties,  known 
by  their  colors,  as  the  Red,  Telhiv,  and  Purple.  The 
earliest  are  the  Red.  The  Yelloiv  attain  the  largest 
size,  and  are  the  surest  crop.  The  Sweet  Potato 
is  a  native  of  a  warmer  climate  than  that  of  the 
middle  States.  Its  foremost  requirement  is  a  very 
loose,  sandy  soil,  rather  poor  than  rich.  The  ground 
should  be  finely  pulverized  and  then  raised  in  hills 
or  ridges,  in  which  the  Potato  plants  are  set. 
When  hills  are  made,  three  or  four  plants  should 
be    put    in   a   hill.       In    ridges    the    plants    should 


THE     VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  305 

be  twelve  inches  apart.  The  interior  of  the  hill 
or  ridge  should  contain  no  clods  of  ground,  but 
be    composed    entirely    of  loose,  fine    soil. 

Sprouting  the  Potatoes  and  raising  the  plants, 
until  ready  to  transplant,  is  the  part  requiring 
most  knowledge  and  attention.  The  bed  ^yherein 
the  plants  are  to  be  sprouted,  and  which  requires 
to  be  in  a  very  sheltered  place  in  the  Garden,  if 
not  under  glass,  should  be  first  warmed  with  fresh 
horse  manure.  After  this  has  nearly  done  steam- 
ing, it  is  covered  with  a  layer,  six  inches  deep,  of 
dry,  sandy  soil.  The  Potatoes  are  laid  on  this 
bed,  near  each  other,  and  covered  with  dry  sand 
and  earth,  to  the  depth  of  an  inch.  While  they 
are  sprouting,  and  not  yet  above  the  ground,  it  is 
highly  important  to  keep  them  entirely  dry,  as  water 
will  cause  them  to  rot.  When  two  or  three  inches 
high,  they  may  be  watered.  They  remain  in  the 
bed  until  the  time  comes  for  transplanting,  which 
is  during  the  month  of  May,  early  or  late,  accord- 
ing to  the  season.  Sprouting-beds  should  be  under 
sashes,  or  else  covered  with  a  tight  cover  of  boards. 
It    is    the   practice    of   many  Gardeners,  to   lay   the 

entire     Potato    in    the  bed,  and     afterward    to    nip 

26 


306  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

off  the  sprouts,  without  taking  with  them  a  por- 
tion of  the  old  Potato.  Sprouts,  when  pro- 
cured in  this  way,  are  not  very  certain  to  live.  A 
far  better  j)!^^?  wo  have  found  to  he,  to  cut  the 
Potato  in  small  pieces  half  an  inch  long.  These 
pieces  are  then  spread  thickly  over  the  hed,  and 
covered  with  pure  sand.  Each  piece  will  produce 
one  or  more  sprouts,  and  these  can  be  much  easier 
transplanted,  because  they  have  a  piece  of  the  old 
Potato  with  them,  fi'om  which  to  draw  their  nour- 
ishment, until   they  are    firmly  established. 

Where  Sweet  Potatoes  are  to  be  preserved  over 
winter,  they  must  be  handled  with  much  care,  that 
they  may  not  be  bruised.  In  order  to  keep  them 
from  rotting,  it  is  only  necessary  that  they  be  put 
in  a  place  where  they  will  be  dry  and  warm.  When 
first  dug,  if  the  weather  is  fair,  they  should  be 
exposed  to  the  sun  for  a  day  or  two.  In  the 
room  where  they  are  put  over  winter,  they  should 
be  put  in  boxes,  of  any  size  most  convenient,  and 
then  covered  over  with  dry  sand  or  dry  dust  from 
the  roadside,  saved  for  this  purpose.  The  place  in 
which  they  are .  to  be  put  should  be  so  constructed 
as   to   keep   out   the   frost. 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  307 

THE     STRAWBERRY, 

Much  lias  been  written  on  tlie  nature  and  the 
best  modes  of  culture  of  this  favorite  Garden-fruit. 
Such  multitudes  of  rules  and  explanations  have 
been  offered  by  cultivators,  botanists,  and  amateurs, 
as  have  rather  befogged  these  matters,  than  ren- 
dered them  plainer.  We  will  content  ourselves  with 
giving  a  few  simple  directions,  which,  if  followed 
by  the  amateur,  will  give  him  productive  beds,  with 
but    little    trouble    or    expense. 

The  Strawberry  plant  is  by  nature  very  much 
inclined  to  run  to  vines,  and  spread  over  a  large 
surface  of  ground.  The  want  of  knowledo-e  how 
to  remedy  this  evil,  is  the  main  cause  of  the  gen- 
eral ill-success  of  Strawberry  "  patches,"  in  private 
Gardens.  The  end  of  April  or  beginning  of  May, 
is  the  best  time  to  set  out  a  bed  of  Strawber- 
ries, which  will  not,  of  course,  bear  until  the  fol- 
lowing year.  Great  numbers  are  set  out  in  the 
fall,  but  they  do  not  thrive  so  well,  in  the  mid- 
dle States.  The  ground  must  be  carefully  tilled 
and  dressed.  It  is  then  laid  off  into  beds  four 
feet   wide,  with    a   narrow  walk   between    every  two 


308  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

beds.  Two  rows  are  planted  in  each  bed,  two  feet 
apart,  and  tbe  plants,  eighteen  inches  apart.  In 
the  course  of  the  summer  and  fall,  the  vines  will 
overrun  the  whole  bed,  entirely  covering  the  ground. 
In  the  fall,  three  rows,  nine  inches  wide,  are  marked 
oft'  on  each  bed,  with  a  garden-line,  and  all  plants 
outside  these  lines  are  taken  up.  If  the  three 
rows  which  remain  are  then  too  full,  they  may, 
and  ought  to  be  thinned  out,  to  give  the  plants 
sufficient  room  for  the  next  season,  when  they  will 
be  found  to  bear  very  full.  The  ground  between 
the  rows  should  be  well  hoed  in  the  fall,  and  cov- 
ered thinly  with  well-rotted  vegetable  manure,  some 
of  which  may  also  be  sprinkled  between  the  plants. 
Thus  the  beds  remain  during  winter,  except  that  if 
in  an  exposed  situation,  they  will  be  benefited  by 
being  covered  with  a  layer  of  straw,  or  fine  brush. 
In  the  spring  they  should  receive  another  thorough 
hoeins;.  The  runners  should  not  be  allowed  to 
grow  before  the  fruit  ripens.  This  is  prevented 
by  pinching  them  off.  After  the  close  of  the  bear- 
ing season,  the  plants  ai-e  allowed  to  grow  as  they 
please,  until  fall,  when  the  mode  of  treatment  above 
described,  should   be    a-j'ain   y;one   through  with.     Bv 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  309 

following  these  directions  any  one  may  secure  an 
ample  harvest  of  Strawberries,  with  but  little  trouble. 

We  have  seen  proper  to  quote  another  mode  of 
raising  Strawberries,  which  we  have  seen  in  Mr. 
Elliot's    "  American   Fruit-Grower's   Guide :" 

^^  Culture  in  alternate  Strips. —  Strike  out  the 
rows,  three  feet  apart,  with  a  line.  Plant  along 
each  line  about  a  foot  apart  in  the  row.  The 
plants  will  soon  send  out  runners,  and  these  run- 
ners should  be  alloAved  to  take  possession  of  every 
alternate  strip  of  three  feet;  the  other  strips  being- 
kept  bare  by  continually  destroying  all  runners  upon 
it.  The  whole  patch  being  kept  free  of  all  weeds, 
the  occupied  strip  or  bed  of  runuers  Avill  now  give 
a  heavy  crop  of  berries,  and  the  open  strip  of 
three  feet  will  serve  as  an  alley  from  which  to 
gather  fruit.  After  the  crop  is  over,  dig  and  pre- 
pare this  alley  or  strip  for  the  occupancy  of  the 
ncAv  runners    for    the    next    season's   crop. 

"The  runners  from  the  old  strip  Avill  now  speed- 
ily cover  the  new  space  allotted  to  them,  and  Avill 
perhaps  require  a  partial  thinning  out  to  have 
them  evenly  distributed.  As  soon  as  this  is  the 
case,    say    about    the    middle    of   August,    dig    under 


310  PRACTICAL  LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

the  wliole  of  the  old  plants,  applying  a  light  coat  of 
manure.  The  surface  may  he  then  sown  with  Tur- 
nips or  Spinach,  which  will  come  out  hefore  the 
next   season   of  fruits. 

"  In  this  way  the  strips  or  heds  occupied  by 
the  plants  are  reversed  every  season,  and  the  same 
plot  of  ground  may  thus  he  continued  in  a  pro- 
ductive  state   for   many  years." 

In  setting  out  a  new  bed,  young  plants  should 
he  selected,  as  old  stocks  are  worthless  for  this  pur- 
pose. The  heds  must  be  carefully  weeded,  and  the 
spread  of  the  little  white  clover  plant  must  be  espe- 
cially guarded  against.  It  grows  very  fast,  and 
will  soon  overrun  a  whole  bed ;  and  a  patch  over- 
run  with    clover,    had    better    be    dug    up    at    once. 

Strawberries  are  not  choice  as  to  soil.  Almost 
any  moderately  deep  Garden-ground  is  suitable  for 
them." 

"  Owing  to  the  high  price  Strawberries  bring  in  the  markets 
of  our  cities,  their  culture  has  been,  of  late  years,  brought  to 
great  perfection,  by  much  experimenting  upon  their  growth, 
and  wants.  It  is  confidently  stated  in  southern  papers,  that 
by  proper  care.  Strawberries  may  be  made  to  produce  a  con- 
tinuous succession  of  berries,  from  the  time  they  first  commence, 


THE     VEGETABLE-GAllDEN.  311 

It  is  important  that  heels  should  not  he  kept  too 
long,  as  they  deteriorate.  They  should  he  changed 
entirely,  at  least  every  three  years. 

In  regard  to  harren  and  fertile  plants,  we  will 
not  attempt  to  give  any  lengthened  explanation, 
as  the  suhject  has  heen  frequently  spoken  of  hy 
various  writers.  Mr.  Elliot,  in  his  excellent  work 
on  "Fruit-trees,"  says  on  this  suhject:  "It  is  an 
old  saying,  that  every  person  enjoys  some  hohhy 
on  whicli  to  ride.     Mr.  N.  Longworth,  of  Cincinnati, 


in  early  summer,  until  the  close  of  autumn.  This  very  desi- 
rable result  is  said  to  have  been  brought  about  by  constant 
and  regular  watering  of  the  plants.  "Vegetable  manure  only, 
and  plenty  of  water  morning  and  evening,"  says  a  report  on  the 
subject,  "  will  (in  the  opinion  of  the  gentleman  who  published  an 
account  of  the  experiment,  a  South  Carolinian),  produce  a  con- 
tinuous crop  of  Strawberries,  anywhere  in  the  Middle,  Western 
and  Southern  States."  Animal  manure  is  said  to  be  highly 
injurious,  as  it  fosters  a  natural  tendency  to  run  altogether 
to  vines.  "We  have  not  yet  seen  or  heard  of  any  one  in  the 
Western  or  Middle  States,  who  has  experimented  in  this  newly 
suggested  treatment,  and  can  not,  therefore,  vouch  for  its  appli- 
cability to  the  latitude  of  the  Middle  States;  we  give  it  for 
what  it  is  worth,  hoping  that  some  of  the  readers  of  this  work 
will  give   the  plan  a  trial. 


312  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

has  received  the  credit  of  starting  the  hohby  of 
(in  common  phrase)  male  and  female  Strawberry 
blossoms,  and  so  vigorously  has  the  hobby  been 
ridden,  that  with  locomotive  power  and  speed,  it 
has  found  its  way  into  every  journal  in  the  country, 
whether  horticultural  or  otherwise ;  and  so  generally 
is  the  distinction  of  Staminate  (male)  and  Pistillate 
(female)  flowers  understood,  that  we  do  not  deem 
it  necessary  here  to  re-describe." 

The  same  author  further  remarks,  "  With  this 
understanding,  therefore,  that  varieties  are  continu- 
ally produced,  in  which  one  organ  is  most  promi- 
nently developed,  and  measurably  to  the  destruction 
of  the  whole,  as  a  fruit-bearing  flower,  it  has  become 
a  requisite,  in  planting,  to  secure  such  portions  of 
fruit-bearing  or  pistillate  plants,  with  the  fructifying 
or  staminate  varieties,  as  to  return  the  desired  yield 
of  fruit.  The  Pistillates  being  regarded  as  the 
female,  are  counted  valuable  in  newly  formed  beds, 
as  of  ten  to  one  of  staminates  or  males." 

The  following  varieties  have  been  selected  and 
pronounced  the  very  cream  of  all  sorts  of  Straw- 
berries, by  the  same  author : 

Burr's  New  Pine. —  Fl.  pistillate  :  very  productive. 


THE   VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  313 

Western  Queen.  —  Flowers  pistillate ;  very  pro- 
ductive. 

Longworthh  Prolific. —  Flowers  Hermaphrodite  ; 
productive,  regular  and   sure   Learer. 

McAvoy^s  Superior. — Flowers  pistillate ;  fruit  very 
large. 

Jennet's  Seedling. —  Eipening  late;  flowers  pis- 
tillate; very  productive  (3,200  quarts  liaviug  been 
gathered  from  less  than  three-quarters  of  an  acre). 

Prolific  Hautboy. 

Beside  these  choicest  kiuds,  we  would  mention 
two  other  kinds,  universally  esteemed  and  most 
extensively  cultivated : 

Hovey^s  idling. — Flowers  pistillate  ;  productive 
and   very   early, 

Hudson  —  Pistillate;  more  extensively  cultivated 
than  any  other  variety.     It  ripens  later  than  others. 

Eich,  deep,  loamy,  inclining  to  clayey  soils, 
are  generally  found  to  produce  the  largest  berries, 
as    well   as    most   in    quantity. 

Trenches  two  feet  wide  and  two  feet  deep, 
with  one  foot  of  straw  or  leaves  laid  in  the  bot- 
tom, and  filled  up  with  good  soil,  well  repay  the 
labor    in   the    extra   crop    produced.      Wet   ground, 


314  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

wliere   water    stands    after    rains,    or    springy,    cold 
soils,   should  never  be  selected." 


FORCING. 

Forcing  Vegetables,  under  glass,  is  one  of  the 
most  important  operations  in  gardening.  It  is  very 
largely  carried  on,  and  is  a  profitable  business  in 
the  neighborhood  of  all  large  cities,  where  it  is  in 
the  hands  of  professional  gardeners.  In  private  Gar- 
dens, where  no  regular  gardener  is  employed,  it  is 
of  course  carried  on  on  a  smaller  scale,  and  only 
to  forward,  in  early  spring,  the  few  plants,  as  Cab- 
bages, Tomatoes,  etc.,  which  could  not  otherwise  be 
planted  until  early  summer. 

Forcing  is  a  department  of  gardening  of  itself, 
and  we  shall  not  attempt  more,  in  this  article,  than 
to  give  some  plain  directions  for  the  guidance  of 
the  amateur. 

There  are  two  ways  of  forcing  Vegetables,  viz : 
in  Hotbeds,  where  artificial  heat  is  produced  by  the 
fermentation  of  manure,  and  in  Qold-heds,  where  a 
sufficient  degree  of  heat  is  produced  by  the  action 
of   the    sun    throwing    his    rays   through    the    glass. 


THE     VEGETABLE-GAKDEN.  315 

Bbtbeds,  can  be  made  at  an}-  time  during-  the  win- 
ter, wliile  Cold-beds  can  only  he  started  in  spring, 
when  the  sun's  rays  are  more  powerful  than  in 
winter. 

For  Hotbeds,  the  frames  are  made  of  rough 
boards,  to  suit  the  size  of  the  sashes.  They  are 
set  on  a  bed  of  fresh  horse  manure,  which  has  been 
well  tramped  down  and  made  level.  The  best  of 
ground  is  filled  on  the  bed  of  manure,  six  to 
eight  inches  deep,  after  which  the  sashes  are  put 
on  the  frame.  A  few  days  are  required  to  break 
the  brisk  heat  of  the  bed.  After  the  ground  has 
acquired  a  mild  heat,  the  seed  may  be  sown.  Much 
care  is  required  when  the  seed  is  coming  up ;  if  the 
weather  is  favorable,  air  must  be  freely  admitted, 
else  the  tender  plants  are  in  danger  of  damping 
up.  When  they  have  attained  the  hight  of  an 
inch  or  two,  another  bed  or  sash  should  be  ready, 
into  which  to  transplant  them.  In  the  new  bed 
they  should  stand  two  inches  apart  each  wa}'.  In 
tliis  way  the  plants,  for  most  of  the  Vegetables 
which  have  finally  to  be  transplanted  into  the 
Garden,  may  be  raised.  Tomato-plants  require  to 
be  transplanted   frequently,  else  they  grow  too  high 


316  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

and  weak.  Salad  may  be  planted  in  the  same  way 
as  mentioned  above.  A  bed  stocked  with  Lettuce, 
will  supply  a  family  a  whole  season.  Kadishes, 
in  hotbeds,  require  much  air  ;  they  are,  to  the 
unexperienced  planter,  a  very  uncertain  crop.  It  is 
more   advisable   to   raise   them   in   cold-beds. 

For  particulars  on  hotbed  culture,  see  works 
especially  treating  on  the  subject ;  it  is  not  the 
intention  of  the  present  book  to  occupy  this  ground, 
which  is  indeed  a  very  extensive  one,  and  difficult 
to   explain   without   explanatory  engravings. 

The  management  of  cold-beds  is  less  difficult. 
They  may  be  started  about  the  middle  of  February, 
according  to  the  weather.  A  bed  of  the  very  best 
and  finest  of  ground  should  be  prepared  in  the  fall, 
and  kept  covered  over  winter,  to  have  it  in  readi- 
ness in  spring.  A  frame  covered  with  sashes  is 
then  put  over  the  bed.  On  a  mild  day,  sow  the 
seed  of  Kadishes,  Cabbage,  or  whatever  is  designed, 
in  the  ground,  or  plant  out  some  stronger  plants 
reared  in  the  hotbed.  The  bed  should  be  pro- 
tected from  frost  by  sufficiently  surrounding  its 
sides  Avith  manure,  and  covering  the  sashes  with 
straw   mats  or  boards.       Plants    raised    in   cold-beds 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  317 

are  naturally  much  stronger  than  hotbed  plants, 
but  come  on  somewhat  later  than  the  latter.  In 
March  and  April  the  plants  will  grow  very  rapidly; 
they  should  freely  enjoy  the  mild,  fresh  air,  and 
in  case  of  warm  showers,  the  sashes  should  be 
taken   off. 

Forcing-hech,  should  be  placed  in  the  warmest 
spot  in  the  Vegetable-garden.  If  possible,  they 
should  be  sheltered  against  north  and  west  winds, 
by  a  tight  fence  or  wall.  They  must  have  an 
aspect  to  the  south,  and  a  fine  exposure  to  the 
sun's    rays. 


RAISING     SEED. 


Two  rules  are  to  be  strictly  observed  in  rais- 
ing  seed : 

1.  Never  to  plant  related  kinds  of  Vegetables 
near  each  other,  when  it  is  desired  to  obtain  seed 
from    either. 

2.  Always  to  select  the  best  fruits,  roots,  or 
plants    of  each    kind    for    seed. 

The  related  kinds,  if  going  to  seed  near  each 
other,    will     frequently     deteriorate  ;     thus,    if    two 


318  PRACTICAL    LANDSCAPE    GAKDENING. 

varieties  of  Eadislies,  Beets,  Turnips,  etc.,  are  planted 
together,  tlie  seed  of  either  will  produce  many  differ- 
ent  varieties,  which    are    not    to   be    relied    on. 

A  certain  part  of  a  row  of  Peas  or  Beans  should 
be  selected  when  in  fruit,  and  set  apart  for  seed. 
Thus  the  plants  will  produce  a  full  crop  of  fruit, 
which  is  taken  home  when  fully  matured  and  per- 
fected. To  save  only  the  last,  which  is  always 
the  poorest,  for  seed,  is  bad  policy,  and  no  good 
seed   can   be    thus    obtained. 

Of  Tomatoes,  Eggplants,  Peppers,  Melons,  Cucum- 
bers, and  Corn,  the  earliest  and  largest  fruit  should 
be    saved   for   seed. 

Prom  a  patch  of  late  Cabbage,  the  best,  full- 
est, and  hardest  heads  should  be  selected,  well  taken 
care  of  over  winter,  and  planted  out  in  spring. 
The  seed  of  the  main  stem  is  far  preferable  to 
that  of  the  lower  side-branches.  Early  Cabbage 
and  Cauliflower  seed  is  mostly  all  imported  from 
England,  our  climate  being  unftivorable  for  per- 
fecting  the   seeds   of  those   varieties. 

Greens,  as  Kale,  Spinach,  etc.,  run  to  seed  in 
early  summer,  when  the  tops  are  cut  down  and 
saved. 


THE    VEGETABLE-GARDEN.  319 

Of  Lettuce,  the  best  heads  are  saved  for  seed  ; 
all  the  rest  should  be  removed  before  goino-  to 
seed.  Endive  is  planted  out  in  spring  for  the 
production   of  seed. 

Roots,  for  seed,  should  be  selected  with  especial 
care.  The  round-rooted  Vegetables,  as  Eadishes, 
Beets,  and  Turnips,  should  be  well  shaped,  having 
but  one  thin  and  short  root  (tail) ;  all  forked  roots 
are  unfit  for  seed.  The  long-rooted  kinds,  as 
Carrot,  Parsnip,  Salsify,  Blood-beet,  etc.,  must  be  of 
straight  and  uniform  shape,  having  but  one  root ; 
no  forked  Carrot,  Beet,  or  Parsnip,  should  be  planted 
out  for  seed.  The  roots,  except  early  Eadishes, 
are  all  to  be  kept  over  winter  and  planted  out 
in    spring. 

The  Onions  set  apart  for  seed  should  be  of 
large  and  flat  shape.  The  careless  seed-grower 
indiscriminately  plants  all  that  comes  to  his  hands, 
and  thus  a  great  quantity  of  worthless  seed  is 
produced  yearly,  and  palmed  ofl:'  upon  the  public 
as   a   first-rate   article. 


INCLOSURES. 


FENCING,   HEDGE-PLANTING,   ETC. 

As  a  substantial  and  permanent  Inclosure  is 
indispensably  necessary  to  the  safety  of  any  place, 
we  desire  to  make  a  few  remarks  on  the  mate- 
rial of  whick  tkey  should  be  composed,  and  on 
their   relation   to   the   scenery  which   they  surround. 

Owing   to   the   scarcity    of  suitable    rail   timber, 

and   the   high   prices   of  fencing    lumber,    in    many 

parts   of  the   country,  public   attention   has,  of  late, 

been  directed  to  the  cultivation  of  Hedges,  to  which 

a   plant    indigenous    to   this   hemisphere,  the   Osage 

Orange    ( Madura    aurantiaca ),    is    peculiarly   well 

adapted.       Many  experiments  have  been  made    with 

this  plant,  and  it  is  now  a  well-established  fact,  that, 

by  proper  management,  it  will  make  a  dense,  strong, 

and  permanent    living    fence,    equal    to   any   Euro- 
(320) 


INCLOSUKES.  321 

pean  thorn  hedge,  and  far  superior  to  other  inclo- 
sures  constructed  of  wood.  Hedge  planting,  where 
performed  without  due  understanding  and  precau- 
tion, will  not  naturally  be  attended  by  favorable 
results,  which  is  the  reason  why  some  men,  disap- 
pointed after  the  first  trial,  have  dropped  the  sub- 
ject, and  openly  pronounced  the  whole  a  humbug 
of  the   day. 

It  would  be  useless  for  us  to  give  any  lengthened 
details  on  the  cultivation  of  Hedges,  in  this  volume, 
as  sufficient  light  has  been  thrown  on  the  subject, 
by  the  various  writings  of  practical  men ;  we  will, 
however,  mention  three  fundamental  points,  acknowl- 
edged by  all  writers  and  practitioners,  to  be  neces- 
sary for  the  successful  cultivation  of  the  Osage 
Orange,  viz:  The  careful  preparation  of  the  ground 
before  planting;  a  sufficiency  of  plants  in  each 
row,  and  the  proper  attention  in  pruning  and  trim- 
ming, especially  during  the  first  years  of  its  growth. 
If  these  three  things  are  well  attended  to,  hedge 
planting  will,  in  most  cases,  prove  satisfactory,  as 
so  many  beautiful  specimens  of  young  Hedges 
throughout   the    country  may  testify. 

A   place   pretending   to   be   a  Garden,  should  be 


822  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE    GARDENING. 

provided  witli  a  snlbstantial  inclosure,  whose  shape 
aud  appearance  are  in  accordance  with  the  degree  of 
elegance  of  the  whole  premises.  To  surround  a 
well-kept  Pleasure-ground  with  a  heavy  rail  fence, 
or  a  scanty-looking  board  fence,  w^ould  surely  be  a 
grave  fault  against  all  relative  fitness.  Whether 
a  board  or  paling  fence,  or  an  iron  railing,  it  should 
please   the   eye   by  its   well-finished  workmanship. 

A  w^ell-trained  Hedge,  is  undoubtedly  a  suitable 
inclosure  for  such  a  place ;  and  though  its  clipped 
shape  may  not  be  in  conformity  with  the  natural 
groups  and  forms  of  the  inside,  yet  its  presence 
w^ill  be  fully  justified  by  the  sense  of  its  necessity 
to  protect  them  properly  from  the  encroachment  of 
outsiders  —  man   or   beast. 

A  rage  for  the  "picturesque"  obtaining,  with 
some  gardeners  and  improvers,  has  induced  them 
to  try  their  skill,  even  on  the  cultivation  of  Pic- 
turesque Hedges.  The  system  of  hap-hazard  mix- 
ture, is  said  to  produce  wonderful  effects  on  hedges. 
Let  flowering  shrubs,  as  Eoses,  Snowballs,  etc.,  be 
set  between  the  plants  composing  the  body  of  the 
hedge,  and  let  these  shrubs  attain  a  natural  form; 
to   break    the   uniform   top   line,  this  is   one  of   the 


INCLOSURES.  323 

recipes  to  form  a  picturesque  Hedge.  We  would 
hesitate  to  try  an  experiment  of  this  sort  on  a 
large  scale,  as  we  consider  the  pictu7'e§que,  and  a 
hedge,  to  bo  two  extremes  in  the  economy  of  plan- 
tation, which  can  never  he  harmoniously  brought 
together.  Wc  remember  to  have  seen  wild-o-row- 
ing,  and  completely  neglected  hedges,  but  we  never 
thought  of  calling  snch  ^^  incturcsque." 

Another  pattern  of  picturescjueness,  in  hedging, 
is  to  choose  a  serpentine  line,  in  the  place  of  the 
old-fashioned  straight  line,  generally  met  Avith  in 
hedges.  It  is  useless  to  say  anything  against  such 
a  picturesque  taste  —  which  can  only  gratify  the 
notions    of  the  adopter,  and  disgust    everybody  else. 

A  hedge,  when  ornamented  with  fanciful  feathers, 
is  sure  to  lose,  beside  its  usefulness,  its  reasonable 
sense  of  necessity,  which  alone  excuses  its  stiff 
form,  and  justifies  its  presence ;  it  should  not  pre- 
tend to  be  any  more  than  what  it  really  is  —  a 
permanent    line    of   separation. 

To  conceal  the  boundaries  and  fences  as  much 
as  possible,  is  a  rule  generally  acknowledged  in 
Landscape  Gardening.  This  is  done  to  give  a  natu- 
ral  freedom    to    the   scenery,   and    to    hide    the  ugly 


324  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE   GARDENING. 

shape  of  fences.  The  smallness  of  many  places, 
also,  may  even  make  it  desirahle,  to  give  an  idea 
of  greater   extent    of  property. 

In  the  parks  of  Europe,  often  containing  thou- 
sands of  acres,  and  surrounded  hy  a  large  tract 
of  land,  also  controlled  by  the  proprietor,  it  is  an 
easy  matter  to  give  an  idea  of  an  unbounded 
range  of  property,  by  expelling  all  unsightly  boun- 
dary fences.  It  is  there  the  duty  of  the  Landscape 
Gardener,  to  use  every  means  in  his  power  to 
impress  the  beholder  with  the  magnitude  of  the 
wide-spreading  domains  of  his  employer.  Mr.  Eep- 
ton  recommends,  in  one  instance,  that  every  mile- 
stone, and  every  tavern-stand  round  about,  should 
be  stamped  with  the  arms  of  a  certain  nobleman. 
Deceptions  and  impositions  in  this  way,  would  prove 
useless  and  ridiculous  in  a  republican  country  like 
ours,  where  no  one  acknowledges  in  his  neighbor 
the  right  to  domineer,  and  where  real  estate  re- 
peatedly undergoes  the  process  of  speculation,  and 
consequently  is  divided  and  re-divided.  The  pass- 
ing crowd  find  it  difficult  to  believe  that  all  tlieir 
eyes  behold,  for  many  miles  round,  is  the  prop- 
erty   of  a   single    individual. 


-«►  INCLOSURES.  325 

To  give  an  idea  of  unbounded  property,  should 
in  no-  case  be  attempted,  wliere  everything  around 
contradicts  it.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  very  com- 
mon for  us  to  see  a  proprietor  employ,  beside  a 
Landscape  Gardener,  a  whitewasher  ^■■'  also,  who  is 
set  to  work  to  whitewash  the  entire  boundary- 
fence,  to  make  it  conspicuous,  and  to  show  to  behold- 
ers at  a  distance,  the  extent  of  the  patch  under 
his   control. 

We  feel  somewhat  doubtful  whether  this  is  in 
harmony  with  a  correct  taste,  though  no  one  will 
dispute  that  painting,  or  even  whitewashing  of  the 
most  conspicuous  part  of  a  neat  boundary-fence, 
along  the  highway,  or  otherwise,  is  desirable  and 
even   necessary. 

Proper  attention  should  also  be  paid  to  a  neat 
and  tasteful  entrance-gate.  The  fence  and  gate 
should,  under  all  circumstances,  be  congruous  to 
one   another,  and   collectively  to  the  whole  grounds. 

A  Gate-Lodge,  built  in  a  plain,  yet  neverthe- 
less   tasteful    style,    will    add    considerably    to    the 


*•' Whitewasliing  the  steins  of  noble  forest-trees  in  the  garden, 
betrays   a  want  of  taste. 


326  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GAEDENING. 

importance  of  tlie  entrance,  and  more  yet  to  the 
safety  of  the  premises,  if  occupied  by  a  trust- 
worthy  keeper. 

Fences  are  necessary  to  divide  the  various  de- 
partments of  the  premises  from  one  another.  Thus 
the  parterre  of  Flowers  surrounding  the  house,  if 
situated  on  a  terrace,  should  have  a  protection- 
"balustrade,  which  might  very  appropriately  be  orna- 
mented with  Flower  Vases,  and  should  in  all  cases 
be   elegant   and   of  a   tasteful   pattern. 

The  Pleasure-ground  should  be  divided  from  the 
Park  by  a  line  of  separation,  to  keep  the  cattle 
and  sheep  at  a  proper  distance  from  the  Flowers 
and  Shrubbery  which  embellish  the  scenery  round 
the  mansion.  This  line,  however,  should  not  be 
made  conspicuous,  by  a  heavy  board  fence  or  stiff 
hedge,  as  this  would  divide  the  ground  into  two 
scenes,  which  ought  to  be  but  one  —  diflPering  one 
from  the  other  only  in  the  degree  of  elegance  and 
high  keeping;  the  pleasure-ground  being  but  a 
beautifiilly-polished  foreground,  to  the  wide-spread- 
ing,   picturesque    scenes    of   the    Park. 

To  this  end  two  kinds  of  Fences  may  be  chosen ; 
a  wire   fence,  painted  green,  which   is  scarcely  visi- 


mcLOSURES.  327 

ble  from  a  distance,  or  a  sunk  fence,  often  called, 
Ha-lia.  The  sunk  fence  is  built  on  the  same  prin- 
ciple as  a  common  board  fence;  it  is  set  in  a 
trench,  with  slanting  sides,  having  the  same  depth 
as  the  intended  Fence.  Thus  two  lawns,  of  which 
the  one  is  kept  under  the  scythe,  and  the  other 
grazed  by  cattle,  will  appear  to  be  one  scene,  ani- 
mated by  the  movement  of  the  animals,  which  are, 
nevertheless  kept  at  a  proper  distance  from  the 
habitation   of  the  proprietor. 

It  is  evident  that  a  wire  or  sunk  Fence,  is 
only  necessary  at  such  points,  as  are  open  to  the 
eye,  as  the  Lawn.  In  the  thicker  parts  of  masses 
of  Shrubbery  and  Trees,  almost  any  common  fence 
will  do,  if  not  visible  from  a  distance.  Where  a 
Pleasure-ground  is  bounded  by  tilled  fields,  wdiich 
is  often  the  case  in  the  country,  it  should  natu- 
rally, also,  be  divided  by  a  Fence ;  which,  if  respect- 
able-looking, will  not   be  objectionable. 

The  Groves  of  Trees  and  masses  of  Shrubbery 
of  the  pleasure-ground,  should  not  be  harshly  cut 
oif  at  this  fence,  but  should  occasionally  extend 
beyond  it,  while  detached  clumps  of  trees  may  be 
set   at    some    distance    from    them,    in    the    field,   to 


328  PRACTICAL   LANDSCAPE  GARDENING. 

give  some  contiuuity  to  the  scenes  of  tlie  pleasure- 
ground. 

The  Vegetable-garden,  also,  must  he  secured  by 
a  boundary  Fence.  For  this  purpose  a  hedge  may 
be  chosen,  or  which  will  be  more  economical,  a 
hoard  fence  might  be  made,  on  which  Grape-vines 
may  be   trained. 

The  masses  of  plantation  in  a  Park,  when  newly 
set  out,  must  be  surrounded  by  a  temporary  Fence, 
as  long  as  the  trees  are  small,  if  it  is  desired  to 
pasture  cattle  on  the  lawns.  Such  fences  may 
be  removed  as  soon  as  the  trees  have  attained 
sufficient  strength  to  resist  the  encroachment  of 
animals. 


THE    END. 


4^ 


S 


<g 


9? 


23  \*EST  FOXTK.TH  STREET,  CINCINNATI. 


\      » 


Printers,  Binders,  Publishers,  Stationers, 

AXD  MANUFACTURERS  OF 

PAQED    BLANK    BOOKS,    ETC. 
BEAEEKS   IN 

SCIENTIFIC,  SCHOOL,  MISCELLANEOUS, 

MUSIC,  IIYMIs  &  BLANK  BOOKS, 

WHOLESALE  AND  KETAIL. 


MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  8l  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


The  American  Eclectic  Dispensatory — By  JOITX 
KING-,  M.  D.,  Professor  iu  the  Ciucinnati  Eclectic  Med- 
ical Institute.  One  Volume,  large  Octavo,  1396  pages. 
The  second  edition  is  just  ready,  and  the  prospect  is  that 
further  editions  will  soon  be  demanded,  so  great  is  the 
growing  interest  felt  in  the  princii^les  of  the  Amekican 
Reform  Practitioners  of  Medicine. 

Good  Old  School  Authority. — The  "■American  Journal  of  Phar- 
maci/,"  speaks  of  the  work  as  follows  :  "  We  have  taken  some  pains 
to  give  it  a  careful  examination,  although  pressed  for  time.  ''  '■'  '■•' 
The  numerous  Plants  which  are  brought  forward,  as  Eclectic  Reme- 
dies, embrace  many  of  undoubted  value.  "  '•'  -'  The  work  embodies 
a  large  number  of  facts  of  a  therapeutical  character,  which  deserve 
to  be  studied.  Many  of  these  are  capable  of  being  adopted  by  Phy- 
sicians, especially  by  COUNTEY  PHYSICIANS,  who  have  the  ad- 
vantage of  more  easily  getting  the  Plants.  '•'  '■"  "  The  attention 
which  is  now  being  given  by  the  Eclectics,  in  classifying  and  arrang- 
ing facts  and  observations  relative  to  American  Plants,  will  certainly 
be  attended  with  excellent  results.  '■'    '-"    '•■' 

"The  galenical  preparations,  extracts,  syrups,  tinctures,  etc., 
peculiar  to  this  Dispensatory,  are  mostly  well-constructed  prepara- 
tions, containing  the  virtues  of  the  ingredients  used ;  and  we  have 
no  doubt  that  many  of  them  are  valuable  agents.  An  account  of 
one  of  these  we  have  copied. 

"  It  would  afford  us  much  pleasure  to  extract  a  number  of  the  ar- 
ticles fi'om  the  Eclectic  Dispensatory,  that  would  give  a  better  idea 
of  the  peculiar  views  and  opinions  of  this  set  of  practitioners ;  but 
the  length  of  this  article  admonishes  us  to  stop ;  yet  we  cannot  close 
without  adjudging  to  Dr.  King  the  merit  of  giving  perspicuity  and 
order  to  the  vast  mass  of  material  collected  under  the  name  of  Bo- 
tanical Medicine,  and  for  his  determination  to  oppose  the  wholesale 
quackery  of  Eclectic  Chemical  Institutes.  The  Eclectics  have  opened 
a  wide  field  for  the  rational  Therapeutist,  and  the  organic  Chemist; 
and  we  hope  that  Physicians  and  Ajmthecaries  will  not  be  repelled  by 
a  false  pride,  or  an  unjust  feeling  of  contemjit,  from  reaping  the  har- 
vest which  will  accrue  to  observation  and  experiment."  AVc  add 
another  extract  or  two : — 

"  This  volume  is  one  which,  in  our  opinion,  the  whole  Medical 
Profession  should  be  proud  of.  The  work,  comprising  a  miich  larger 
amount  of  knowledge  than  any  other,  relating  to  the  indigenous 
Materia  Medica — to  results  of  American  research  in  Organic  Chem- 
isti-y,  etc.,  seems  to  be  emphatically  an  American  work,  and  as  such, 
is  better  adapted  to  our  condition,  and  more  applicable  to  the  real 
wants  of  the  Physicians  of  this  country. 

"  No  one  can  fail  to  see,  from  an  examination  of  this  volume,  that 
the  meilical  resources  of  this  country  are  being  fast  develnped  and 
systematized.  Beside  the  remedies  usually  treated  of  in  like  works, 
this  book  contains  an  accurate  description  of  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  tvhich  are  new,  and  many  of  which  science  hereby  has  rescued 
from  blundering  empiricism.     About  Thirty,  active  or  concentrated 


MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  &,  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Medicinal  Principles  are  treated  of.  These  hold  similar  relations 
to  the  crude  articles,  from  which  they  are  derived,  that  Quinine 
holds  to  Peruvian  Bark,  and  for  conyenience  and  reliability  the  Ec- 
lectic School  claim  they  are  unsurpassed." — Rochester  Democrat. 

"  The  examination  -we  have  been  able  to  give  it,  has  convinced  us 
that  a  very  great  deal  of  labor  has  been  bestowed  upon  the  produc- 
tion, and  that  it  contains  an  account  of  a  larger  number  of  the 
Medical  Plants  indigenous  to  our  country,  than  any  other  work 
with  which  we  are  acquainted." — Michigan  Journal  of  Medicine. 

Lengtliy  reports,  commendatory  of  the  work,  have  been  made, 
and  several  Medical  Cullcges  have  adopted  it  as  a  text- 
book. The  publishers  are  happy  to  say  that  they  are 
constantly  receiving  orders  from  every  portion  of  the 
country. — Price  $6  00. 

King's  Eclectic  Obstetrics. — This  work,  announced 
some  time  since,  and  looked  fur  so  anxiously  for  several 
months  past,  is  now  in  hand,  and  will   be  published  soon. 

Jones  &  Morrow's  American  Eclectic  Medical 
Practice. — Complete  in  Two  Volumes,  octavo,  1650 
pages.     Price  ^7  00. 

In  these  days  of  common  sense  in  Medicine,  all  respectable  Physi- 
cians are  Eclectics. — Boston  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal. 

That  the  Eclectic  Schools  teach  principles  varying  essentially  from 
what  is  taught  in  the  Allopathic  Colleges,  is  unmistakable.     ■' 

The  general  and  extensive  adoption  of  vegetable  remedies,  a  perfect 
and  efiicient  understanding  of  their  therapeutic  properties,  and  of 
their  applicability  to  diseased  conditions  of  the  body,  constitute 
cardinal  features  of  the  Eclectic  practice. —  Worcester  Jotir.  of  Medicine. 

It  bears  upon  every  page  the  stamp  of  Dr.  J.'s  vigorous,  independ- 
ent and  practical  style  of  thought.  Such  a  work  has  long  been 
needed,  and  we  rejoice  to  know  that  it  has  been  produced. — I)r.  Bu- 
chanan in  Eclectic  Medical  Journal. 

The  views  maintained  by  the  authors  are  stated  with  clearness 
and  precision ;  the  style  is  flowing  and  lively,  and  the  whole  book  is 
remarkably  free  from  the  verbiage  which  is  such  a  general  feature 
of  medical  treatises. — Xeic  York  Tribune. 

Pulte's  Homoeopathic  Domestic  Physician — \\c- 
vised.  enlarged  and  illustrated  with  Anatomical  Plates. 
Eighteenth  Thousand.   1  YoL  12mo.  pp.  576.  Price  $1   50. 

It  is  very  comprehensive,  and  very  explicit. — iV.  T.  Evangelist. 

A  very  lucid  and  useful  hand-book.  Its  popular  language,  aud  exclusion  of  dif- 
ficult terminologj',  are  decided  recommendations.  Its  success  is  good  evidence  of 
the  value  of  the  work. — X.  Y.  Times. 

•=•-,"•  For  Hoime  Practice,  this  work  is  recommended  as  superior  to  all  others,  by 
Dr.Vanderlmrnh,  of  New  York,  Drs.  Hull  and  Eossman,  of  Brooklyn.  Dr.  Gran- 
{jer,  of  St.  Louis,  aud  others  <jf  equal  celebrity  in  difterent  portions  of  the  country. 


MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  &,  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


HomcEopathic  Manual  of  Obstetrics — From  the 
French  of  Dr.  Croscrio.  By  M.  COTE,  M.  D.,  1  Vol. 
12mo.     Second  edition.     Price  75  cts. 

It  is  one  of  those  few  practical  works  which  will  aid  practitioners 
at  the  bedside  of  the  sick.  *•'  '■'  *  The  volume  may  seem  insig- 
nificant, because  it  contains  only  153  pages ;  but  our  readers  can 
hardly  conceive  the  amount  of  information  which  the  author  has 
contrived,  in  the  clearest  manner,  to  express  in  a  few  words.  *  '■'  ■■' 
The  practice  is  jiurely  Homoeopathic. — Am.  Jour,  of  Horn. 

Typhoid  Fever,  and  its  Homoeopathic  Treatment — By 
AUGr.  EAPOU,  Doctor  of  Medicine,  Paris.  Translated 
by  M.  Cote,  M.  D.     1  Vol.  12mo.     Price  50  cts. 

A  Homoeopathic  Treatise  on  the  Diseases  of 
Children— By  ALPH.  TESTE.  Translated  from  the 
French  by  Emma  H.  Cote. 

The  author  of  this  work,  an  experienced  practitioner  of  the  homoe- 
opathic school,  and  resident  physician  at  the  baths  of  Bagnohs  de 
V  Orne,  in  France,  professes  to  have  compiled  its  directions  from 
voluminous  files  of  notes  taken  in  liis  ]iractice.  The  pathological 
part,  that  is  to  say,  the  portion  of  it  which  describes  the  diseases, 
and  points  out  the  specific  method  of  cure,  occupies  three-fourths  of 
the  volume.  It  is  preceded  by  a  treatise  on  the  Hygiene  of  children, 
and  some  preliminary  observations  on  the  homoeopathic  system,  de- 
signed to  remove  the  prejudices  against  it.  The  work  is  intended 
as  a  popular  manual,  to  be  read  by  mothers  and  others  M-ho  pay 
some  attention  to  domestic  medicine.  Its  directions  are  not  restricted 
to  tlie  period  of  absolute  infanc.y,  but  extend  to  the  second  stage  of 
childhood.  The  author's  methods  of  cure  are  marked  by  a  simplicity 
which  is  not  always  found  in  such  manuals ;  and  the  reader  is  not 
embarrassed  by  a  multitude  of  prescriptions  depending  on  differ- 
ences in  symptoms  whicli  are  scarcely  appreciable.  Those  who  are 
in  the  habit  of  consulting  works  of  this  nature,  will  find  in  Dr. 
Teste''s  book,  many  things  not  to  be  met  with  elsewhere. — Nav  York 
Evening  Post. 

It  is  the  only  treatise  on  the  homoeopathic  plan,  expressly  devoted 
to  the  diseases  of  children.  With  great  completeness  of  detail,  it 
describes  the  principal  diseases  to  which  that  age  is  subject,  together 
with  tlieir  appropriate  remedies.  As  a  manual  of  domestic  practice, 
it  must  be  welcome  to  the  receivers  of  Hahnemann's  system.— iN'eii; 
York  Tribune. 

A  work  of  this  kind  has  long  been  M'anted.  While  the  science  of 
Homoeopathy  has  steadily  increased  in  influence,  it  has  won  the  es- 
pecial favor  of  mothers— not  all,  but  many— who  are  anxious  to 
inform  tliemselves  to  the  utmost,  concerning  the  nurture  of  their 
offspring.  The  plan  of  the  book  is  admirable;  what  it  says  is  said 
plainly  and  gracefully;  while  its  directions  seem  so  indispensable 
that  we  wonder   how  they  have   been   foregone   so   long.— Buffalo 

ExJJTCSS. 


MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  8l  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Mrs.  Ben.  Darby — Or  the  Weal  and  Woe  of  So- 
cial Life,  By  A.  MAEIA  COLLINS.  Third  Edition, 
One  Volume,  12mo $1  00 

"  0  !  tliat  men  should  put  an  enemy  into  their  mouths  to 
steal  away  their  brains !  that  we  should  with  joy,  revel, 
pleasure,  and  applause,  transform  ourselves  into  beasts." — 
Oihdlo. 

Early  Engagements,  and  Florence — (A  Se- 
quel). Second  Edition.  By  SARAH  MARSHALL 
HAYDEX.     One  neat  Volume,  12mo 0  75 

The  Life  of  Blennerhassett — Comprising  an  au- 
thentic narrative  of  the  celebrated  expedition  of 
Aarox  Burr,  and  containing  many  additional  facts 
not  heretofore  published.  By  WILLLVM  H.  SAF- 
FORD.     One  Vol.  12mo.  Cloth.     Second  Edition       1   25 

Life  of  Thomas  Chalmers,  D.  D.,  L.  L.  D. — 

By  Rev.  JAMES  C.  MOFFAT.  D.  D..  Professor 
of  Latin  and  Lecturer  on  History  in  New  Jersey 
College,  Princeton.  One  Vol.  12mo.  pp.  435.  With 
a  fine  Portrait  on  steel.     Third  Edition.  ...        1    25 

After  a  careful  perusal,  we  are  convinced  that  it  is  supe- 
rior to  any  other  life  of  the  great  Scottish  champion  of  Free 
Church  Principles. —  Christian  Advocate. 

Poetry  of  the  Vegetable  World — A  popular 
exposition  of  the  Science  of  Botany,  in  its  relations 
to  man.  By  M.  J.  SCHLE1DEX,"M.  D.,  Professor 
of  Botan}"  in  the  I'niversity  of  Jena.  Second  Amer- 
ican, from  the  London  Edition  of  Htnfrcy.  Edited 
by  Alphonso  Wood,  M.  A.,  author  of  the  '•  Class 
Book  of  Botany."     One  Volume.     ...  ,        1   25 

It  is  as  interesting  as  the  most  attractive  romance,  as  beau- 
tiful as  nature,  and  as  pleasing  as  the  finest  poem. — .Boston 

Atlas. 

It  is,  in  the  true  sense  of  the  words,  a  popular  and  philo- 
sophical account  of  the  development  and  relation  of  plants. 
One  of  those  modern  labors  of  profound  scholars,  by  whicli 
science  is  becoming  intelligible  and  interesting  to  the  mass 
of  the  world,  without  any  loss  of  its  i)rofessional  accuracy 
and  dignity. — Literary  World. 

The  originality  of  its  views,  the  poetic  chai-m  of  its  illus- 
trations, and  tlie  large  amount  of  positive  instruction  which 
it  imparts,  will  recommend  it  to  every  reader  of  taste  and 
intelligence. — Harper's  Majazine. 


MOORE,  WJLSTACH,  KEYS  Si,  CO.'S   PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Course  of  Creation— By  JOH?^  ANDER- 
SON, D.  D.,  with  a  Glossary  of  Scientific  Terms 
added  to  the  American  edition.  With  Numerous 
Illustrations.  A  popular  work  on  Geology.  Third 
Thousand,     One  A'olume,  12mo.  pp.  384.  .     .     .     Si  25 

The  simplest,  most  lucid,  and  satisfactory  exposition  of 
Geological  Phenomena  we  have  had  the  good  fortune  to  meet 
with. — Ph iladelph ia  Citron icie. 

Better  adapted  than  any  other  in  our  language,  to  convey, 
in  short  space,  to  intelligent  readers,  an  accurate  view  of  the 
discoveries  of  this  most  interesting  science. —  Christ.  Herald. 

Scenes  and  Legends  of  the  North  of  Scot- 
land—By HUGH  MILLEE,  author  of  "  Footprints 
of  the  Creator,"  etc.,  etc.  Fourth  Thousand.  One 
Volume,  12mo.  pp.  436 1  00 

Home  stories  and  legends  in  their  native  costume,  and  in 
full  life. — iV.   Y.  Indepcnde7it. 

The  style  has  a  purity  and  elegance  which  reminds  one  of 
Irving,  or  of  Irving's  master.  Goldsmith. — London  Spectator. 

Hart's  Valley  of  the  Mississippi — One  Volume, 

12mo.     Cloth 0  88 

A  succinct  Compilation  from  authentic  documents,  of  facts 
in  the  history  of  the  Mississippi  valley,  to  the  latest  dates. 
The  work  bears  the  marks  of  industry  and  discrimination. — 
N.  Y.  Tribune. 

Starting  with  its  discovery  and  colonization  by  the  French, 
and  tracing  its  subsequent  hist^'.Ty,  the  author  has  grouped 
the  most  prominent  events,  and  placed  them  before  the  reader 
in  an  attractive  garb. — Nashville  Banner. 

The  Three   Great  Temptations  of  Young 

Men — With  several  Lectures  addressed  to  Busi- 
ness and  Professional  men.  By  SAIMUEL  W. 
FISHER,  D.  D.  One  Vol.,  12mo.  pp.  336.  Third 
Thousand 1  00 

AVe  shall  put  the  book  by  upon  one  of  the  choice  shelves  of 
our  private  library. — Boston  Congregatimalist. 

The  style  is  bohl,  manly  and  vigorous,  and  in  some  por- 
tions very  beautiful.  ...  In  the  name  of  the  young  men 
of  our  cities,  we  thank  Dr.  Fisher  for  preparing  and  sending 
forth  so  timely  a  volume. — Presbyterian  Herald. 

A  Buckeye  Abroad — Or  Wanderings  in  Europe 
and  the  Orient.  By  SAMUEL  S.  COX.  Third 
Edition.     Hlustrated 1  25 


MOORE,  WILSTACH,  KEYS  8l  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Romanism,  the  Enemy  of  Education,  of  Free 
Institutions,  and  of  Christianity — By  N.  L. 
KICE,  D.  D.,  Pastor  of  the  Second  Presbyterian 
Church,   St.  Louis.     Third   Edition,   one  Volume, 

12mo.     Cloth SI  00 

Emiucntly  a  book  for  the  people,  for  the  times,  and  for  our 

country. — Princeton  Review. 

The  style  of  the  book  is  eminently  popular — rapid,  pointed, 

and  suggestive. — X.  Y.  Evangelist. 

Rice  and  Blanchard's  Debate  on  Slavery — 

Held   in    Cincinnati,    in   October,    1845.      Fourth 
Thousand.     One  Volume,   12mo 1   25 

Philosophy  of  the  Plan  of  Salvation — A  book 
for  the  times,  by  an  American  Citizen,  with  an  In- 
troductory Essay,  by  CALVIN  E.  STOW'E,  D.  D. 
Twentieth  Thousand.     One  Volume,  12mo.    .     .       0  63 

Buchanan  on  Grape  Culture,  and  Long- 
■worth  on  the  Stra-wberry — Fifth  Kevised  Edi- 
tion.    One  Volume,  12mo.  pp.  14-1.     Cloth.  .     .       0  63 

The  most  reliable  and  complete  work  we  have  seen  on  the 
subject. — Downing'' s  Horticulturist. 

Will  be  found  to  convey  the  most  opportune  and  valuable 
instruction  to  all  interested  in  the  subjects. — JVeill's  Fruit 
and  Flower  Garden. 

Woman's  Medical  Guide — Containing  Essays 
on  the  I'hysical,  ]Moral,  and  Edi;cational  Develop- 
ment of  Females,  and  the  Homoeopathic  treatment 
of  their  diseases,  in  all  periods  of  life.  Together 
with  directions  for  the  remedial  use  of  Water  and 
Gymnastics.  By  J.  H.  PULTE,  M.  D.,  author  or 
"  Homoeopathic  Domestic  Physician."  Second  Thou- 
sand.    One  Volume,  12mo.,  pp.  332 1   00 

As  a  conti'ibution  to  popular  hygeine,  it  may  be  ranked 
among  the  most  judicious  and  instructive  works  on  the  subject 
that  have  yet  been  given  to  the  public  The  delicate  topics  of 
which  it  treats  are  discussed  with  great  propriety  of  senti- 
ment and  language,  while  the  copious  information  with  which 
it  abounds,  is  adapted  to  lead  to  the  formation  of  correct  and 
salutary  habits. — N.  Y.  Tribune. 

The  Sacred  Melodeon — On  a  neiv  system  of  No- 
tation. Designed  for  the  use  of  Churches,  Singing 
Societies,  and  Academies.  By  A.  S.  Hayden.  Thir- 
tieth Thousand Q  71 


a.  M.  KERN, 

CINCINNATI, 

FURXISHE3  PLAXS  POR  THE  liTPROYEMEXT  OF 


m 


/"%'-#C 


<^'^ 


:i'jfl 


ALSO, 

\riL,L.  GIVE   P£RSONAIi  SUPER  VISION   TO 


Applicatiou  may  be  made  in  jDerson  or  by  letter.     Address  as 
above,  care  of  Mooke,  Wilstach,  Ejeys  &  Co. 


